Diagramas Interruptores OEZ PDF

Modeion
J1-2011-A
Moulded case circuit breakers
www.oez.com
Modeion
Any changes reserved
OEZ s.r.o.
edivsk 339
561 51 Letohrad
Czech Republic
tel.: +420 465 672 111
+420 465 672 101
fax: +420 465 672 398
+420 465 672 151
e-mail: oeztrade.cz@oez.com
www.oez.com
www.oez.com
Modeion
CONTENTS
INDEX ......................................................................................................................................................................................A
SPECIFICATIONS FOR SELECTION OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS..........B
SUMMARY OF OVERCURRENT RELEASES..................................................................................................B
PURCHASE ORDER EXAMPLE.......................................................................................................................B
REPLACEMENTS OF BA511 CIRCUIT BREAKERS .....................................................................................B
BC160N .............................................................................................................................................................D
BD250N, BD250S ...........................................................................................................................................E
BH630N, BH630S ...........................................................................................................................................F
BL1000S ...........................................................................................................................................................G
BL1600S ...........................................................................................................................................................H
DELAY UNIT ......................................................................................................................................................P

AUTOMATIC STANDBY UNIT MODI..............................................................................................................P
TESTER OF OVERCURRENT RELEASES OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS.............................................................P
CONTROL RELAYS FOR BD250 AND BH630 ..............................................................................................P
SPARE PARTS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS MODEION ..........................P
THE USAGE OF SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS AT GIVEN OVERCURRENT PROTECTION .......................R
GLOSSARY OF TERMS .....................................................................................................................................S
Modeion
INDEX
B
BC160NT305-100-D ...................D4
BC160NT305-100-L....................D4
BC160NT305-100-M ..................D4
BC160NT305-100-N ...................D5
BC160NT305-125-D ...................D4
BC160NT305-125-L....................D4
BC160NT305-125-N ...................D5
BC160NT305-160-D ...................D4
BC160NT305-160-L....................D4
BC160NT305-160-N ...................D5
BC160NT305-160-V ...................D5
BC160NT305-16-D .....................D4
BC160NT305-16-M.....................D4
BC160NT305-20-D .....................D4
BC160NT305-20-M.....................D4
BC160NT305-25-D .....................D4
BC160NT305-25-M.....................D4
BC160NT305-32-D .....................D4
BC160NT305-32-M.....................D4
BC160NT305-32-N .....................D5
BC160NT305-40-D .....................D4
BC160NT305-40-L .....................D4
BC160NT305-40-M.....................D4
BC160NT305-40-N .....................D5
BC160NT305-50-D .....................D4
BC160NT305-50-L .....................D4
BC160NT305-50-M.....................D4
BC160NT305-50-N .....................D5
BC160NT305-63-D .....................D4
BC160NT305-63-L......................D4
BC160NT305-63-M.....................D4
BC160NT305-63-N .....................D5
BC160NT305-80-D .....................D4
BC160NT305-80-L .....................D4
BC160NT305-80-M.....................D4
BC160NT305-80-N .....................D5
BC160NT405-..-L........................D6
BC160NT405-..-D .......................D6
BC160NT405-..-N .......................D6
BC160NT405-160-V ...................D8
BC160NT406-..-L........................D7
BC160NT406-..D.........................D7
BC160NT406-..-N .......................D7
BD250NE305 ..............................E4
BD250NE405 ..............................E5
BD250NE406 ..............................E5
BD250SE305 ...............................E4
BD250SE405 ...............................E5
BD250SE406 ...............................E5
BH630NE305 ..............................F4
BH630NE405 ..............................F5
BH630NE406 ..............................F5
BH630SE305 ...............................F4
BH630SE405 ...............................F5
BH630SE406 ...............................F5
BL1000SE305 .............................G4
BL1000SE320 .............................G4
BL1600SE305 .............................H4
BL1600SE320 .............................H4
BZ-BX-X230-A ............................P2
CS-BC-A011................................D9
CS-BC-A021................................D9
CS-BC-A033................................D9
CS-BC-B021................................D9
CS-BC-PS01 ................................D9
CS-BC-B014................................D9
CS-BC-A411..............................D10
CS-BC-A421..............................D10
CS-BC-B421..............................D10
CS-BC-B414..............................D10
CS-BC-PS41 ..............................D10
CS-BC-S006 ................................D9
CS-BC-S416 ................................D9
CS-BC-S406 ................................D9
CS-BC-S016 ................................D9
CS-BD-A011................................E7
CS-BD-A021................................E7
CS-BD-A037................................E8
CS-BD-A039................................E8
CS-BD-A421................................E8
CS-BD-B011................................E7
CS-BD-B012................................E7
CS-BD-B014................................E7
CS-BD-B021................................E7
CS-BD-B022................................E7
CS-BD-B411................................E7
CS-BD-B412................................E7
CS-BD-B414................................E7
CS-BD-B421................................E8
CS-BD-B422................................E8
CS-BD-PS41 ................................E8
CS-BD-JT75 ................................E8
CS-BD-JX75 ................................E8
CS-BD-PS01 ................................E7
CS-BD-T011 ................................E7
CS-BD-T411 ................................E7
CS-BD-Z039 ................................E8
CS-BH-A011................................F7
CS-BH-A021................................F7
CS-BH-A037................................F8
CS-BH-A039................................F8
CS-BH-PS01 ................................F7
CS-BH-A421................................F7
CS-BH-B011................................F7
CS-BH-B012................................F7
CS-BH-B014................................F7
CS-BH-B021................................F7
CS-BH-B022................................F7
CS-BH-B031................................F7
CS-BH-B411................................F7
CS-BH-B412................................F7
CS-BH-B414................................F8
CS-BH-B421................................F8
CS-BH-B422................................F7
CS-BH-B431................................F8
CS-BH-PS41 ................................F8
CS-BH-JT75 ..............................F8
CS-BH-JX75 ................................F8
CS-BH-PS01 ..............................F7
CS-BH-T011 ................................F7
CS-BH-T411 ................................F7
CS-BH-Z039 ...............................F8
CS-BL-A010 ...............................H6
CS-BL-A020 ...............................H6
CS-BL-A021 ................................H6
CS-BL-A022 ................................H6
CS-BL-B002 ................................H6
CS-BL-B003 ................................H6
CS-BL-B004 ................................H6
CS-BL-W010 ...............................H6
CS-BL-W011 ...............................H6
M
MB-BD-PV05 ............................E12
MB-BHD-PV03 ..................E12, F12
MB-BH-PV04 ............................F12
MB-BL-PP07...............................H8
MB-BL-PV08 ..............................H8
MB-BL-VV06 ..............................H8
MP-BC-X024-B .........................D13
MP-BC-X048-B .........................D13
MP-BC-X110-B .........................D13
MP-BC-X230-B .........................D13
MP-BD-X024.............................E12
MP-BD-X024-P .........................E12
MP-BD-X048.............................E12
MP-BD-X048-P .........................E12
MP-BD-X110.............................E12
MP-BD-X110-P .........................E12
MP-BD-X230.............................E12
MP-BD-X230-P .........................E12
MP-BH-X024.............................F12
MP-BH-X024-P .........................F12
MP-BH-X048.............................F12
MP-BH-X048-P .........................F12
MP-BH-X110.............................F12
MP-BH-X110-P .........................F12
MP-BH-X230.............................F12
MP-BH-X230-P .........................F12
MP-BL-X110 ...............................H8
MP-BL-X110-P ...........................H8
MP-BL-X230 ...............................H8
MP-BL-X230-P ...........................H8
N
NS-BC-0010 .............................D11
NS-BC-0010-Au........................D11
O
OD-BC-DIN1 .............................D10
OD-BC-KS02 .............................D13
OD-BC-KS03 .............................D13
OD-BC-MS33 ............................D10
OD-BC-UP01.............................D13
OD-BC-KA02.............................D13
OD-BC-KS42 .............................D13
OD-BC-KS43 .............................D13
OD-BD-KK01 .............................E13
OD-BD-KS01 .............................E13
OD-BD-KS03 .............................E13
OD-BD-KS43 .............................E13
OD-BD-MT75 ..............................E9
OD-BD-MZ39 ..............................E9
OD-BD-UP01.............................E13
OD-BD-VP01 .............................E13
OD-BD-VP02 .............................E13
OD-BHD-KA01 ...................E13, F13
OD-BHD-KA02 ...................E13, F13
OD-BHD-KS02 ...................E13, F13
OD-BHD-KS42 ...................E13, F13
OD-BHD-KT01 ...................E13, F13
OD-BHD-MS39 ......................E9, F9
OD-BHD-MS75 ......................E9, F9
OD-BHD-PP01 ...................E13, F13
OD-BHD-RX01 ............................P3
OD-BHD-RX02 ............................P3
OD-BHD-RA03 ............................P3
OD-BHD-RD04 ............................P3
OD-BH-KK01 .............................F13
OD-BH-KS01 .............................F13
OD-BH-KS03 .............................F13
OD-BH-KS43 .............................F13
OD-BH-MT75 ..............................F9
OD-BH-MZ39 ..............................F9
OD-BH-UP01.............................F13
OD-BH-VP01 .............................F13
OD-BH-VP02 .............................F13
OD-BL-KA01 ...............................H9
OD-BL-KS01 ...............................H9
OD-BL-KS02 ...............................H9
OD-BL-KS03 ...............................H9
OD-BL-KS04 ...............................H9
OD-BL-KS08 ...............................H9
OD-BL-KS09 ...............................H9
OD-BL-KT01 ...............................H9
OD-BL-MS02 ..............................H9
OD-BL-UP01 ...............................H9
OD-BL-VP01 ...............................H9
P
PS-BC-0010 .............................D11
PS-BC-0010-Au ........................D11
PS-BHD-0010 ....................E10, F10
PS-BHD-0010-Au ..............E10, F10
PS-BHD-0020 ....................E10, F10
PS-BHD-0020-Au ..............E10, F10
PS-BHD-0100 ....................E10, F10
PS-BHD-0100-Au ..............E10, F10
PS-BHD-0200 ....................E10, F10
PS-BHD-0200-Au ..............E10, F10
PS-BHD-1000 ....................E10, F10
PS-BHD-1000-Au...............E10, F10
PS-BHD-1100 ....................E10, F10
PS-BHD-1100-Au ..............E10, F10
PS-BHD-2000 ....................E10, F10
PS-BHD-2000-Au ..............E10, F10
PS-BL-2200 ................................H7
PS-BL-2200-Au ..........................H7
R
RCD-BC3-EF06............................D8
RCD-BC3-EF16............................D8
Modeion
INDEX
RCD-BC3-EA06 ...........................D8
RCD-BC3-EA16 ...........................D8
RCD-BC4-EF06............................D8
RCD-BC4-EF16............................D8
RCD-BC4-EA06 ...........................D8
RCD-BC4-EA16 ...........................D8
RCD-BC0-EF16............................D8
RCD-BC0-EA06............................D8
RCD-BC0-EF06............................D8
RCD-BC0-EA16 ...........................D8
RP-BC-CB10 .............................D13
RP-BC-CD10 .............................D13
RP-BC-CK10..............................D12
RP-BC-CK20 .............................D12
RP-BC-CK21 .............................D12
RP-BC-CK30 .............................D12
RP-BC-CK31 .............................D12
RP-BC-CN10 .............................D12
RP-BC-CN11 .............................D12
RP-BC-CN20 .............................D12
RP-BC-CN21 .............................D12
RP-BC-CP10 .............................D12
RP-BC-CP20 .............................D12
RP-BC-CP21 .............................D12
RP-BC-CH10 .............................D12
RP-BC-CH20 .............................D12
RP-BD-CK10..............................E11
RP-BD-CK20..............................E11
RP-BD-CK21..............................E11
RP-BD-CK30..............................E11
RP-BD-CK31..............................E11
RP-BH-CK10..............................F11
RP-BH-CK20..............................F11
RP-BH-CK21..............................F11
RP-BH-CK30..............................F11
RP-BH-CK31..............................F11
RP-BHD-CB10....................E12, F12
RP-BHD-CD10....................E12 ,F12
RP-BHD-CN40....................E11, F11
RP-BHD-CN41....................E11, F11
RP-BHD-CN60....................E11, F11
RP-BHD-CN61 ...................E11, F11

RP-BHD-CP10....................E11, F11
RP-BHD-CP20....................E11, F11
RP-BHD-CP21....................E11, F11
RP-BHD-CH10 ...................E12, F12
RP-BHD-CH20 ...................E12, F12
RP-BL-CB10................................H8
RP-BL-CK10 ................................H8
RP-BL-CK52 ................................H8
RP-BL-CK53 ................................H8
RP-BL-CK54 ................................H8
RP-BL-CK55 ................................H8
RP-BL-CN10 ...............................H8
RP-BL-CN20 ...............................H8
RP-BL-CP10 ................................H8
RP-BL-CP11 ................................H8
RP-BL-CH10 ...............................H8
S
SB-BL-0002 ................................H5
SE-BD-0100-4D01 ......................H6
SE-BD-0100-DTV3 ......................E6
SE-BD-0100-MTV8 .....................E6
SE-BD-0100-MTV9 .....................E6
SE-BD-0160-4D01 ......................E6
SE-BD-0160-DTV3 .....................E6
SE-BD-0160-L001 .....................E6
SE-BD-0160-MTV8 .....................E6
SE-BD-0160-MTV9 .....................E6
SE-BD-0200-L001 .......................E6
SE-BD-0250-4D01 ......................E6
SE-BD-0250-DTV3 ......................E6
SE-BD-0250-L001 .......................E6
SE-BD-0250-MTV8 .....................E6
SE-BD-0250-MTV9......................E6
SE-BD-0250-V001.......................E6
SE-BH-0250-4D01 ......................F6
SE-BH-0250-DTV3 ......................F6
SE-BH-0250-L001 .......................F6
SE-BH-0250-MTV8 .....................F6
SE-BH-0250-MTV9......................F6
SE-BH-0315-L001 .......................F6
SE-BH-0400-4D01 ......................F6
SE-BH-0400-DTV3 ......................F6
SE-BH-0400-L001 .......................F6
SE-BH-0400-MTV8 .....................F6
SE-BH-0400-MTV9......................F6
SE-BH-0500-L001 .......................F6
SE-BH-0630-4D01 ......................F6
SE-BH-0630-DTV3 ......................F6
SE-BH-0630-L001 .......................F6
SE-BH-0630-MTV8......................F6
SE-BH-0630-MTV9......................F6
SE-BH-0630-V001.......................F6
SE-BL-0630-DTV3.......................H5
SE-BL-0630-MTV8 ......................H5
SE-BL-0630-U001.......................H5
SE-BL-1000-DTV3.......................H5
SE-BL-1000-MTV8 ......................H5
SE-BL-1000-U001.......................H5
SE-BL-1250-DTV3.......................H5
SE-BL-1250-MTV8 ......................H5
SE-BL-1250-U001.......................H5
SE-BL-1600-DTV3.......................H5
SE-BL-1600-MTV8 ......................H5
SE-BL-1600-U001.......................H5
SE-BL-1600-V001.......................H5
SE-BL-J1000-DTV3 .....................G5
SE-BL-J1000-MTV8.....................G5
SE-BL-J1000-U001 .....................G5
SE-BL-J1000-V001......................G5
SE-BL-J315-DTV3 .......................G5
SE-BL-J315-MTV8 ......................G5
SE-BL-J315-U001 .......................G5
SE-BL-J630-DTV3 .......................G5
SE-BL-J630-MTV8 ......................G5
SE-BL-J630-U001 .......................G5
SE-BL-J800-DTV3 .......................G5
SE-BL-J800-MTV8 ......................G5
SE-BL-J800-U001 .......................G5
SO-BHD-0010....................E13, F13
SO-BL-0010................................H9
SP-BC-X024 ..............................D11
SP-BC-X110 ..............................D11
SP-BC-X230 ..............................D11
SP-BHD-0002 ....................E10, F10
SP-BHD-X024 ....................E10, F10
SP-BHD-X024-0001...........E10, F10
SP-BHD-X110 ....................E10, F10
SP-BHD-X110-0001 ..........E10, F10
SP-BHD-X230 ....................E10, F10
SP-BHD-X230-0001...........E10, F10
SP-BL-X024 ................................H7
SP-BL-X048 ................................H7
SP-BL-X110 ................................H7
SP-BL-X230 ................................H7
SP-BL-X400 ................................H7
SP-BL-X500 ................................H7
SV-BC-X024 ..............................D11
SV-BC-X110 ..............................D11
SV-BC-X230 ..............................D11
SV-BHD-X024 ....................E10, F10
SV-BHD-X110 ....................E10, F10
SV-BHD-X230 ....................E10, F10
SV-BL-X024 ................................H7
SV-BL-X048 ................................H7
SV-BL-X110 ................................H7
SV-BL-X230 ................................H7
SV-BL-X400 ................................H7
SV-BL-X500 ................................H7
Z
ZO-BD-0250-300 ........................E4
ZO-BD-0250-400 ........................E5
ZO-BH-0630-300 ........................F4
ZO-BH-0630-400 ........................F5
ZV-BD-0250-300 ........................E4
ZV-BD-0250-400 ........................E5
ZV-BH-0630-300 ........................F4
ZV-BH-0630-400 ........................F5
ZV-BL-1600-300...................G4, H4
A2
Modeion
NOTES
A3
Modeion
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS SELECTION

for AC operation
Type
Rated current
Rated operating voltage
Rated frequency
Utilization category (selectivity)
Rated short-circuit ultimate
breaking capacity1)
Rated short-time withstand current
at Ue = 690 V a.c.
Dimensions W x H x D
Number of poles
Residual current device
Additional cover for overcurrent release
Plug-in design
Withdrawable design
Front/rear connections
Connection - busbars/cable lugs/cables
Potential terminals
Switches
- auxiliary/relative/signal/early
Shunt trip
Undervoltage release/ with early contact
Hand drive/ with adjustable lever
Motor drive/ with counter of cycles
Lever with locking
Mechanical interlocking
- for hand drive / with Bowden cable
Terminal cover IP20
Iu
Ue
fn
Icu / Ue
Icw / t
NORMAL
SUPERIOR
BC160N
160 A
max. 690 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
A
25 kA / 415 V a.c.
BD250N, BD250S
250 A
max. 690 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
A
36 kA / 415 V a.c.
65 kA / 415 V a.c.
2.5 kA /1 s
75 x 135 x 70 mm
3, 4
105 x 225 x 105 mm

3, 4
BH630N, BH630S
630 A
max. 690 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
A
36 kA / 415 V a.c.
65 kA / 415 V a.c.
8 kA/50 ms, 7 kA/300 ms,
6.5 kA/1 s
140 x 275 x 105 mm
3, 4
BL1000S
1000 A
max. 690 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
A, B
65 kA / 415 V a.c.
15 kA /1 s
BL1600S
1600 A
max. 690 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
A, B
65 kA / 415 V a.c.
20 kA /1 s
210 x 350 x 135 mm

3
210 x 350 x 135 mm

3
z/z
z/z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z/z
z/z/z
z/z/z
z/z/z
z//z/
z/z/z/z
z/z/z/z
z/z//
z/z//
z/
z/z
z/z
z/
z/
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/+
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
BD250N
250 A
max. 690 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
AC - 23B / 690 V a.c.
DC - 23B / 440 V d.c.
3 kA / 5 s
BH630N
630 A
max. 690 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
AC - 23B / 690 V a.c.
DC - 23B / 440 V d.c.
8 kA / 5 s
BL1000S
1000 A
max. 690 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
AC - 23B / 690 V a.c.
DC - 23B / 440 V d.c.
15 kA / 1 s
BL1600S
1600 A
max. 690 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
AC - 23B / 690 V a.c.
DC - 23B / 440 V d.c.
20 kA / 1 s
4 kA / 415 V a.c.
105 x 225 x 105 mm
3, 4
13 kA / 415 V a.c.
140 x 275 x 105 mm
3, 4
30 kA / 415 V a.c.
210 x 350 x 135 mm
3
40 kA / 415 V a.c.
210 x 350 x 135 mm
3
available, unavailable, + being prepared

1)
- in case circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6, output terminals 1, 3, 5) Icu does not change
SPECIFICATIONS FOR SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS SELECTION

for AC and DC operation
Type
Rated operating current
Rated frequency
Utilization category (switching mode)
at Ue = 690 V a.c.
Rated short-circuit making capacity
Dimensions W x H x D
Number of poles
Plug-in design
Withdrawable design
Connection - busbars/cable lugs/cables
Potential terminals
Switches
- auxiliary/relative/signal /early
Shunt trip
Undervoltage release/ with early contact
Hand drive/ with adjustable lever
Motor drive / with counter of cycles
Lever with locking
- for hand drive / with Bowden cable
Terminal cover IP20
z
Ie
Ue
fn
BC160N
160 A
max. 690 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
AC - 23B / 690 V a.c.
Icw / t
2 kA / 1 s
Icm / Ue
2.8 kA / 415 V a.c.

75 x 130 x 70 mm
3, 4
z
z/z
z/z/z
z
z//z/
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z/z
z/z/z
z/z/z
z/z/z
z/z/z/z
z/z/z/z
z/z//
z/z//
z/
z/
z/z
z/
z/
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/+
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/+
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
Modeion
SPECIFICATIONS FOR OVERCURRENT RELEASES SELECTION

Plate
BC
LINES
BD
BH
L
BL1600
DISTRIBUTION
BL1000
BH
BD
Ir
IN
tr
BH
Irm
I
L
Ir
Irm
BD
tr
50ms
0ms
BL1000
MOTOR
BH
BL1600
M
S
BD
Ir
tr
Irmv
tv
BH
TIME SELECTIVE
I
L
BL1000
Ir
UNIVERSAL
tr
Irmv
I t ON
tv
I t OFF
Irm
B2
BL1600
N Protection
BC160NT--L
40 160 A
SE-BD-0100-L001
SE-BD-0160-L001
SE-BD-0250-L001
SE-BH-0250-L001
SE-BH-0315-L001
SE-BH-0400-L001
SE-BH-0500-L001
SE-BH-0630-L001
100 A
160 A
250 A
250 A
315 A
400 A
500 A
630 A
BC160NT--D
16 160 A
0,8 1 In
SE-BD-0100-DTV3
SE-BD-0160-DTV3
SE-BD-0250-DTV3
SE-BH-0250-DTV3
SE-BH-0400-DTV3
SE-BH-0630-DTV3
SE-BL-J315-DTV3
SE-BL-J630-DTV3
SE-BL-J800-DTV3
SE-BL-J1000-DTV3
SE-BL-0630-DTV3
SE-BL-1000-DTV3
SE-BL-1250-DTV3
SE-BL-1600-DTV3
SE-BD-0100-4D01
SE-BD-0160-4D01
SE-BD-0250-4D01
SE-BH-0250-4D01
SE-BH-0400-4D01
SE-BH-0630-4D01
100 A
160 A
250 A
250 A
400 A
630 A
315 A
630 A
800 A
1000 A
630 A
1000 A
1250 A
1600 A
100 A
160 A
250 A
250 A
400 A
630 A
40 100 A
63 160 A
100 250 A
100 250 A
160 400 A
250 630 A
125 315 A
250 630 A
315 800 A
400 1000 A
250 630 A
400 1000 A
500 1250 A
630 1600 A
40 100 A
63 160 A
100 250 A
100 250 A
160 400 A
250 630 A
16 100 A
0,8 1 In
100 A
160 A
250 A
250 A
400 A
630 A
315 A
630 A
800 A
1000 A
630 A
1000 A
1250 A
1600 A
100 A
160 A
250 A
250 A
400 A
630 A
315 A
630 A
800 A
1000 A
630 A
1000 A
1250 A
1600 A
40 100 A
63 160 A
100 250 A
100 250 A
160 400 A
250 630 A
125 315 A
250 630 A
315 800 A
400 1000 A
250 630 A
400 1000 A
500 1250 A
630 1600 A
40 100 A
63 160 A
100 250 A
100 250 A
160 400 A
250 630 A
125 315 A
250 630 A
315 800 A
400 1000 A
250 630 A
400 1000 A
500 1250 A
630 1600 A
BC
BC160NT--M
SE-BD-0100-MTV8
SE-BD-0160-MTV8
SE-BD-0250-MTV8
SE-BH-0250-MTV8
SE-BH-0400-MTV8
SE-BH-0630-MTV8
SE-BL-J315-MTV8
SE-BL-J630-MTV8
SE-BL-J800-MTV8
SE-BL-J1000-MTV8
SE-BL-0630-MTV8
SE-BL-1000-MTV8
SE-BL-1250-MTV8
SE-BL-1600-MTV8
SE-BD-0100-MTV9
SE-BD-0160-MTV9
SE-BD-0250-MTV9
SE-BH-0250-MTV9
SE-BH-0400-MTV9
SE-BH-0630-MTV9
SE-BL-J315-U001
SE-BL-J630-U001
SE-BL-J800-U001
SE-BL-J1000-U001
SE-BL-0630-U001
SE-BL-1000-U001
SE-BL-1250-U001
SE-BL-1600-U001
MOTORS, GENERATORS, TRANSFORMERS, LINES
TRANSFORMERS, LINES
BD
Ir
Irm
Ir setting
BC
In
MOTORS, GENERATORS,
LINES
Type designation
LINES
Characteristic
UNIVERSAL PROTECTION,
SELECTIVE PROTECTION
Release type
Modeion
SUMMARY OF OVERCURRENT RELEASES

The electronic overcurrent release is a separate and interchangeable unit, which is supplied with the switching unit.
By exchanging the overcurrent release, the range of the circuit
breakers rated current can be easily changed. See table Summary of overcurrent releases. Depending upon the needs for
adjusting the releases tripping characteristic to the protected
device and to the variability of the characteristic with regard to
selectivity, the following releases are available:
L001 - LI
They have one type of characteristic and fixed In andIrm settings.

DTV3 - LI
They have one type of characteristic with adjustable Ir andIrm.

MTV8 - LI
They have more types of characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr andIrm.

MTV9 - LSI
They have more types of characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr,

Irmv andtv.
U001 - LSI
They have more types of characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr,

Irmv, tv, Irm .
1. Dependent release (thermal) L

DTV3 - The dependent release is adjusted by one Ir switch. The
Ir switch is used to set the rated current of circuit breaker, the
characteristic moves on the current axis. By means of its internal
circuitry, the release is set to one type of characteristic. It is not
possible to turn the device on right after the dependent release
has been actuated and circuit breaker tripped. The release must
be allowed to cool off, because it has a thermal memory. The
memory can be disabled by turning the switch from the normal
Tt position to the T0 position. The dependent release remains
active, only its thermal memory is inactivated. Switching of the
thermal memory should be used carefully as there is a danger
of temperature rise due to repeated tripping.
MTV8, MTV9, U001 a 4D01 - The dependent release is
adjusted by two switches, Ir and tr. The first (Ir) switch is used to
set the circuit breakers rated current. The characteristic moves
on the current axis. By turning the other switch (tr), the time is
adjusted after which the circuit breaker will trip while passing
through 7.2 Ir. The tripping characteristic thus moves on the
time axis. Using the tr switch, it is possible to set a total of 8
characteristics. For MTV8 and MTV9 releases there are available
4 characteristics for motor protection and 4 characteristics for
protection of lines. Tripping times correspond with the release
class 10 A, 10, 20, 30. By changing tr it is possible to select the
characteristic according to the required motor starting (light,
medium, heavy or very heavy starting). For 4D01 releases,
there are available 8 characteristics for protection of lines or
transformers. It is not possible to turn the device on right after
the dependent release has been actuated and circuit breaker
tripped. The release must be allowed to cool off , because it has
a thermal memory. The memory can be disabled by turning
the switch from the normal Tt position to the T0 position.
The dependent release remains active, and only its thermal
memory is inactivated. Switching off of the thermal memory
should be used carefully as there is a danger of temperature
rise due to repeated tripping.
2. Delayed independent release S
L001, DTV3, MTV8 and MTV9 overcurrent releases are intended for 3-pole switching units and 4-pole switching units
with disconnecting of the N pole.
4D01 - LIN
Are intended for 4-pole switching units with protected N
pole. They have more types of characteristics with adjustable
Ir, tr, Irm andIN .
Function description
Proper function of releases does not depend on the form of
current in the power circuit. The operation of the release is controlled by a microprocessor, which processes a samled signal of
the power circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms of value.
Therefore, the releases are suitable for protection circuits
where the sinusoidal current is distorted by high harmonics
(e.g. circuits with controlled rectifiers, power factor compensators, pulse loading, and the like).
All the releases protect the circuit against short-circuit and
overload. The tripping characteristic of the releases is independent of the ambient temperature. The release is affixed to
the switching unit by two bolts. The transparent cover of the
adjustment part can be sealed.
MTV9 and U001 - The delayed independent release has the

function of a delayed short-circuit release. It is used to set
up a selective cascade of circuit breakers. It is set up using
parameters Irmv and tv. Irmv is an n-multiple of current Ir (Irmv
= n Ir). It is a short-circuit current that, within the span of
Irmv to Irm, will trip the circuit breaker with delay tv, tv is a set
up delay for tripping the release. The delayed independent
release actuates the circuit breaker if the current in the circuit breaker reaches at least the preset n-multiple and lasts
at least the preset delay time tv.
Tripping characteristic setting

The tripping characteristic of overcurrent releases is defined
by standard EN 60 947-2. For releases DTV3, MTV8, MTV9
and 4D01, the characteristic is set by latched switches on the
overcurrent release unit. A visual demonstration of the tripping
characteristic setting can be found in the Sichr program, see
www.oez.com.
L - is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of
thermal protection.
S- is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes protection against long distance short-circuits of lines. Intentional
delay in tripping of these low short-circuit currents can be
used to achieve selectivity of protective devices. For MTV9
releases, the delay can be set to 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms.
I - is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection
against ultimate short-circuit currents. For MTV8 releases,
the delay can be set to 0 or 50 ms.
N - is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of
thermal protection for N conductor.
I2t - the characteristic of setting in the ON position represents
a constant value of energy passed through. If fuses are used
as protective elements for outgoing branch feeders, it is
possible to adjust the selective part of the characteristics to
suit better the shape of the fuse characteristics.
3. Independent instantaneous release (short-circuit trip)

I DTV3, MTV8 and 4D01 (MTV9 at the delay setting 0 ms)
The independent instantaneous release has the function of a
short-circuit release and it is adjusted by one Irm switch. The
Irm switch is used to set the short-circuit current that, upon
its being reached or exceeded, causes instantaneous tripping
of the circuit breaker.
U001 - The independent release can be disabled by setting

the parameter n (Irmv = n Ir) into the position. Parameter tv can be set to values with respect to the energy that
passed through l2t (switch position l2t on). The preset time
values are then applicable for currents more than 10x current
Ir. Tripping times of k-multiples of Ir for k < 10 are defined
as follows:
B3
Modeion
SUMMARY OF OVERCURRENT RELEASES

Tripping characteristics of L001, DTV3, MTV8, MTV9
and 4D01 releases under load
The tripping characteristic from the cold state indicates the
tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing
through the circuit breaker. The tripping characteristic tripped
from warm state indicates the tripping times during which it
is assumed that, before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic releases are independent of the ambient
temperature and are plotted in a cold state. Digital releases
enable simulation of a release in warm state. Tripping times
become shorter in a steady state, as shown in the following
graph. The steady state is a period during which the characteristic does not change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a
reduced current for at least 30 minutes, the tripping times will
be cut by a half. If the load is less than 70 % of Ir , the tripping
time does not become shorter.
Graph of tripping time shortening under load

T when tripping from the releases warm state, the tripping time of the characteristic is cut short during the standstill time tu by coefficient k.
Thermal memory
Despite the fact that overcurrent releases are electronic they
do have thermal memory similarly to the thermomagnetic
type of overcurrent release. Thermomagnetic releases have
mechanical thermal memory that is based on bimetal. The
electronic type of releases have the element of thermal memory solved electronically. In the end both types function
the same way. In case the circuit breaker with electronic
release is switched off by the thermal overload, the electronic release keeps a record of this. The circuit breaker with
electronic release then operates the same way as the one
with thermomagnetic release. When there is another switch
off by overload the tripping time gets shorter or it is necessary to have the circuit breaker cool off - reset the thermal
memory of overcurrent release. Reset time is about 30 min.
The thermal memory can be switched off. In this case when
the circuit breaker is switched off the reset of thermal memory is immediate and when the circuit breaker is switched
on again the tripping times at overload equal to the ones at
cool state. We do recommend to switch off the thermal memory only when necessary. As there is a danger of repeated
thermal overload of the protected device. The thermal memory switch off does not shorten the tripping times.
Overcurrent releases are set by the manufacturer

Ir = min
Restart = T(t)
Irm = min, 0 ms
tr = TV, t(t), min
tv = min, I2t = ON
Irmv = 0 ms, min
IN = 0.5 Ir
B4
Thermal standstill time of the characteristics

For all overcurrent releases, the thermal standstill time is
tu 30 min. During this time, the tripping time tv is cut
short from the cold-state characteristic by the coefficient k.
Real switching off time is ts = k. tv
Example
The shortening constant can be read from the graph. With steady
current 85 % of Ir the real tripping time will be shortened to:
I r [%]
ts = 0.74 . tv
k[] time shortening coefficient
Ir [A] adjusted rated current release
tv [s] tripping time of the release derived from the characteristic
ts [s] real switching off time of the release tripped from warm state
tu [s] thermal standstill time of the particular characteristics
Modeion
PURCHASE ORDER EXAMPLE

Example: You need circuit breaker for a transformer
of power output 400 kVA, nominal current 577 A and
maximum short-circuit current up to 36 kA. The incoming
OD-BHD-KS02
OD-BH-DV01
Your purchase order:

(do not enter text from grey area into your purchase order)
NUMBER TYPE
PRODUCT CODE
1 pc BH630NE305
14412
CS-BH-A011
OD-BH-MS01
BH630NE305
SE-BH-0630-DTV3
and outgoing lines of the circuit breaker will be formed by

Cu busbars. Further requirements: signalization of main
contacts and remote control of the circuit breaker.
- switching unit with rated current 630 A and rated short-circuit ultimate capacity 36 kA
- components of the switching unit are
connecting sets for connecting Cu/Al
busbars or cable lugs (CS-BH-A011)
insulating barriers (OD-BHD-KS02)
mounting bolts set for installing
switching unit (OD-BH-MS01)
conductor holder (OD-BH-DV01)
PS-BHD-2000
SP-BHD-X230
CS-BH-A011
1 pc SE-BH-0630-DTV3 25100
- overcurrent release for protection of transformers and lines with the rated
current up to 630 A and its regulation by 60 %
1 pc PS-BHD-2000
13689
- auxiliary switch (2x make contact)
1 ks SP-BHD-X230
24420
- undervoltage release (230 V a.c., 400, 500 V/220 V d.c.)
CUSTOM ASSEMBLY OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS MODEION
at customers request
warranty not only for components, but for the entire configuration
after consulting with OEZ company, based on particular specification of your configuration
the delivery in 1 - 4 weeks
extra charge for completion and special packing
Your order should include the following specification:

type of circuit breaker switching unit
type, rated current and adjustment of the electronic release
types of connecting terminal
- for input terminals of circuit breaker
- for output terminals of circuit breaker
installation requirements, type and function of auxiliary switches
installation requirement and type of auxiliary releases, including rated voltage
requirements for fitting circuit breaker with drive
- type of hand drive, including accessories (control lever, bearing, shaft)
- motor drive type including control voltage and your demand for counter of cycles, extension
cable and sealable cover of switch on button
required withdrawable or plug-in design of circuit breakers
requirement for fitting withdrawable device with signalling of individual positions
requirement for sealing the overcurrent release
Auxiliary circuits of the withdrawable design will be installed according to the wiring diagram supplied by
the customer.
B5
Modeion
REPLACEMENT OF BA511 CIRCUIT BREAKER

SIMPLE REPLACEMENTS OF BA511 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Retrofit sets will make it easy for you to replace older circuit breakers without
modifying the switchboard

- the mounting set - mounting slots of the new circuit breaker will fit into the
precise position of mounting slots of the original circuit breaker
- connecting set - terminals of the new circuit breaker will fit into the position of
the original circuit breakers terminals
For the simplest replacement, there are provided overcurrent releases and circuit
breakers with characteristic L
BA511*33
B6
BA511*37
BA511*39
BC160N
BD250
BH630
Modeion

Replacement of BA511*33 circuit breaker
Original circuit breaker
New circuit breaker
Replacement of original BA511*33 circuit breaker

up to 160 A
Line characteristic
BA511-33-..., In=12,5 A
BC160NT305-16-D
BA511-33-..., In=16 A
BC160NT305-16-D
BA511-33-..., In=20 A
BC160NT305-20-D
BA511-33-..., In=25 A
BC160NT305-25-D
BA511-33-..., In=32 A
BC160NT305-32-D
BA511-33-..., In=40 A
BC160NT305-40-L
BA511-33-..., In= 50 A
BC160NT305-50-L
BA511-33-..., In=63 A
BC160NT305-63-L
BA511-33-..., In=80 A
BC160NT305-80-L
BA511-33-..., In=100 A
BC160NT305-100-L
BA511-33-..., In=125 A
BC160NT305-125-L
BA511-33-..., In=160 A
BC160NT305-160-L
Circuit breaker
Connecting set
Mounting set
BC160NT305-
CS-BC-A033
OD-BC-MS33
1x
2x
1x
Motor characteristic
BA511G33..., In=12,5 A
BC160NT305-16-M
BA511G33..., In=16 A
BC160NT305-16-M
BA511G33..., In=20 A
BC160NT305-20-M
BA511G33..., In=25 A
BC160NT305-25-M
BA511G33..., In=32 A
BC160NT305-32-M
BA511G33..., In=40 A
BC160NT305-40-M
BA511G33..., In= 50 A
BC160NT305-50-M
BA511G33..., In=63 A
BC160NT305-63-M
BA511G33..., In=80 A
BC160NT305-80-M
BA511G33..., In=100 A
BC160NT305-100-M
BA511G33..., In=125 A
BC160NT305-125-D
BA511G33..., In=160 A
BC160NT305-160-D

New circuit breaker

up to 250 A*
Line characteristic
BA511-37..., In=100 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0100-DTV3
BA511-37..., In=125 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0160-DTV3
BA511-37..., In=160 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0160-L001
BA511-37..., In=200 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0200-L001
BA511-37..., In=250 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0250-L001
BA511-37..., In=315 A
BH630NE305 + SE-BH-0315-L001
BA511-37..., In=400 A
BH630NE305 + SE-BH-0400-L001
BA511G37..., In=50 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0100-MTV8
BA511G37..., In=63 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0100-MTV8
BA511G37..., In=80 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0100-MTV8
BA511G37..., In=100 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0100-MTV8
BA511G37..., In=125 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0160-MTV8
BA511G37..., In=160 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0160-MTV8
BA511G37..., In=200 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0250-MTV8
BA511G37..., In=250 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0250-MTV8
BA511G37..., In=315 A
BH630NE305 + SE-BH-0400-MTV8
BA511G37..., In=400 A
BH630NE305 + SE-BH-0400-MTV8
Switching unit
Overcurrent release
Connecting set
BD250NE305
SE-BD--
CS-BD-A037
1x
1x
2x
* it is necessary to shorten the original busbars by 39 mm on the inlet and outlet side, the
spacing stays the same, for detail information see Instruction for use of CS-BD-A037
up to 400 A*
Switching unit
Overcurrent release
Connecting set
BH630NE305
SE-BH--
CS-BH-A037
1x
1x
2x
* it is necessary to shorten the original busbars by 59,5 mm on the inlet and outlet side, the
spacing stays the same, for detail information see Instruction for use of CS-BH-A037
B7
Modeion

New circuit breaker

up to 250 A
Line characteristic
BA511-39..., In=160 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0160-L001
BA511-39..., In=200 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0200-L001
BA511-39..., In=250 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0250-L001
BA511-39..., In=315 A
BH630NE305 + SE-BH-0315-L001
BA511-39..., In=400 A
BH630NE305 + SE-BH-0400-L001
BA511-39..., In=500 A
BH630NE305 + SE-BH-0500-L001
BA511-39..., In=630 A
BH630NE305 + SE-BH-0630-L001
BA511G39..., In=160 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0160-MTV8
BA511G39..., In=200 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0250-MTV8
BA511G39..., In=250 A
BD250NE305 + SE-BD-0250-MTV8
BA511G39..., In=315 A
BH630NE305 + SE-BH-0400-MTV8
BA511G39..., In=400 A
BH630NE305 + SE-BH-0400-MTV8
BA511G39..., In=500 A
BH630NE305 + SE-BH-0630-MTV8
Switching unit
Overcurrent release
Connecting set
Mounting set
BD250NE305
SE-BD--
CS-BD-A039
OD-BHD-MS39
1x
1x
2x
1x
BH630NE305
SE-BH--
CS-BH-A039
OD-BHD-MS39
1x
1x
2x
1x
up to 630 A
Switching unit
Overcurrent release
Connecting set
Mounting set
Modeion configurator
Software configurator Modeion enables to determine the retrofits of circuit breakers
BA511, BA51 or J2UX easily. The software is very customer friendly, you only enter there
the type designation of original circuit breaker including its nominal current and eventually
operating voltage of auxiliary releases and of the motor drive.
By means of transfer to Modeion you will get the list of parts necessary for replacement
of original circuit breaker. The current version of this software can be downloaded from our
web pages, where you can find after registration also file with price list that can be imported
to the configurator and you will thus get configurator with current prices.
B8
Modeion
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
BC160N
Modeion
BC160N
COMMERCIAL INFORMATION
Circuit breakers...........................................................................................................................................................................D4
Switch-disconnectors .......................................................................................................................................................D5, D8
Residual current devices .......................................................................................................................................................D8
Connecting sets ..........................................................................................................................................................................D9
Mounting sets ...........................................................................................................................................................................D10
Switches .......................................................................................................................................................................................D11
Shunt trips ..................................................................................................................................................................................D11
Undervoltage releases .........................................................................................................................................................D11
Hand drives .................................................................................................................................................................................D12
Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching ...................................................................................................D13
Motor drives ...............................................................................................................................................................................D13
Accessories ..................................................................................................................................................................................D13
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Circuit breakers, switch-disconnectors
- specifications ......................................................................................................................................D14
- diagram...............................................................................................................................................D15
- connecting, mounting.........................................................................................................................D17
- deionization space .............................................................................................................................D21
- dimensions .........................................................................................................................................D25
Residual current devices
- diagram...............................................................................................................................................D23
- connecting, mounting.........................................................................................................................D24
Overcurrent releases
- description, specifications, tripping characteristics .............................................................................D37
Connecting sets
Switches
Shunt trips
Undervoltage releases
- specifications, diagram .......................................................................................................................D42
Hand drives
- description, specifications ...................................................................................................................D43
Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching

- description, specifications, dimensions ...............................................................................................D44
Motor drives
- description, specifications, diagram ....................................................................................................D41
D2
3P 4P
Modeion
BC160N
CONNECTING SETS
Double block terminals
Output terminals
Front connection
CS-BC-B014
CS-BC-A011
CS-BC-B021
HAND DRIVES
Rear connection
Potential terminals
Reduction for BA...*33
CS-BC-PS01
CS-BC-A033
CS-BC-A021
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Hand drive unit - front

RP-BC-CK20
RP-BC-CP...
Hand drive unit - front

RP-BC-CK21
RP-BC-CH...
RP-BC-CN...
BC160NT305-100-M
BC160NT305-160-L
Hand drive unit - right side

RP-BC-CK30
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE
BC160NT305-160-N
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR
BC160NT305-160-D
Hand drive unit - left side

RP-BC-CK31
RCD-BC4-EA16
BC160NT305-160-V
Mechanical parallel switching

RP-BC-CD10
AUXILIARY RELEASES
MOUNTING SETS
SWITCHES
Shunt trip
Undervoltage release
Signal switch
Auxiliary switch
SV-BC-X...
SP-BC-X...
NS-BC-0010
PS-BC-0010
Adapter for DIN rail 35 mm
RP-BC-CB10
MOTOR DRIVES
Motor drive - side
MP-BL-X...-B
ACCESSORIES
Lever with locking
Insulating barriers
OD-BC-DIN1
Terminal cover - IP20

Reduction for BA...*33
OD-BC-UP01
OD-BC-KS03
CS-BC-KS02
OD-BC-MS33
D3
Modeion
BC160N
Commercial information
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
3P
- Circuit breaker includes: - 2 connecting sets for connecting Cu/Al cables with cross-sections 2.5 95 mm2 1)
(connecting sets are installed in the circuit breaker)
- insulating barriers OD-BC-KS02
- mounting bolts set OD-BC-MS01 (2 x M3x30)
- conductor holder OD-BC-DV01
- the method of power circuit connection must observe recommendations, see page D17 as well as deionization
space, see page D21
1)
- for connecting in another way, one may use CS-BC-... connecting sets see page D9, D10
Characteristic L - lines
protection of lines with low starting currents
without Ir setting
In [A]
Type
Product code
Irm [A]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
40
BC160NT305-40-L
20214
160
1.00
50
BC160NT305-50-L
20216
200
1.00
63
BC160NT305-63-L
20218
252
1.00
80
BC160NT305-80-L
20221
320
1.00
100
BC160NT305-100-L
20203
400
1.00
125
BC160NT305-125-L
20205
500
1.00
160
BC160NT305-160-L
20207
640
1.00
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page D14, D37
Characteristic D - distribution
protection of lines and transformers
In [A]
Product code
Ir setting [A]
Irm [A]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
16
BC160NT305-16-D
Type
20209
12.5 16
160 240
1.00
20
BC160NT305-20-D
20211
16 20
200 300
1.00
25
BC160NT305-25-D
20212
20 25
250 375
1.00
32
BC160NT305-32-D
20213
25 32
160 320
1.00
40
BC160NT305-40-D
20215
32 40
200 400
1.00
50
BC160NT305-50-D
20217
40 50
250 500
1.00
63
BC160NT305-63-D
20219
50 63
315 630
1.00
80
BC160NT305-80-D
20222
63 80
400 800
1.00
100
BC160NT305-100-D
20204
80 100
500 1000
1.00
125
BC160NT305-125-D
20206
100 125
625 1250
1.00
160
BC160NT305-160-D
20208
125 160
800 1600
1.00
Characteristic M - motor
motors protection
Product code
Ir setting [A]
Irm [A]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
16
In [A]
BC160NT305-16-M
Type
20243
12.5 16
160
1.00
20
BC160NT305-20-M
20244
16 20
200
1.00
25
BC160NT305-25-M
20245
20 25
250
1.00
32
BC160NT305-32-M
20246
25 32
320
1.00
40
BC160NT305-40-M
20247
32 40
400
1.00
50
BC160NT305-50-M
20248
40 50
500
1.00
63
BC160NT305-63-M
20249
50 63
630
1.00
80
BC160NT305-80-M
20250
63 80
800
1.00
100
BC160NT305-100-M
20242
80 100
1000
1.00
D4
BC160N
Modeion
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
3P
Characteristic N - only short-circuit release
In [A]
Type
Product code
Ir [A]
Irm [A]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
32
BC160NT305-32-N
20641
160 320
1.00
40
BC160NT305-40-N
20642
200 400
1.00
50
BC160NT305-50-N
20643
250 500
1.00
63
BC160NT305-63-N
20644
315 630
1.00
80
BC160NT305-80-N
20645
400 800
1.00
100
BC160NT305-100-N
20646
500 1000
1.00
125
BC160NT305-125-N
20647
625 1250
1.00
160
BC160NT305-160-N
20621
800 1600
1.00
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR
3P
- Switch-disconnector includes: - 2 connecting sets for connecting Cu/Al cables with cross-sections 2.5 95 mm2 1)
(connecting sets are installed in the switch-disconnector)
- insulating barriers OD-BC-KS02
- mounting bolts set OD-BC-MS01 (2 x M3x30)
- conductor holder OD-BC-DV01
1)
Ie [A]
160
Type
Product code
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
20585
1.00
BC160NT305-160-V
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page D14
D5
Modeion
BC160N
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
3P+N
- Circuit breaker includes: - connecting terminals for connecting Cu/Al cables with cross-sections 2.5 95 mm2 1)
(connecting terminals are installed in the circuit breaker)
- insulating barriers OD-BC-KS02 and OD-BC-KS42
- 2 sets of mounting bolts OD-BC-MS01 (4 x M3x30)
- conductor holder OD-BC-DV01 (it is installed in the circuit breaker)
space, see page D21
1)
- for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BC-... connecting sets see page D9, D10
3P + N - for unprotected N conductor

without Ir setting
In [A]
Type
Product code
Ir setting [A]
Irm [A]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
40
BC160NT405-40-L
33612
160
1.3
50
BC160NT405-50-L
33610
200
1.3
63
BC160NT405-63-L
33608
252
1.3
80
BC160NT405-80-L
33606
320
1.3
100
BC160NT405-100-L
33604
400
1.3
125
BC160NT405-125-L
33602
500
1.3
160
BC160NT405-160-L
33600
640
1.3

- custom production
In [A]
Product code
Ir setting [A]
Irm [A]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
16
BC160NT405-16-D
Type
33617
12.5 16
160 240
1.3
20
BC160NT405-20-D
33616
16 20
200 300
1.3
25
BC160NT405-25-D
33615
20 25
250 375
1.3
32
BC160NT405-32-D
33614
25 32
160 320
1.3
40
BC160NT405-40-D
33613
32 40
200 400
1.3
50
BC160NT405-50-D
33611
40 50
250 500
1.3
63
BC160NT405-63-D
33609
50 63
315 630
1.3
80
BC160NT405-80-D
33607
63 80
400 800
1.3
100
BC160NT405-100-D
33605
80 100
500 1000
1.3
125
BC160NT405-125-D
33603
100 125
625 1250
1.3
160
BC160NT405-160-D
33601
125 160
800 1600
1.3
without Ir setting
Product code
Ir setting [A]
Irm [A]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
32
In [A]
BC160NT405-32-N
Type
33625
160 320
1.3
40
BC160NT405-40-N
33624
200 400
1.3
50
BC160NT405-50-N
33623
250 500
1.3
63
BC160NT405-63-N
33622
315 630
1.3
80
BC160NT405-80-N
33621
400 800
1.3
100
BC160NT405-100-N
33620
500 1000
1.3
125
BC160NT405-125-N
33619
625 1250
1.3
160
BC160NT405-160-N
33618
800 1600
1.3

- custom production
D6
BC160N
Modeion
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
4P
- Circuit breaker includes: - connecting terminals for connecting Cu/Al cables with cross-sections 2.5 95 mm2 1)
(connecting terminals are installed in the circuit breaker)
- conductor holder OD-BC-DV01 (it is installed in the circuit breaker)
space, see page D21
1)
- for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BC-... connecting sets see page D9, D10
4P - for protected N conductor

without Ir setting
In [A]
Type
Product code
Ir setting [A]
Irm [A]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
40
BC160NT406-40-L
33639
160
1.3
50
BC160NT406-50-L
33637
200
1.3
63
BC160NT406-63-L
33635
252
1.3
80
BC160NT406-80-L
33633
320
1.3
100
BC160NT406-100-L
33631
400
1.3
125
BC160NT406-125-L
33629
500
1.3
160
BC160NT406-160-L
33627
640
1.3

- custom production
In [A]
Product code
Ir setting [A]
Irm [A]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
16
BC160NT406-16-D
Type
33644
12.5 16
160 240
1.3
20
BC160NT406-20-D
33643
16 20
200 300
1.3
25
BC160NT406-25-D
33642
20 25
250 375
1.3
32
BC160NT406-32-D
33641
25 32
160 320
1.3
40
BC160NT406-40-D
33640
32 40
200 400
1.3
50
BC160NT406-50-D
33638
40 50
250 500
1.3
63
BC160NT406-63-D
33636
50 63
315 630
1.3
80
BC160NT406-80-D
33634
63 80
400 800
1.3
100
BC160NT406-100-D
33632
80 100
500 1000
1.3
125
BC160NT406-125-D
33630
100 125
625 1250
1.3
160
BC160NT406-160-D
33628
125 160
800 1600
1.3
without Ir setting
Product code
Ir setting [A]
Irm [A]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
32
In [A]
BC160NT406-32-N
Type
33652
160 320
1.3
40
BC160NT406-40-N
33651
200 400
1.3
50
BC160NT406-50-N
33650
250 500
1.3
63
BC160NT406-63-N
33649
315 630
1.3
80
BC160NT406-80-N
33648
400 800
1.3
100
BC160NT406-100-N
33647
500 1000
1.3
125
BC160NT406-125-N
33646
625 1250
1.3
160
BC160NT406-160-N
33645
800 1600
1.3

- custom production
D7
Modeion
BC160N
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR
4P
- Switch-disconnector includes: - 2 connecting sets for connecting Cu/Al cables with cross-sections 2.5 95 mm2 1)
(connecting sets are installed in the switch-disconnector)
- conductor holder OD-BC-DV01 (it is installed in the switch-disconnector)
1)
Ie [A]
160
Type
Product code
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
33626
1.3
BC160NT405-160-V
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES
3P 4P
3-pole design, with interconnecting busbars
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
RCD-BC3-EF06
Product code
37745
In 63 A, In 0,3 A, without tn setting tn
Description
1.44
RCD-BC3-EF16
37746
1.65
RCD-BC3-EA06
37747
In 63 A, In 0,03 3 A, setting tn
1.44
RCD-BC3-EA16
37748
1.65
- CS-BC-L006 or CS-BC-L016 is part of residual current module

4-pole design, with interconnecting busbars

Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
RCD-BC4-EF06
Product code
37753
Description
1.75
RCD-BC4-EF16
37754
2.03
RCD-BC4-EA06
37755
1.75
RCD-BC4-EA16
37756
2.03
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
- CS-BC-L406 or CS-BC-L416 is part of residual current module

4-pole design, without interconnecting busbars

Type
Product code
RCD-BC0-EF16
37761
1.27
RCD-BC0-EA16
37762
1.27
RCD-BC0-EF06
37763
1.27
RCD-BC0-EA06
37764
1.27
D8
Description
BC160N
Modeion
CONNECTING SETS FOR RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE

Type
3P 4P
Weight [kg]
Package [set]
CS-BC-S006
Product code Description

38379
Interconnecting busbars, In = 63 A, for 3-pole design
0.17
CS-BC-S016
38380
0.44
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [set]
CS-BC-S406

38383
0.21
CS-BC-S416
38384
0.64
CONNECTING SETS
3P
3 terminals
Type
CS-BC-A011

20223
S [mm2]
Front connection
Weight [kg]
Package [set]1)
Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs
0.045
Cu/Al cables
0.18
0.175
Cu flexible conductor
0.01
Cu/Al cables
0.18
0.103
Method of connection
CS-BC-B021
20237
Double block
terminal
- terminals cover included - degree of protection IP20
CS-BC-A021
20236
2 x 25 120
Rear connection
CS-BC-PS01
20239
Potential terminals 1.5 2.5; 4 6
Block terminals for 5 cables

RETROFIT
CS-BC-B014
34957
CS-BC-A033
20608
5x(2.5 25)
Reduction for BA*33

- for total replacement of BA*33 circuit breaker one also needs OD-BC-MS33 mounting set
1)
- one set enables connection of one side of the circuit breaker (set includes three terminals with necessary coupling elements)
D9
Modeion
BC160N
CONNECTING SETS
3P 4P
1 terminal
Type
CS-BC-A411

33653
S [mm2]
Front connection
Weight [kg]
Package [set]
0.015
0.08
CS-BC-A421
33654
Rear connection
CS-BC-B421
33658
Double block
terminal
2x(25 120)
Cu/Al cables
0.25
CS-BC-B414
34958
5x(2.5 25)
Cu/Al cables
0.24
CS-BC-PS41
36030
0.005
Block terminal for 5 cables

Potential terminals 1.5 2.5/4 6 Cu flexible conductor
MOUNTING SETS
3P 4P
Type
RETROFIT
OD-BC-MS33

20625
Reduction for BA*33
Weight [kg]
Package [set]1)
0.125
0.05
- for total replacement of BA*33 circuit breaker one also needs two CS-BC-A033 connecting sets
OD-BC-DIN1
20238
For mounting on 35 mm DIN rail
- DIMENSIONS see page D29
1)
D10
- one set enables to replace one circuit breaker (set includes coupling elements necessary to assemble circuit breaker and mounting set)
- sets which enable replacement of older circuit breakers by new ones without switchboard reconstruction
RETROFIT
BC160N
Modeion
SWITCHES
3P 4P
Auxiliary - signal state of the main contacts
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
PS-BC-0010
Product code Operating voltage

20227
60 250 V a.c./d.c.
Contacts
0,01
PS-BC-0010-Au
20228
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0,01
Signal - signal tripping of circuit breaker by overcurrent release

Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
NS-BC-0010

20225
60 250 V a.c./d.c.
Contacts
0,01
NS-BC-0010-Au
20226
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0,01
SHUNT TRIPS
3P 4P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
SV-BC-X024
20233
24, 48 V a.c./d.c.
0,05
SV-BC-X110
20234
110, 230 V a.c./110, 220 V d.c.
0,05
SV-BC-X230
20235
230, 400 V a.c./ 220 V d.c.
0,05
UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES
3P 4P
Type
SP-BC-X024

20229
Description
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0,05
24, 48 V a.c./d.c.
SP-BC-X110
20231
110, 230 V a.c./110, 220 V d.c.
0,05
SP-BC-X230
20232
230, 400 V a.c./ 220 V d.c.
0,05
DELAY UNIT
Type
Product code
Description
Enables to delay the undervoltage release tripping of circuit breakers

BZ-BX-X230-A
36696
Modeion
- the delay can be set up at three levels (according to wiring)
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page P2
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0,12
D11
Modeion
BC160N
HAND DRIVES
3P 4P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
RP-BC-CK10
Product code
20560
Hand drive unit
Name - description
- without locking
0.079
RP-BC-CK20
20593
Hand drive unit
- with locking
0.079
0.079
0.137
0.137

Hand drive unit must be fitted with: for control on the circuit breaker
- hand drive lever RP-BC-CP..
for control on the switchboard door - extension shaft RP-BC-CH..
- hand drive bearing RP-BC-CN..
RP-BC-CK21
20594
Hand drive unit

- yellow
- with locking

Hand drive unit must be fitted with: for control on the switching unit - hand drive lever RP-BC-CP..
for control on the switchboard door - extension shaft RP-BC-CH..
- hand drive bearing RP-BC-CN..
RP-BC-CK30
20595
RP-BC-CK31
20596
Hand drive unit for right - without locking

side control
Hand drive unit for left - without locking
side control

Hand drive unit must be fitted with: extension shaft RP-BC-CH.., hand drive bearing RP-BC-CN.., hand drive lever RP-BC-CP..
RP-BC-CP10
20561
RP-BC-CP20
20562
Hand drive lever

- black
Hand drive lever
- black
- without locking
0.019
- with locking
0.019
Hand drive lever

- red
- with locking
0.019
RP-BC-CP21
20597
RP-BC-CN10
20564
Hand drive bearing
- degree of protection IP40
0.042
RP-BC-CN20
20565
Hand drive bearing
0.042
0.042
0.042
Extension shaft
- length 350 mm
0.113
Extension shaft
- telescopic, length 199 352 mm 0.92

- is used in combination with the black lever of RP-BC-CP10 or RP-BC-CP20 hand drive
RP-BC-CN11
20598
RP-BC-CN21
20599
Hand drive bearing

- yellow
Hand drive bearing
- yellow

- is used in combination with the red lever of RP-BC-CP21 hand drive
RP-BC-CH10
20563
RP-BC-CH20
20600
D12
BC160N
Modeion
MECHANICAL INTERLOCKING AND PARALLEL SWITCHING

Type
RP-BC-CB10
Product code
20601
3P 4P
Name
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.089

- Mechanical interlocking must be fitted with: 2 hand drive units RP-BC-CK.. (cannot be combined with hand drive unit for side control)
2 hand drive levers RP-BC-CP..
RP-BC-CD10
20602
0.109

- Mechanical parallel switching must be fitted with: 2 hand drive units RP-BC-CK.. (cannot be combined with hand drive unit for side control)
1 hand drive lever RP-BC-CP..
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
MP-BC-X024-B
Product code
34450
Motor drive side, 24 V a.c./d.c.
Name
0.9
MP-BC-X048-B
34451
0.9
MP-BC-X110-B
34452
0.9
MP-BC-X230-B
34453
0.9
Connecting cable, 0.6 m for motor drive
0.1
OD-BC-KA02
34454
ACCESSORIES
3P 4P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
OD-BC-KS02
Product code
20224
Name - description
Insulating barriers - set (two pieces), for 3P and 4P design
0.03
OD-BC-KS42
33660
Insulating barrier - one piece, for 4P design
0.015
- included in each circuit breaker or switch-disconnector order

- in case connection is reversed (supply to terminals 2, 4, 6) it is necessary to install these barriers also on the lower side, for more detailed
information, see page D21
OD-BC-KS03
20240
Terminal cover - degree of protection IP20, for 3-pole design
0.05
OD-BC-KS43
33661
0.07
- increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20, e.g. when used with cable lugs
OD-BC-UP01
20241
Lever with locking
- enables to lock the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in switched off manually position (loaded)
- locking is possible using padlock with shank diameter 3 4 mm
D13
Modeion
BC160N
Technical information
CIRCUIT BREAKERS, SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS
3P 4P
Specifications
Type
Series
Dimensions A x B x C + D (3P/4P design)
Weight (3P/4P design)
Standards
Approval marks
Number of poles
Rated current
Rated normal current
Circuit breaker
Rated frequency
Rated impulse withstand voltage
Rated insulation voltage

breaking capacity (rms) 1)
Off time at Icu

Rated short-circuit service
breaking capacity (rms)
Switch-disconnector
Dimensions
Installation positions
Load
Connection of 4P circuit breaker
in DC circuit up to 440 V d.c.
D14
Load
Connection of 3P circuit breaker
in DC circuit up to 250 V d.c.
CIRCUIT BREAKER
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR
BC160NT..
NORMAL
75/100 x 130 x 70 + 23 mm
1/1.3 kg
EN 60 947-2, IEC 947-2
BC160NT...-V
3, 4
16 160 A 2)
16 160 A 2)
max. 690 V a.c.
max. 250 V d.c. (3P)
max. 440 V d.c. (4P)
50/60 Hz
fn
8 kV
Uimp
Ui
690 V
690 V a.c.
A
AC-3 (16 100 A)
AC-2 (125 160 A)
DC-22A
Icw / t
Icu / Ue
6 kA/ 690 V a.c.
12 kA/ 500 V a.c.
25 kA/ 415 V a.c.
40 kA/ 230 V a.c.
25 kA/250 V d.c. = max. 5 ms (3P)
20 KA/440 V d.c. =max. 5 ms (4P)
7 ms
Ics / Ue
3 kA/ 690 V a.c.
6 kA/ 500 V a.c.
13 kA/ 415 V a.c.
20 kA/ 230 V a.c.
13 kA/250 V d.c. = max. 5 ms (3P)
13 kA/440 V d.c. = max. 5 ms (4P)
Icm / Ue
52 kA/ 415 V a.c.
In
Iu
Ie
Ue

(peak value)
15 W
Losses per 1 pole at In = 160 A
Mechanical endurance
20 000 cycles
6 000 cycles
Electrical endurance (Ue = 415 V a.c.)
Switching frequency
120 cycles/hr
Control force (3P/4P design)
55/65 N
Degree of protection from front side of the device
IP40
Degree of protection of terminals
IP20
Operating conditions
Reference ambient temperature
40 C
Ambient temperature range
-40 C +55 C
Working environment
dry and tropical climate
Climatic resistance
EN 60068
Pollution degree
3
Max. sea level
2000 m
Seismic resistance
3g ( 8 50 ) Hz
Design modifications
z/z
Front/rear connection
Plug-in design
Withdrawable design
Accessories
z//z/
Switches - auxiliary / relative / signal / early
z/z
Shunt trip / with signal switch
Undervoltage release /
z//z
with early switch / with signal switch
Front hand drive / side drive right / left
z/z/z
Mechanical interlocking-with Bowden cable /
/z
for hand drive
z/
z
Lever with locking
z available, unavailable, + being prepared
1)
2)
- ranges of rated currents vary according to characteristics see page D37
- protection of Modeion switch-disconnectors, see page R
75/100 x 130 x 70 + 23 mm
1/1.3 kg
EN 60 947-3, IEC 947-3
3, 4
160 A
160 A
max. 690 V a.c.
max. 250 V d.c. (3P)
max. 440 V d.c. (4P)
50/60 Hz
8 kV
690 V
AC-23 A
DC-22A
2 kA/ 1 s
2.8 kA/ 415 V a.c.

15 W
20 000 cycles
6 000 cycles
120 cycles/hr
55/65 N
IP40
IP20
40 C
-40 C +55 C
EN 60068
3
2000 m
3g ( 8 50 ) Hz
z/z
z//z/
z/z
z//z
z/z/z
/z
z/
z
BC160N
Modeion
3P
Specifications
Power losses (per 1 pole)
In [A]
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
P [W]
4
4
4
4
4
5
6
7
10
15
15
TEST push button
Description of push button function and signalling

TEST push button - by pressing you will switch off the circuit
breaker/switch-disconnector, including actuating of the
auxiliary switches
Inspection push button - by pressing you will simulate
tripping of the circuit breaker by the overcurrent release,
including actuating of the auxiliary switches and signal switch.
Pressing requires a suitable instrument, such as a wire with
cross-section of about 1 mm.
Signalling of tripping by the overcurrent release - after
tripping of the circuit breaker by the overcurrent release, it will
display the indicator
Signalling of tripping by the overcurrent release

- signalling is for circuit breakers with characteristic D, M and N
INSPECTION push button
Diagram
Circuit breaker with accessories (3-pole design)
pomocn
auxiliary
3.2
pomocn
auxiliary
3. 4
2.2
1.2
1. 4
1. 4
nvstn
pomocn
signalnebo
or auxiliary
1. 2
pomocn
auxiliary
4. 2
5. 2
6. 2
6. 4
B1
10.Y1
A1
10.Y1
Spnae
Switches
Hlavn
obvod
Main circuit
pomocn
auxiliary
2. 4
Spnae
Switches
pomocn
auxiliary
4.4
nebo
or
5. 4
Pomocnreleases
spout
Auxiliary
SP-BC-...
SV -BC-...
TEST
Q
V
3.PS-BC-0010
2.PS-BC-0010
1.PS-BC-0010
1.NS-BC-0010
4.PS-BC-0010
5.PS-BC-0010
or
cavity
dutinaNo.4
.4
1. 1
1. 1
cavity
No.1
dutina
.1
3. 1
cavity
dutinaNo.5
.5
4. 1
5. 1
6. 1
cavity
dutinaNo.6
.6
REVIZE
INSPECTION
2
2. 1
cavity .10
No.10
dutina
J
Q
V
N
TEST
REVIZE
SP-BC-X
SV-BC-X
I>
N
B2
10.Y2
A2
10.Y2
6.PS-BC-0010
or
cavity
No.2
dutina
.2
cavity
dutinaNo.3
.3
circuit breaker
main contacts
trip-free mechanism
overcurrent release
TEST push button
undervoltage release
shunt trip
D15
Modeion
BC160N
4P
Diagram
Diagram description
MP
M
P
X3
B
motor drive - MP-BC...

motor
gear unit
connector for connection of control and signalling circuits
recommended wiring of the control circuits - it is not a part of
motor drive
ON
switch ON button
OFF
switch OFF button
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker - see page D42
J
circuit breaker BC160
Q
main contacts
T
thermomagnetic overcurrent release
3P+N (3 poles are protected, N pole is unprotected)
4P
(all 4 poles are protected)
V
trip-free mechanism
TEST
push button to test release
INSPECTION
inspection push button of release
SP-BC-X
SV-BC-X
shunt trip
HL1 remote failure signalling (unreliable switching on or switching off ),
max. permissible load 10 W 1)
HL2 signalling of circuit breaker lever position loaded, max. permissible load 10 W 1)
HL3 signalling of opening of the front safety cover of the drive, max. permissible load
10 W 1)
HL4 signalling of exsertion of the drive locking bar, max. permissible load 10 W 1)
Ovldac
obvod
motorovho
pohonu
Control
circuit
of motor drive
Q3
L+
ON
OFF
B
Sp Spnae
n e
Switches
pomocn
auxiliary
X3
7. 2
8. 2
pomocn
auxiliary
8. 4
9. 4
9. 2
pomocn
auxiliary
7. 4
Motorov
pohon
Motor drive
10
cavity.9
No.9
dutina
HL 1
N-
HL 2
7.PS-BC-0010
voltage on terminals 5, 6, 9, 10 is the same as Un of the motor drive
7. 1
8. 1
2
X3
9. 1
MP
8.PS-BC-0010
9.PS-BC-0010
1)
cavity
dutinaNo.8
.8
cavity
dutinaNo.7
.7
HL 4
HL 3
OvldacControl
obvod circuit
motorovho
pohonu,
of motor
drive, signalizace
signalling
3. 2
pomocn
auxiliary
3. 4
2. 2
1. 2
1. 4
1. 4
1. 2
B1
10.Y1
A1
TEST
SV -BC-...
SP-BC-.. .
Switches
Spnae
pomocn
auxiliary
2. 4
Main circuit
Hlavn
obvod
nvstn
pomocn
signalnebo
or auxiliary
10.Y1
4. 2
4. 4
5. 2
Auxiliary
releases
Pomocn
spout
po
mo cn
auxiliary
5. 4
6. 4
6. 2
nebo
or
Switches
Spnae
po
mo cn
auxiliary
po
mo cn
auxiliary
Q
V
cavity
dutinaNo.6
.6
D16
cavity
dutinaNo.5
.5
cavity
dutinaNo.4
.4
cavity
dutinaNo.10
.10
3.PS-BC-0010
2.PS-BC-0010
1.PS-BC-0010
cavity.1
No.1
dutina
cavity
dutinaNo.2
.2
3. 1
REVIZE
INSPECTION
2
1. 1
or
2. 1
T
B2
10.Y2
A2
10.Y2
I>
1. 1
1.NS-BC-0010
4.PS-BC-0010
4. 1
5.PS-BC-0010
5. 1
6. 1
6.PS-BC-0010
or
cavity No.3
dutina
.3
BC160N
Modeion
3P 4P
Specifications
States of switches in circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (7, 8, 9)*
10
SV-BC-X...
SP-BC-X...
NS-BC-0010
PS-BC-0010
State
of circuit breaker
State of the main contacts
Circuit breaker lever position
Cavity
Switched on
Switched off manually (loaded state)
0 1
Switched off by the overcurrent release or

Switched off by auxiliary release
Switched off by TEST push button
note: 0 - contact open, 1 - contact closed

* only 4P design
Position of cavities in BC160NT. circuit

breaker/switch - disconnector.
When using one of cavities 4, 5 or 6, neither
a shunt trip nor an undervoltage release
should be used.
10
9 8 7
6 5 4
1 2 3
Connecting and installation

Power circuit
connected with Cu/Al busbars or cables, and possibly
cables with cable lugs
connection sets are produced to provide more connecting
options, see page D9
generally, conductors from the supply are connected
to input terminals 1, 3, 5 and conductors from the load
to terminals 2, 4, 6; however, it is possible to reverse the
connection (exchanging input and output terminals without
limiting rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu)
in case of reversed connection, circuit breaker/
switch-disconnector must be fitted with OD-BC-KS02
insulating barriers also on the side of terminals 2, 4, 6,
for more detailed information see page D21
we recommend painting the connecting busbars

input and output conductors/busbars must be
mechanically reinforced in order to avoid transferring
electrodynamic forces to the circuit breaker during
short-circuit
the method of connecting the power circuit must
observe the deionization space of the circuit breaker/
switch-disconnector, see page D21
Position of cavities in BC160NT4.. circuit breaker/

switch-disconnector.
When using one of cavities 4, 5 or 6, neither a shunt
trip nor an undervoltage release should be used.
Auxiliary circuits
switches, shunt trips or undervoltage releases are connected
using flexible Cu conductors with cross-section 0.5 1 mm2
directly to terminals on these devices
Mechanical reinforcement of conductors for BC160
Recommended minimum cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars

2
In [A]
Cu
Cables S [mm ]
Al
Cu
Busbars W x H [mm]
Al
16
2.5
20
2.5
25
32
40
10
50
10
16
63
16
25
80
25
35
100
35
50
16 x 2; 12 x 3
16 x 4; 12 x 5
125
50
70
16 x 4; 12 x 5
16 x 5; 12 x 6
160
70
95
16 x 5; 12 x 6
16 x 6; 12 x 8
Ik 65 kA
- it is necessary to follow the relevant valid standards when cables are designed
D17
Modeion
BC160N
3P 4P

Connecting set specifications
Type
Cable - ranges of connection cross-sections S [mm2]
Imax [A]
Type of cable
sector stranded
sector solid
round stranded
round solid
Busbars and cable
lugs W x H [mm]
CS-BC-B021
160
2x (25 120)
2x (25 120)
2x (25 120)
2x (25 120)
CS-BC-B421
160
2x (25 120)
2x (25 120)
2x (25 120)
2x (25 120)
CS-BC-A011
160
CS-BC-A411
160
CS-BC-A021
160
CS-BC-A421
160
CS-BC-PS01
10/16
Technical
information
page D25
page D31
16 x
page D25
page D31
16 x
page D26
page D32
1.5 2,5 / 4 6
CS-BC-PS41
10/16
CS-BC-A033
160
1.5 2.5/4 6
CS-BC-B014
160
5x (2.5 25)
5x (2.5 25)
5x (2.5 25)
5x (2.5 25)
page D26
CS-BC-B414
160
5x (2.5 25)
5x (2.5 25)
5x (2.5 25)
5x (2.5 25)
page D32
RETROFIT - reduction for BA*33 circuit breaker with front connection
RETROFIT - sets which enable replacement of older circuit breakers by new ones without switchboard reconstruction
D18
30 x
page D27
BC160N
Modeion
3P 4P

Front connection - Cu/Al cables, busbars (connecting set is a part of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector)
1.
3.
4.
5.
2,5 16mm 2 Al, Cu ... 4 N m

25 95mm 2 Al, Cu ... 6 N m
4
4
2.
17
12 (max. 13)
Front connection - Cu/Al busbars
Rear connection - Cu/Al busbars
3.
6,4
2.
CS-BC-A011
16
3.
1.
2.
1.
CS-BC-A021
5.
6.
5.
7.
8 N m ...
5
8
16 (max. 17)
111
4.
4.
8 N m ...
D19
Modeion
BC160N
3P 4P

Front connection - 2 Cu/Al cables
Front connection - cable lugs
CS-BC-B021
3.
1.
5.
CS-BC-A011
2.
OD-BC-KS03
IP20
or
1.
6.
7.
5.
6 N m ...
8.
6.
2.
7.
1.
8 N m ...
4.
5
max 17
.5
19
35
220
4.
3.
Front connection - reduction to BA...*33
CS-BC-A033
1.
3.
4.
5.
2.
CS-BC-A033
183
6 N m ...
37.5
37.5
16
0.5
1
30
D20
111
8.
max 10
5
5
202
25 70mm 2 Al,Cu ... 10 Nm

95 120mm 2 Al,Cu ... 15 Nm
BC160N
Modeion
3P 4P
Deionization spaces
C=20
B=75
B=75
B=100
C=20
OD-BC-KS02
H
G=40
Un > 400 V a.c.
G=0
Un 400 V a.c.
100
A1
A2
E=70
D=20
130
F=0
>15
Aminimum distance between the circuit breaker/

switch-disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall
(applicable for connection using insulated conductors,
cables, flexibars or with rear connection)
A1minimum insulation length of bare conductors
(using OD-BC-KS02 and OD-BC-KS42 insulating barriers
from 50 mm to max. 100 mm, or by adding additional
insulation for the conductors with barriers to obtain at
least A1 value)
Reference
Dimension
50 mm
A1
100 mm
A2
150 mm
30 mm
A2minimum distance:
- between the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and
uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated
conductors and busbars)
busbar
- between two circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors
situated vertically above one another
- between uninsulated connections of two circuit
breakers/switch-disconnectors above one another
C, D, E, F, Gminimum distance between the circuit
breaker/switch-disconnector and uninsulated earthed
wall
Hminimum distance between uninsulated conductors
USE OF INSULATING BARRIERS AND TERMINAL COVERS WITH CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS
FIXED DESIGN
- front connection
- terminals N, 1, 3, 5 - it is always necessary to use OD-BC-KS02 and OD-BC-KS42 insulating barriers or OD-BHD-KS03 and
OD-BHD-KS43 terminal cover (when using CS-BC-B421 connections sets for connecting circuit breaker/
switch-disconnector, the terminal cover is included in the connecting set)
- terminals N, 2, 4, 6 - it is always necessary to use OD-BC-KS02 and OD-BC-KS42 insulating barriers or OD-BC-KS43 terminal
cover if circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected to the supply using terminals N, 2, 4, 6 (when
using CS-BC-B421 connections sets for connecting circuit breaker/switch-disconnector, the terminal
cover is included in the connecting set)
- rear connection
- insulating barriers and covers need not be used
D21
Modeion
BC160N
3P 4P
Specifications
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE
Type
Dimensions A x B x C + D
Weight
Standards
RCD-BC3-E
RCD-BC4-E
100 x 130 x 70 +10 mm
1.7 kg
EN 60 947-2
IEC 947-2
RCD-BC0-E
100 x 130 x 70 +10 mm
1.3 kg
EN 60 947-2
IEC 947-2
A
3; 4
63; 160 A
0.3 - fixed/
0.03; 0.1; 0.3; 0.5; 1.0; 3.0 A
0 - without delay/
0; 0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.5; 1.0 s
440 Va.c.
80 253 Va.c./
80 440 Va.c.
6 kV
50/60 Hz
4W
8000 cycles
IP40
IP20
side
A
3; 4
63; 160 A
0,3 - fixed/
0.03; 0.1; 0.3; 0.5; 1.0; 3.0 A
0 - without delay/
0; 0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.5; 1.0 s
440 Va.c.
80 253 Va.c./
80 440 Va.c.
6 kV
50/60 Hz
4W
8000 cycles
IP40
IP20
side
Approval marks
RCD-BC3-E
RCD-BC3-E
RCD-BC4-E
RCD-BC0-E
Type
Number of poles
Rated current
Rated residual current
In
In
Maximum inactivity time
tn
Rated voltage
Un
Ue
Rated impulse voltage

Rated frequency
Losses per 1 pole
Mechanical/electrical endurance
Method of mounting
Installation on DIN rail
Use
Reference temperature
Working environment
Pollution degree
Max. sea level
Seismic resistance
Accessories
Connecting sets are part of delivery /
have to be bought separately
Uimp
fn
RCD-...-EF..
RCD-...-EA..
RCD-...-EF..
RCD-...-EA..
40 C
-40 +55 C
3
2000 m
3g ( 8 50 ) Hz
40 C
-40 +55 C
3
2000 m
3g ( 8 50 ) Hz
z/
/z
Description
C
C+D
Dimensions
D22
Designed to protect against leakage/residual current
Design according to the parameters setting:
Accessories for BC160NT circuit breakers - simple mounting on
Version with fixed residual current In = 300 mA, without delay

Design with gradual setting of residual current In and with
setting of ultimate no action time of tn (see table)
When there is set I = 0.03 A the delay is always 0 s !
n
Setting can be sealed
Module can be connected directly by means of CU/Al cable max.
95 mm2
For other connection standard BC160 terminals with the exception
of rear connection can be used
LED to indicate device operation
LED signals 50 % In
Remote signalling of 50 % In by means of make contact (only
at RCD-BC.-EA..)
Remote signalling of circuit breaker switch off based on In level
by means of break contact in shunt trip
Mechanism for disconnection of electronic parts of module from
voltage - disconnection has to be done before the insulation resistance
test is effected
TEST push button - complete test of the device by means of simulation
of real residual current
Circuit breaker can not be assembled by another shunt trip or
Two circuit breakers with residual current module can be assembled
neither by mechanical interlocking nor by parallel switching
left side of the device

Can be mounted on DIN rail by means of adapter
Can be connected with the circuit breaker by interconnecting busbars (can be part of the device itself) or by standard cable
Design according to the way of connection:
Version without interconnecting busbars
(they are not a part of module)
- interconnecting busbars can be bought separately,
see RCD connection
- can be connected to the circuit breaker by a cable,
see RCD connection (cable is not part of the module)
Version with interconnecting busbars
- the interconnecting busbars for connection to the circuit
breaker are part of the (module circuit breaker terminals N, 2, 4, 6
and module terminals N, 1, 3, 5 are connected)
The circuit breaker is switched off by special shunt trip, that is part
of the residual current module
Design according to nominal current:
Version up to 63 A for BC160NT circuit breakers up to 63 A
Version up to 160 A for BC160NT circuit breakers from 80 up
to 160 A
BC160N
Modeion
3P 4P
Description
Signal contact specifications

Disconnection of residual
current module from voltage
TEST push button
Transparent sealable cover

Rated frequency
Thermal current
Arrangement of contacts
LED to indicate device operation
LED signals 50 %
of residual current
Ue
Ui
Uimp
fn
Ie/Ue
Ith
Signalling switch of switch off by a failure

230 Va.c.
250 V
4 kV
50/60 Hz
2 A/ 230 Va.c.
6A
01
Signalling switch of meeting the value
of 50 % In
Interconnecting busbars
Setting of nominal residual

current In
Setting of maximum
inactivity time tn

Rated frequency
Ue
Ui
Uimp
fn
Ie/Ue
Thermal current
Ith
250 Va.c./ 30 Vd.c.

250 V
6 kV
50/60 Hz
5 A/ 250 Va.c.
5 A/ 30 Vd.c.
5A
10
Wiring diagram
Y1
B1
10.Y 1
Chrniov
modul
Residual
current
device
5
X1
Hlavn
obvod
Main circuit
Napov
spou
Shunt trip
F2
S2
SV-BC-D024-RCD
TEST RCD
TEST
S1
E
Q
V
10
J
RCD
Q
V
T
E
TEST
MINITEST
TEST RCD
S1
S2
F2
DT

residual current device
main contacts
trip-free mechanism
thermomagnetic overcurrent release
electronic of residual current device
inspection push button of release
button of residual current module
signalling of 50 % residual current value
signalling switch of switch off by a failure
shunt trip
disconnection of residual current module from voltage
RCD
2
X2
Y2
MINITEST
B2
10.Y 2
DT
D23
Modeion
BC160N
3P 4P
Connection and mounting

Reduction of rated current of circuit breaker according to the type of connection
Circuit breaker 1)
Rated current of
Connection between
the circuit breaker In
circuit breaker and RCD
RCD-BC0-EF16
RCD-BC0-EA16
RCD-BC3-EF16
RCD-BC3-EA16
RCD-BC4-EF16
RCD-BC4-EA16
BC160NT305-160-D
BC160NT405-160-D
BC160NT406-160-D
CS-BC-S016 2)
BC160NT406-160-L
Cu, 70 mm2 5)
0.9
Cu, 70 mm2 5)
RCD-BC0-EA16
2)
CS-BC-S416
(160 x 0.90)
125 A
112.5 A
(125 x 0.90)
160 A
152 A
(160 x 0.95)
125 A
119 A
(125 x 0.95)
160 A
160 A
125 A
125 A
160 A
160 A
125 A
125 A
160 A
160 A
125 A
125 A
CS-BC-L016
Cu, 95 mm2 5)
CS-BC-L416
144 A
0.95
Cu, 95 mm2 5)
cable S = 95 mm2 6)
160 A
Figure
1
CS-BC-L416
CS-BC-S016 2)
Real current Ir1 (t = 40 C) 4)

Ir1 = In x k
Adjusted
current Ir
CS-BC-L016
RCD-BC0-EF16
RCD-BC3-EF16
RCD-BC3-EA16
RCD-BC4-EF16
RCD-BC4-EA16
BC160NT405-160-L
Reduction
coefficient: k 3)
CS-BC-S416 2)
160 A
BC160NT305-160-L
Inlet/outlet cables
Cu, 70 mm2 5)
1)
- for other circuit breaker is reduction coefficient k = 1

- connecting sets can be mounted on both upper/lower terminals
3)
- coefficients k are not dependent on ambient temperature
4)
- dependency of nominal current In on ambient conditions can be found in the catalogue, see page D37
5)
- length of cables 2 m is given by standard EN 60 947-1
6)
- cables length 0.5 up to 1 m
2)
3
Cu,
95 mm,
mm,l l==0,5
0.511mm2 2
Cu, S = 95
Cu, SS =
= 95
Cu,
95 mm,
mm, ll==0,5
0.511mm2
N
Cu,SS==95
95 mm,
mm, l = 0.5
0,5 11 m
Cu,
m22
D24
BC160N
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Drilling diagram
98
Fixed design, front connection
68.5
68,5
20
18
66
.,44
1,5
1.5
12
25
100
x4
15
RR5
544,
.66
40.5
40,5
63
13
45
130
118
93
100
111
14
38
25
25
20
75
25
70
25
80
Fixed design, front connection (CS-BC-B021 connecting set)

68,5
68.5
25
31
25
20
75
168
136
220
100
111
154
186
202
25
2x16,2
2x16.2
D25
Modeion
BC160N
3P
Dimensions
68,5
68.5
10
25
31
25
11,5 11.5
11,5
11.5
75
179
157
135
220
5x7,3
5x7.3
Fixed design, rear connection (CS-BC-A021 connecting set)
5,5
5.5
25
25
25
42
x4
2
35
75
D26
70
9,5
9.5
.,4
6
12
80
130
111
100
13.2
13,2
25
87
111
100
130
25
25
Drilling diagram
15
111
100
147
169
191
202
25
BC160N
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Fixed design, front connection (CS-BC-A033 connecting set)
37,5
37.5
- reduction for BA...*33 circuit breaker
RETROFIT
37,5
37.5
25
22
130
100
111
183
25
36,5
36.5
75
10
1
0,.5
20
20
Fixed design, front hand drive

75
BC160...
RP-BC-CK..
90
63
22.5
22,5
22.5
22,5
RP-BC-CP..
98
45
27,5
27.5
29
Switchboard door modification
Fixed design,hand drive - front, with adjustable lever

75
RP-BC-CP..
BC160...
min.50
RP-BC-CK..
45
RP-BC-CN..
RP-BC-CH..
32
45
22,5
22.5
22,5
22.5
63
32
90
PANEL ROZVDE
SWITCHBOARD
PANEL
27,5
27.5
45
98
124 - 448 (CH10)
297 - 450 (CH20)
D27
Modeion
BC160N
3P
Dimensions
Fixed design, hand drive - control on right side, with adjustable lever
PANEL ROZVDE
SWITCHBOARD
PANEL
90
RP-BC-CN..
45
45
RP-BC-CK30
BC160...
63
RP-BC-CH..
RP-BC-CP..
114,5
114.5
26,6
26.6
45,5
45.5 -- 369,5
369.5 (CH10)
(CH10)
50
218,5
218.5 -- 371,5
371.5 (CH20)
(CH20)
Switchboard modification
Fixed design, hand drive - control on left side, with adjustable lever
75
RP-BC-CN..
32
RP-BC-CP..
PANEL ROZVDE
SWITCHBOARD
PANEL
RP-BC-CK31
45
63
32
RP-BC-CH..
90
BC160...
45
46.6
46,6
49.9
49,9
114,5
114.5
65,5 - 389.5
389,5 (CH10)
65.5
238,5 -- 391.5
391,5 (CH20)
(CH20)
238.5
Fixed design, circuit breaker with RP-BC-CB10 mechanical interlocking
148.2
148,2
12,5
25
12.5nebo
or 25
D28
BC160N
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Fixed design, circuit breaker with RP-BC-CD10 mechanical parallel switching
148,2
148.2
+7
00+7
or 12,5
12.5+7+7or
or25
25+7+7
Fixed design, installation on 35 mm DIN rail
2,7
2.7
130
40.5
40,5
45
67
86
72
82
Fixed design, motor drive
Drilling diagram
94,4
94.4
65
80
150
32,5
32.5
70
100
45,4
15
40.5
40,5
45
130
33
,.55
20
32,8
32.8
39,2
39.2
20
D29
Modeion
BC160N
3P 4P
Dimensions
Fixed design, residual current device, rear connection
100
25
80
25
181,5
181.5
45
100
25
130
25
130
75
25
Drilling diagram
15
40,5
51,5
51.5
25
30
175
70
80
Fixed design, residual current device, bottom connection

100
25
25
80
25
43
40,5
40.5
173
45
130
25
175
5,8
5.8
42,7
42.7
70
80
D30
130
75
25
25
25
BC160N
Modeion
4P
Dimensions
Drilling diagram
98
68,5
68.5
18
6
.,4
20
1,5
1.5
12
100
13
45
118
130
93
111
100
14
38
15
40,5
40.5
63
R5
4.,6
25
25
20
25
50
70
100
25
80

25
25
68,5
68.5
25
31
20
100
168
136
220
100
111
154
186
202
25
2x16,2
2x16.2
D31
Modeion
BC160N
3P 4P
Dimensions
68,5
68.5
10
25
25
11,5 11.5
11,5
11.5
31
25
100
179
157
135
220
5x7,3
5x7.3
25
25
25
25
87
130
13,2
13.2
42
111
100
130
25
25
111
25
25
Drilling diagram
5,5
5.5
Fixed design, rear connection (CS-BC-A421 connecting set)
100
111
100
147
191
169
202
25
35
9,5
9.5
.,4
6
12
80
70
100

100
75
BC160...
RP-BC-CK..
90
63
22,5
22.5
22,5
22.5
RP-BC-CP..
52,5
52.5
D32
45
98
29
BC160N
Modeion
4P
Dimensions
Fixed design, hand drive - front, with adjustable lever
100
RP-BC-CP..
BC160...
RP-BC-CK..
45
RP-BC-CN..
63
22.5
22,5
45
22.5
22,5
RP-BC-CH..
90
PANEL ROZVDE
SWITCHBOARD
PANEL
45
52,5
52.5
98
124 - 448 (CH10)
297 - 450 (CH20)

min.50
32
32
D33
Modeion
BC160N
4P
Dimensions
100
90
PANEL ROZVDE
SWITCHBOARD
PANEL
RP-BC-CN..
45
45
RP-BC-CK30
63
RP-BC-CH..
RP-BC-CP..
BC160...
62,5
62.5
26,6
26.6
114,5
114.5
49,9
49.9
45,5
45.5--369,5
369.5(CH10)
(CH10)
218,5
218.5 -- 371,5
371.5 (CH20)
(CH20)
100
PANEL ROZVDE
SWITCHBOARD
PANEL
RP-BC-CN..
RP-BC-CP..
RP-BC-CK31
RP-BC-CH..
45
BC160...
49,9
49.9
46,6
46.6
65.5 - 389,5
389.5 (CH10)
65,5
238.5 -- 391,5
391.5 (CH20)
(CH20)
238,5
Switchboard modification
32
32
D34
37,5
37.5
114,5
114.5
90
63
45
BC160N
Modeion
4P
Dimensions
Fixed design, installation on 35 mm DIN rail
2,7
2.7
130
40.5
40,5
45
67
86
72
82
Fixed design, circuit breaker with RP-BC-CB10 mechanical interlocking
148.2
148,2
Fixed design, circuit breaker with RP-BC-CD10 mechanical parallel switching
max.6
min.0
148,2
148.2
D35
Modeion
BC160N
4P
Dimensions
Drilling diagram

94.4
94,4
80
175
100
45
130
70
15
40,5
40.5
25
25
45.4
45,4
25
20
39,2
39.2
32,8
32.8
20
Drilling diagram
Fixed design, Residual current device, rear connection

25
25
25
130
181,5
181.5
100
25
80
45
25
100
25
130
100
15
40,5
40.5
51,5
51.5
25
30
200
70
80
Fixed design, Residual current device, bottom connection

100
25
25
25
25
80
43
40.5
40,5
173
45
130
25
200
5,8
5.8
42,7
42.7
70
80
D36
130
100
25
25
25
BC160N
Modeion
OVERCURRENT RELEASES
3P 4P
Overcurrent release is built into circuit breaker.

Release cannot be demounted and exchanged.
4-pole circuit breakers are produced in variants:
3P+N (3 poles are protected, N pole is unprotected)
4P (all 4 poles are protected)
Permissible load of N pole is 100 % In.
Tripping characteristic setting

Circuit breakers with L characteristic
Circuit breakers with M characteristic (only for 3-pole)
Ir
Tripping characteristics
Circuit breakers are supplied with four types of tripping
characteristics. They are designated with the letters:
L - lines (3P, 3P+N, 4P)
- protection of lines with low starting currents
D - distribution (3P, 3P+N, 4P)
- protection of lines and transformers
M - motor (3P, 3P+N, 4P)
- motors protection
N - only short-circuit release (3P, 4P)
BC160N circuit breakers with L characteristic have given
fixed rated current value. The circuit breakers are produced
with In values in standardised series of currents 40 160 A,
see table. Short-circuit release is fixed at the setting 4 x In.
BC160 circuit breakers with D characteristic have the option of setting the reduced current in a range of approximately
0.751 In. The circuit breakers are produced with In values in
standardised series of currents 16 160 A, see table. Short-circuit
release is adjustable. Adjustment values are given in the table.
BC160N circuit breakers with M characteristic have the
option of setting the reduced current in a range of approximately 0.751 In. The circuit breakers are produced with In
values in standardised series of currents 16 100 A, see table.
Short-circuit release is fixed at the setting 10 x In. Circuit breakers are not produced in 4-pole design.
BC160N circuit breakers with N characteristic have only
short-circuit release. They are produced with In values in
standardised series of currents from 32 A to 160 A. Short-circuit
release is adjustable. Values are given in the table.
Circuit breaker designation is set according to the requested rated current and characteristics.
For example: Motors protection with In = 32 A.
Type designation will be BC160NT305-32M.
Circuit breakers with D characteristic
Circuit breakers with N characteristic
Ir
Irm
Irm
Ir and Irm setting for circuit breakers with characteristic D

Ir setting
Irm setting
Tripping characteristic setting:

Dependent release (thermal) L (for circuit breakers
with characteristics D and M). Dependent release (reduced current value Ir), is being set in a continuous range
using the Ir adjustment dial on the overcurrent release. The Ir
adjustment range is 0.75 1 In.
Independent instantaneous release (short-circuit
trip) I (for circuit breakers with D and N characteristics).
With an independent instantaneous release (short-circuit
current value Irm), adjustment is possible in a continuous
range. All values are given in the table.
Rated currents in accordance with ambient temperature
In [A]
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
Ranges of overcurrent release and their possible setting at 40 C

BC160NT305--L
BC160NT305--D
BC160NT305--M
BC160NT305--N
+55 C
+40 C
+20 C
-15 C
In [A]
In [A]
Irm [A]
Ir [A]
Irm [A]
Ir [A]
Irm [A]
Ir [A]
Irm [A]
15
19
23
29
38
48
57
73
91
110
145
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
17
22
28
36
45
56
69
88
105
132
168
19
25
31
41
53
66
83
100
122
145
175
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
40
50
63
80
100
125
160
160
200
252
320
400
500
640
12.5 16
16 20
20 25
25 32
32 40
40 50
50 63
63 80
80 100
100 125
125 160
160 240
200 300
250 375
160 320
200 400
250 500
315 630
400 800
500 1000
625 1250
800 1600
12.5 16
16 20
20 25
25 32
32 40
40 50
50 63
63 80
80 100
-
160
200
250
320
400
500
630
800
1000
-
160 320
200 400
250 500
315 630
400 800
500 1000
625 1250
800 1600
D37
Modeion
BC160N
3P 4P
Tripping characteristic class

Tripping times of the overcurrent release of circuit breakers BC160 with characteristic M at
7.2 In corresponds to the release class 10 A, 10 and 20 according to EN 60947-4-1.
Plate of the overcurrent releases of BC160 with characteristic M
In
Type
Class
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
BC160NT305-16-M
BC160NT305-20-M
BC160NT305-25-M
BC160NT305-32-M
BC160NT305-40-M
BC160NT305-50-M
BC160NT305-63-M
BC160NT305-80-M
BC160NT305-100-M
10A
10A
10A
10
10
20
20
20
20
1.05
1.30
BC160NT305-...-L
BC160NT405-...-L
BC160NT406-...-L
BC160NT305...- L
10000
Characteristic D, In = 16, 20, 25 A

10000
5000
5000
60
60
30
2000
30
10
500
200
500
5
2
2000
1000
1000
10
BC160NT305-...-D
BC160NT405-...-D
BC160NT406-...-D
BC160NT305-...-D
1.05
1.30
Characteristic L, In = 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A
200
100
2
1
50
100
50
t [min]
t [min]
20
20
10
10
5
In= 40...160 A
t [s]
t [s]
0. 5
0. 5
0. 2
0. 2
0. 1
0. 1
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0. 1
D38
In= 16...25 A
0.2
0. 5
10
20
x In
50
0. 1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
BC160N
Modeion
3P 4P
10000
BC160NT305-...-D
BC160NT405-...-D
BC160NT406-...-D
BC160NT305-...-D
Characteristic M, In = 16, 20, 25 A

1.00
1.20
1.05
1.30
Characteristic D, In =32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A
10000
BC160NT305-...-M
BC160NT305-...-M
5000
5000
60
60
2000
30
2000
30
1000
1000
10
10
500
500
5
200
2
1
200
100
50
100
50
t [min]
t [min]
20
20
10
10
5
In= 32...160 A
t [s]
t [s]
0. 2
0. 2
0. 1
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.02
0.01
0. 1
0.2
0. 5
10
20
x In
BC160NT305-...-M
BC160NT305-...-M
10
20
x In
50
BC160NT305-...-N
BC160NT405-...-N
BC160NT305-...-N
BC160NT406-...-N
5000
60
60
2000
30
2000
1000
1000
10
500
500
5
200
200
100
2
1
50
100
50
t [min]
t [min]
20
20
10
10
In= 32...100 A
In= 32...160 A
t [s]
0. 5
10000
5000
0.2
Characteristic N, In =32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A
1.00
1.20
10000
0. 1
50
Characteristic M, In =32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100 A
0. 1
0.01
10
1
0. 5
0. 5
30
In= 16...25 A
t [s]
0. 5
0. 5
0. 2
0. 2
0. 1
0. 1
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0. 1
0.2
0. 5
10
20
x In
50
0. 1
0.2
0. 5
10
20
x In
50
D39
Modeion
BC160N
SWITCHES
3P 4P
Specifications
Type
Ue
Ui
PS-BC-0010, NS-BC-0010
PS-BC-0010-Au, NS-BC-0010-Au
60 250 V a.c.
60 250 V d.c.
250 V
5 60 V a.c.
5 60 V d.c.
250 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp

Auxiliary switch PS-BC-0010 / PS-BC-0010-Au
- make-and-break contact
Rated frequency
fn
Ie / Ue AC-12
AC-15
DC-12
DC-13
Ith
Thermal current
4 kV
4 kV
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
6 A/250 V
5 A/60 V, 3 A/110 V, 1.5 A/230 V
0.25 A/250 V
0.5 A/60 V, 0.2 A/110 V, 0.1 A/250 V
6A
001
Connection cross-section
0.004 0.1 A/5 60 V

0.004 0.1 A/5 60 V
0.1 A/60 V
0.004 0.1 A/5 60 V
0.5 A
001
0.5 1 mm
0.5 1 mm2
IP20
IP20

(connected switch)
Signal switch NS-BC-0010 / NS-BC-0010-Au
- make-and-break contact
- switch can be used only in cavity No. 1
Function, name and location of switches according to type designation

Type
PS-BC-0010
PS-BC-0010-Au
Switch name
Position of switch
Switch function
Auxiliary
Cavity 12), 2, 3, 4, 5, 61)
Signals state of circuit breaker/switch-disconnectors

main contacts
NS-BC-0010
Position of cavities in BC160N....

circuit breaker/switch-disconnector.
When one of cavities 4, 5 or 6 is in use, there
cannot be used a shunt trip or undervoltage release.
D40
Signal
Cavity 12)
Signals tripping of circuit breaker by overcurrent release
NS-BC-0010-Au
1)
- when one of cavities 4, 5 or 6 is in use for auxiliary switches, there cannot be used a shunt trip or undervoltage release
2)
- in cavity 1, PS-BC-0010 auxiliary switch and NS-BC-0010 signal switch cannot be used simultaneously
For states of switches in circuit breaker/switch-disconnector see page D17
BC160N
Modeion
SHUNT TRIPS
3P 4P
Specifications
Type
SV-BC-X
Ue
Rated frequency
Input power at 1,1 Ue
24, 48, 110, 230, 400 V a.c.

24, 48, 110, 220 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
fn
AC
DC
2 VA
2W
Characteristic
U 0.7 Ue the circuit breaker must trip
Time to switching off
15 ms
Loading time
0.5 1 mm2
(connected release)
IP20
Position in cavity No.
10
SIGNAL SWITCH - signals tripping by shunt trip
Ue
230 V a.c.
Ui
250 V
Uimp
4 kV
Rated frequency
fn
Ie/Ue
Thermal current
Ith
50/60 Hz
2 A/230 V a.c.
6A
01
Type designation according to rated

operating voltage
Position of cavities in BC160NT....

When shunt trip is used,
cavities 4, 5, 6 cannot be used for auxiliary switches.
Ue
Type
24, 48 V a.c./d.c.
SV-BC-X024
110, 230 V a.c./110, 220 V d.c.
SV-BC-X110
230, 400 V a.c./220 V d.c.
SV-BC-X230
The specific rated operating voltage of the release is set up by jumpers directly on the release.
The setting from the manufacturer is always to
the value corresponding to the type designation.
(see Fig. 1)
Fig. 1 - The rated operating voltage setting
States and positions

of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector lever
Reaction time of the shunt trip
States of circuit breaker/

switchdisconnector
Lever position of circuit

breaker/switch-disconnector
SV
Switched on
0
>50
L+
1
OK
N-
10.Y 2
B2
SV -BC-...
10.Y 1
B1
t (ms)
Cooperation of motor drive and shunt trip

It is necessary to keep time delay when the control of the
circuit breaker is done by motor drive and shunt trip at once.
The following time delays have to be kept between the disconnection of voltage from the shunt trip and the control
impulse for switch on of the motor drive:
HK
Switched off by releases

or by TEST push button
Switched off manually or by motor
drive electrically (loaded state)
Description of graphs
Symbol
Description
HK
Main contacts
OK
Circuit breaker is ready for further handling
IMP ON
Make impulse for the motor drive
SV
Control voltage on the shunt trip
1
0
t1
SV
1
0
>50
1
0
t2
IMP ON
t1 = 70 ms (mode 1, 2), 140 ms (mode 3)

t2 = 60 500 ms (mode 1, 3), 60 (mode 2)
t (ms)
D41
Modeion
BC160N
3P 4P
Specifications
Type
SP-BC-X
Ue
Rated frequency
Input power at 1,1 Ue
24, 48, 110, 230, 400 V a.c.

24, 48, 110, 220 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
fn
AC
DC
2 VA
2W
U 0.85 Ue it is possible to switch on the circuit breaker
Characteristic 1)
15 ms
Loading time
0.5 1 mm2
(connected release)
IP20
10
SIGNAL SWITCH - signals tripping by undervoltage release
Ue
230 V a.c.
Ui
250 V
Uimp
4 kV
50/60 Hz
Rated frequency
fn
Ie/Ue
Thermal current
Ith
2 A/230 V a.c.
6A
1)
01
- tripping of the undervoltage release can be delayed using the delay unit BZ-BX-X230-A, for more detailed information see page P2

operating voltage
Position of cavities in BC160NT....

When undervoltage release is used,
cavities 4, 5, 6 cannot be used for auxiliary switches.
Ue
Type
24, 48 V a.c./d.c.
SP-BC-X024
110, 230 V a.c./110, 220 V d.c.
SP-BC-X110
230, 400 V a.c./220 V d.c.
SP-BC-X230
The specific rated operating voltage of the release is set up by jumpers directly on the release.
The setting from the manufacturer is always to
the value corresponding to the type designation
(see Fig. 1).
Reaction time of the undervoltage release
SP

switchdisconnector

Switched on
L+
>50

OK
OK
t (ms)
N-
10.Y 2
A2
SP-BC-...
A1
10.Y 1
Cooperation of motor drive and undervoltage release

It is necessary to keep time delay when the control of the circuit breaker is done by motor drive and undervoltage release
at once. The following time delays have to be kept between
bringing the voltage to the undervoltage release and the control impulse for switch on of the motor drive:
HK

Symbol
Description
HK
Main contacts
OK
IMP ON
SP
Control voltage on the undervoltage release
1
0
t1
SP
1
0
>50
1
0
t2
IMP ON
t (ms)
D42
t1 = 70 ms (mode 1, 2), 140 ms (mode 3)

t2 = 60 500 ms (mode 1, 3), 60 (mode 2)
BC160N
Modeion
HAND DRIVES
3P 4P
Description
The hand drive enables to control the circuit breaker/switchdisconnector by turning the lever, e.g. to switch machines
on and off. Modular conception of the drives enables simple
mounting on the circuit breaker (also additionally) after the
cover of cavities is removed. The fixed drive can be sealed. The
drive and its accessories are ordered separately according to
your choice, see page D12.
The hand drive makes it possible to control the circuit breaker:
a) from the front panel (Fig. 1)

Hand drive unit RP-BC-CK..
+ Hand drive lever RP-BC-CP..
b) through the switchboard door (Fig. 2)
Hand drive unit RP-BC-CK..
+ Extension shaft RP-BC-CH..
+ Hand drive bearing PR-BC-CN..
+ Hand drive lever + RP-BC-CP..
c) through the side wall of the switchboard (Fig. 3)
- in left- or right-side designs
Hand drive unit for side control
right RP-BC-CK30
or left RP-BC-CK31
+ Extension shaft RP-BC-CH..
+ Hand drive bearing PR-BC-CN..
+ Hand drive lever + RP-BC-CP..
Fig. 1 - DIMENSIONS see page D27, D32
The hand drive unit is fixed directly to circuit breaker or

switch-disconnector.
The hand drive bearing is fixed to the switchboard door and
it provides degree of protection IP40 or IP66.
Hand drive lever is fixed on the hand drive unit or on the
hand drive bearing.
The extension shaft is supplied in two options, standard
(length 350 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (adjustable length 199 352 mm).
Each hand drive bearing prevents the switchboard door
from opening when the circuit breaker is switched on or in

a state of being switched off by releases. By means of the
device, it is possible to turn off this locking and to open the
door. Locking of the switchboard door opening is also possible
in the circuit breakers switched off manually state. It is
necessary to activate the locking by means of the lever on the
bearing and to lock the hand drive.
Two circuit breakers with hand drives can be fitted also with
reciprocal mechanical interlocking or mechanical parallel
switching, see page D44.
Enhanced safety for operator:

The hand drive unit and hand drive lever are also supplied
with the possibility to lock the circuit breaker in position
switched off manually. The unit and lever of the hand drive
can be locked using three padlocks with shank diameter max.
4 mm.
Specifications
Type
Description
RP-BC-CK10
Hand drive unit
RP-BC-CK20
Hand drive unit
RP-BC-CK21
Hand drive unit
RP-BC-CK30
Colour
Locking of the switchboard door opening

in the circuit breaker state
switched on
switched off manually and
locked
Degree of
protection
blue
Locking while the

circuit breaker is in
OFF state
no
Length [mm]
Switchboard door opening

with the circuit breaker
switched on
-
blue
yes
yellow
yes
blue
no
RP-BC-CK31
blue
no
RP-BC-CP10
Hand drive lever
RP-BC-CP20
Hand drive lever
black
no
black
no
RP-BC-CP21
Hand drive lever
red
no
RP-BC-CN10
Hand drive bearing
black
IP40
yes
yes
yes
RP-BC-CN11
Hand drive bearing
yellow
IP40
yes
yes
yes
RP-BC-CN20
Hand drive bearing
black
IP66
yes
yes
yes
RP-BC-CN21
Hand drive bearing
yellow
IP66
yes
yes
yes
RP-BC-CH10
Extension shaft
RP-BC-CH20
Extension shaft
350 (can be
shortened)
199 352
Telescopic design
D43
Modeion
BC160N
3P 4P
RP-BC-CB10 Mechanical interlocking

Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers/
switch-disconnectors so that they cannot both be tripped
simultaneously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit
breakers may be switched off simultaneously. Interlocking
can be used between two BC160N circuit breakers. Both
circuit breakers must be equipped with a hand drive (at least
one with a hand drive unit and hand drive lever) see page
D43. In order to use the interlocking, it is absolutely necessary
to comply with the dimensions that are shown in the fi gure
and given in the table. For correct function and signalling
the state of the BC160 circuit breaker with RP-BC-CB10
mechanical interlocking, circuit breaker must be switched OFF,
or switch-disconnector must be in loaded position.
Dimension
[mm]
87.5 nebo 100
94.5 nebo 106
RP-BC-CD10 Mechanical parallel switching

Provides simultaneous switching of two circuit breakers/
switch-disconnectors..
Parallel switching can be used between two BC160N circuit
breakers. Both circuit breakers must be equipped with a
hand drive unit and at least one with a hand drive lever, see
page D43. In order to use parallel switching, it is absolutely
necessary to comply with the dimensions that are shown in
the figure and given in the table.
D44
Dimension
[mm]
75+7 or 87.5+7 or 100+7
BC160N
Modeion
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Description
Motor drive side MP-BC-X...-B
Connecting cable OD-BC-KA02
Motor drive is an accessory of the circuit breaker/switchdisconnector, by means of which it is possible to switch
the circuit breaker or switch-disconnector on and off remotely. Modular conception of the drives enables simple
mounting on the circuit breaker also additionally. The
drive is used for both remote and local control of 3-pole
and 4-pole circuit breakers BC160. It is manufactured in
the design for side mounting next to the circuit breaker
on the switchboard panel or on DIN rail. The mounting
of motor drive to the circuit breaker is done by bayonet
mechanism placed on the side of the circuit breaker. The
mounted motor drive can be locked by means of terminal
cover seal.
Modeion BC160 circuit breakers with the motor drive are
intended for industrial, power engineering and infrastructure applications. The motor drives have a system of direct
control of the circuit breaker, without a spring storage unit.
The motor drive can work in the local or remote control
mode. The local control mode is used, for instance in loss
of control voltage. Local control of the circuit breaker is
accessible only after lifting the transparent safety cover of
the drive off. This action locks the remote electrical control
circuits automatically. The lifted off position of the cover
can be indicated remotely.
The circuit breaker is switched on and off by means of the

control lever driver. After returning the safety cover to the
original position, the drive is switched into the remote control mode automatically.
After lifting the safety cover off it is possible to handle an
automatic mode presetting change-over switch. Under
the transparent cover there is also a red LED which lighting indicates a failure (unfinished switching on/off/loading
operations).
Electronics circuits of the motor drive block erroneous control processes, e.g. drive cycling after overcurrent or auxiliary release tripping.
Side drive can be locked in off position of the circuit breaker
by up to three padlocks with shaft diameter with shank
diameter max. 4 mm. It is possible to signal the locking remotely. The protective cover of the drives can also be sealed.
The position of the main contacts of the circuit breaker is
indicated by the position of the circuit breaker driver lever
under the transparent protective cover of the drive. The
wound up position of the circuit breaker can also be signalled remotely.
In the remote control mode the circuit breaker is switched on
and off by ON and OFF push buttons respectively. The motor
drive accessories include an extension cable OD-BC-KA02.
Motor drive automatic mode presettings

Switch
position
Symbol
Automatic mode
Circuit breaker switching Circuit breaker loading to Circuit breaker switching
Preset description
presetting
off to position **)
position
on to position
1 *)
Automatic
loading is on
Automatic
loading is off
Description
Switched on manually or by motor drive electrically

Switched off by overcurrent releases, shunt trip or
undervoltage release, TEST or INSPECTION push button
Switched off manually or by motor drive electrically,
loaded state
Simultaneous
loading and
switching on
- By overcurrent release
- By inspection push button
- By auxiliary release
- By TEST push button
Motor drive performs

automatically
By pressing of ON push
button
The operator must press

the OFF push button
By pressing of ON push
button
By pressing of ON push button the motor drive will

loading and switch on the circuit breaker ***)
The motor drive is out of operation, the red LED is lighting

*)
**)
***)
Standard factory setting of the switch.

When the circuit breaker is switched off by the motor drive electrically with the use of the OFF push button, the circuit breaker control lever
gets into the wound up position automatically, independently of the automatic mode presetting.
By pressing the OFF push button, the motor drive only winds the circuit breaker up to the position.
Side drive description

Locking rail
Open safety cover
Circuit breaker
control lever driver
Automatic mode presetting

change-over switch
LED to indicate a failure (unfinished

switching on/off/loading operations)
D45
Modeion
BC160N
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Diagram
Ovldac obvod
motorovho
Control
circuit ofpohonu
motor drive
Diagram description
Q3
L+
MP
motor drive - MP-BC...
M
motor
P
gear unit
X3
connector for connection of control and signalling circuits
B
recommended wiring of the control circuits - it is not a part of MP-BC..
ON
switch on button
OFF
switch off button
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker
HL1 remote failure signalling (unreliable switching on or switching off ),
max. permissible load 10 W 1)
HL2 signalling of circuit breaker lever position loaded, max. permissible load 10 W 1)
HL3 signalling of opening of the front safety cover of the drive, max. permissible load
10 W 1)
HL4 signalling of exsertion of the drive locking bar, max. permissible load 10 W 1)
ON
OFF
Motorov
pohon
Motor drive
X3
1)
voltage on terminals 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10 is the same as Un of the motor drive
MP
2
7
9
HL 1
HL 2
HL 3
HL 4
8
10
X3
N-
OvldacControl
obvod circuit
motorovho
pohonu,
of motor
drive, signalizace
signalling
For complete wiring diagram of the circuit breaker BC160 with motor drive see page D16
Specifications
Type
MP-BC-X-B
Ue
Rated frequency
fn
Control impulse length
for switching on
for switching off
24, 48, 110, 230 V a.c.

24, 48, 110, 220 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
Time to switching on
60 ms *)
60 ms *)
< 70 ms *)
< 50 ms *)
Frequency of cycles ON/OFF
5 cycles/min
Frequency of cycles - instant successive ON/OFF
10 cycles
Input power
20 000 cycles
AC
DC
Starting current
Protection 24, 48, 110 V a.c.; 230 V a.c.

24, 48, 110 V d.c.; 220 V d.c.
Type
100 VA
100 W
12 A / 24 V a.c./d.c.
6 A / 48 V a.c./d.c.
4 A / 110 V a.c./d.c.
2 A / 230 V a.c. / 220 V d.c.
LPN-4C-1; LPN-2C-1
LPN-DC-4C-1; LPN-DC-2C-1
OD-BC-KA02
Number of conductors
Conductor cross-section
Conductor lengths
8
S
0.35 mm2
0.6 m
*) The values depends on the motor drive automatic mode presetting, see pages D45, D47, D48, D49
D46
BC160N
Modeion
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Specifications
Circuit breaker switching off by motor drive
electrically with OFF push button
Circuit breaker switching on electrically by motor

drive with ON push button
Automatic operation No. 1, 2, 3
Automatic operation No. 1, 2, 3
Main contacts
Main contacts
50
70
0
Auxiliary switch - make contact
50
70
0
Auxiliary switch - break contact
55
65
0
t [ms]
t [ms]
Recommended control impulses

Circuit breaker switching on and off by motor drive electrically using the ON and OFF push buttons
Automatic operation No. 2
60 500
IMP OFF
1
0
>20
50
HK
NS
60 500
IMP ON
>520
>520
>520
>520
>20
60
IMP OFF
1
0
>20
50
<70
60
IMP ON
<70
0
t [ms]
t [ms]
>520
>520
60 500
IMP OFF
1
0
50
HK
>20
>20
60 500
IMP ON
>20
<70
Symbol
Description
HK
Main contacts
NS
Signal switch
IMP ON
IMP OFF
Break impulse for the motor drive
NS
Switched on
1
0
t [ms]
Switched off manually or by motor drive electrically

(loaded state)
D47
Modeion
BC160N
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Specifications
Circuit breaker switching off by overcurrent release
or inspection push button

Main contacts
Main contacts
10
Main contacts
10
10
0
10
0
15
15
Signal switch - make contact

1
0
1080
10
10
Signal switch - break contact
0
1085
10
15
10
10
0
t [ms]
t [ms]
t [ms]

Circuit breaker switching on with motor drive after its tripping by overcurrent release or inspection push button
>500
>1500 *)
1
60 500
IMP ON
60
IMP OFF
*)
70
HK
60
IMP ON
70
70
1070
NS
>20
t [ms]
t [ms]
IMP ON
0
*)
HK
Symbol
Description
HK
Main contacts
NS
Signal switch
IMP ON
IMP OFF
60 500
140
1
0
70
NS
Switched on
0
t [ms]
Switched off by releases, TEsT or INSPECTION push button

(loaded state)
*) If the circuit breaker was switched off by an overcurrent release, it is necessary to remove the cause of the error before its switching on.
D48
BC160N
Modeion
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Specifications
Circuit breaker switching off by shunt trip,
undervoltage release or TEST push button
Main contacts
15
Main contacts
15
Main contacts

1
15
0
20
20
10
0
Signal switch of auxiliary releases
1085
20
0
15
0
0
15
15
10
10
t [ms]
t [ms]
t [ms]

Circuit breaker switching on by motor drive after tripping by shunt trip or undervoltage release
>500
>1500
1
0
60 500
IMP ON
60
IMP OF F
SV
1
0
>200 *)
>200 *)
1
1
SP
SP
0
70
15
15
HK
70
1070
70
HK
1
0
NS
60
IMP ON
>200 *)
>200 *)
SV
>20
NS
1
0
t [ms]
t [ms]
>500
IMP ON
0
>200 *)
SV
1
0
140
>200 *)
SP
Symbol
Description
HK
Main contacts
NS
Signal switch
SV
Impulse for shunt trip
SP
Impulse for undervoltage release
IMP ON
IMP OFF
60 500
1
0
15
HK
70
Switched on
1
0
NS
Switched off by releases, TEST or INSPECTION push button

(loaded state)
1
0
t [ms]
*) Restart is only possible after deactivation of shunt trip or undervoltage release.
D49
Modeion
NOTES
D50
BC160N
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
Switching units, plug-in device, withdrawable device ........................................................................................E4
Overcurrent releases, switch-disconnector unit ......................................................................................................E6
Connecting sets.............................................................................................................................................................. ............E7
Mounting sets..............................................................................................................................................................................E9
Switches ........................................................................................................................................................................................E10
Shunt trips ...................................................................................................................................................................................E10
Undervoltage releases..........................................................................................................................................................E10
Delay unit .....................................................................................................................................................................................E10
Hand drives..................................................................................................................................................................................E11
Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching....................................................................................................E12
Motor drives ................................................................................................................................................................................E12
Control relay ...............................................................................................................................................................................E12
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................................E13
- specifications ......................................................................................................................................E15
- diagram...............................................................................................................................................E16
- connecting, mounting .........................................................................................................................E18
- deionization spaces .............................................................................................................................E22
- dimensions ..........................................................................................................................................E24
Plug-in device
- description, specifications, diagram ....................................................................................................E50
Withdrawable device
L001 - lines
- description, specifications, tripping characteristics ...........................................................................E54
DTV3 - distribution
MTV8 - motor
MTV9 - motor with adjustable timing selectivity

4D01 - distribution with N-pole protection

Connecting sets
- specifications ......................................................................................................................................E19
Switches
- specifications, diagram .......................................................................................................................E61
Shunt trips
Hand drives
- description, specifications ...................................................................................................................E65

- description, specifications, dimensions ...............................................................................................E66
Motor drives
E2
3P 4P
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
SUMMARY OF MODELS AND ACCESSORIES

CONNECTING SETS
3P 4P
Clamp terminals
CS-BD-T011
Block terminals
Block terminals
CS-BD-B011
CS-BD-B012
HAND DRIVES
RP-BD-CK..
RP-BHD-CP..
CS-BD-B021, CS-BD-B022
Block terminals
CS-BD-B014
Potential terminals
Rear connection
Front connection
CS-BD-A021
CS-BD-A011
SWITCHING UNIT
PLUG-IN DEVICE
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
BD250SE305
BD250NE305
ZO-BD-0250-300
ZV-BD-0250-300
CS-BD-PS01
RP-BHD-CN..
RP-BHD-CH..

RP-BHD-CD10
RP-BHD-CB10
Mechanical blocking with Bowden cable
MB-BD-PV05
MB-BHD-PV03
MOTOR DRIVES
MP-BD-X
OD-BHD-KA02
SWITCHES PS-BHD-
Simple
OD-BHD-PP01
SHUNT TRIP
Double
Make-and-break
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR UNIT
SV-BHD-X
Early
ACCESSORIES
TO ZO... AND ZV...
Connecting cable
OD-BHD-KA01
UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE
SP-BHD-X
SE-BD-....-L001
SE-BD-....-DTV3
SE-BD-0250-V001
Signalling of position
SO-BHD-0010
SE-BD-....-MTV8
ACCESSORIES
Lever with locking
OD-BD-UP01
SE-BD-....-MTV9
SE-BD-....-4DO1
Additional cover for

overcurrent release
Terminal cover
Insulating barriers
Sealing insert
OD-BD-VP01
OD-BD-VP02
OD-BD-KS03
OD-BHD-KS02
Keying set
OD-BD-KK01
E3
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
SWITCHING UNITS
3P
Product code
Iu [A]
Icu [kA]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
BD250NE305
Type
14414
250
36
2.84
BD250SE305
14415
250
65
2.84
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page E15

- the method of power circuit connection must observe recommendations, see page E18 as well as deionization space, see page E23
- Switching unit: includes
- 2 connecting sets CS-BD-A011 - for connecting busbars or cable lugs 1)

- insulating barriers OD-BHD-KS02
- mounting bolts set OD-BD-MS01 (4 x M4x35)
- conductor holder OD-BD-DV01
must be fitted with - overcurrent release SE-BD- (circuit breaker)

or switch-disconnector unit SE-BD-0250-V001 (switch-disconnector)
1)
- for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BD-... connecting sets, see page E7
PLUG-IN DEVICE
3P
Type
ZO-BD-0250-300
Product code
14558
Name
Plug-in device
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
1.593
- Plug-in device: includes
- complete accessories for assembly circuit breakers/switchdisconnectors in plug-in design

- mounting bolts set OD-BD-MS02 (4 x M4x40) - for affixing switching
unit to plug-in device
must be fitted with - switching unit BD250..305
- for connecting plug-in device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets CS-BD-A011 can be used that are included with
the BD250..305 switching unit - for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BD-... connecting sets, see page E7
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
3P
Type
ZV-BD-0250-300
Product code
14557
Name
Withdrawable device
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
2.692
- Withdrawable device: includes
- complete accessories for assembly circuit breakers/switchdisconnectors in withdrawable design
must be fitted with - switching unit BD250..305
- for connecting withdrawable device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets CS-BD-A011 can be used that are included with
the BD250..305 switching unit - for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BD-... connecting sets, see page E7
E4
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
SWITCHING UNITS
4P
Product code
Iu [A]
Icu [kA]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
BD250NE405
Type
19571
250
36
3P + N - N-conductor switching
3.7
BD250SE405
19573
250
65
3.7
BD250NE406
19572
250
36
4P - N-conductor protection
3.9
BD250SE406
19574
250
65
3.9

- the method of power circuit connection must observe recommendations, see page E19 as well as deionization space, see page E23
- 2 connecting sets - for connecting busbars or cable lugs 1)

- insulating barriers
- mounting bolts set OD-BD-MS01 (4 x M4x35)
- conductor holder OD-BD-DV01
must be fitted with - overcurrent release SE-BD- (circuit breaker)

or switch-disconnector unit SE-BD-0250-V001 (switch-disconnector)
1)
- for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BD-... connecting sets, see page E7
PLUG-IN DEVICE
4P
Type
ZO-BD-0250-400
Product code
20651
Name
Plug-in device
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
2.1

- mounting bolts set OD-BD-MS02 (4 x M4x40) - for affixing switching
must be fitted with - switching unit BD250..405 or BD250..406
- for connecting plug-in device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets can be used that are included with the
BD250..40... switching unit- for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BD-... connecting sets, see page E7
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
4P
Type
ZV-BD-0250-400
Product code
20652
Name
Withdrawable device
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
3.2
- complete accessories for assembling

- circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors in withdrawable design
must be fitted with - switching unit BD250..405 or BD250..406
- for connecting withdrawable device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets can be used that are included with the
BD250..40... switching unit - for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BD-... connecting sets, see page E7
E5
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
3P 4P
L001 - characteristic L - lines

without Ir setting
In [A]
Type
Product code
Description
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]1)
160
SE-BD-0160-L001
20612
Without Ir setting
0.317
200
SE-BD-0200-L001
20666
Without Ir setting
0.317
250
SE-BD-0250-L001
20613
Without Ir setting
0.317
DTV3 - characteristic D - distribution

In [A]
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
100
SE-BD-0100-DTV3
Product code
24300
Description
Ir setting = 40 100 A
0.317
160
SE-BD-0160-DTV3
24200
0.317
250
SE-BD-0250-DTV3
24100
0.317
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
1
MTV8 - characteristic M - motor

direct protection for motors and generators
suitable also for protection of lines and transformers
In [A]
Type
Product code
Description
100
SE-BD-0100-MTV8
24310
0.317
160
SE-BD-0160-MTV8
24210
0.317
250
SE-BD-0250-MTV8
24110
0.317
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
1
MTV9 - characteristic M - motor with adjustable time selectivity

suitable also for protection of lines and transformers
enables setting delay of independent release to 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms
In [A]
Type
Product code
Description
100
SE-BD-0100-MTV9
17304
0.317
160
SE-BD-0160-MTV9
19569
0.317
250
SE-BD-0250-MTV9
19570
0.317
4P
4D01 - characteristic D - distribution with N-pole protection

protection of lines and transformers in TN-C and TN-S networks
In [A]
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
100
SE-BD-0100-4D01
Product code
33423
Description
0.327
160
SE-BD-0160-4D01
33424
0.327
250
SE-BD-0250-4D01
33425
0.327

- intended for BD250..406 switching unit
3P 4P
Ie [A]
Type
250
SE-BD-0250-V001
E6
Product code
24120
Name
Switch-disconnector unit
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.267
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
CONNECTING SETS
3P 4P
3 terminals
S [mm2]
Weight [kg]
Package [set]
16 150
Cu cables, flexibars
0.24
25 150
Cu/Al cables
0.21
150 240
Cu/Al cables
0.2
Double block
2 x 25 150 Cu/Al cables
terminals
CS-BD-B022
13808
Double block
terminals
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page 19
- using the OD-BD-KS03 cover the degree of protection IP20 is fulfilled
0.51
0.62
0.3
0.237
0.017
0.12
Type
CS-BD-T011

24810
Clamp terminals
CS-BD-B011
24751
Block terminals
CS-BD-B012
17534
Block terminals
CS-BD-B021
CS-BD-B014
24752
20119
Block terminals
- for 6 cables
6 x 6 35
Cu/Al cables
CS-BD-A021
24770
Rear connection
CS-BD-PS01
13682
Potential terminals
1.5 2.5; 4 6 Cu flexible conductor
CS-BD-A011
24750
Front connection
Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs,

flexibars

- included in every supply of switching units
1 terminal
Type
CS-BD-T411

19578
Clamp terminal
S [mm2]
Weight [kg]
Package [set]
16 150
0.08
25 150
Cu/Al cables
0.07
150 240
Cu/Al cables
0.07
CS-BD-B411
19582
Block terminal
CS-BD-B412
19577
Block terminal
1)
- set includes three terminals
E7
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
CONNECTING SETS
3P 4P
1 terminal
Type
CS-BD-B421
19579
Double block
terminal
S [mm2]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.17
0.21
6 x 6 35
Cu/Al cables
0.1
0.08
0.005
CS-BD-B422
19580
Double block
terminal
CS-BD-B414
21170
Block terminal
- for 6 cables
CS-BD-A421
19581
Rear connection

CS-BD-PS41
36031
Potential terminal
1.52.5/46
CONNECTING SETS
3P
RETROFIT
3 terminals
Type
CS-BD-A037
24772
Reduction for BA...*37-50

- front connection
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]

flexibars
0.3

flexibars
0.447
RETROFIT
CS-BD-Z039
RETROFIT
RETROFIT
CS-BD-A039
RETROFIT

and J2UX50 - front connection

- for total replacement of BA *39-50 or J2UX50 circuit breaker with front connection OD-BHD-MS39 connecting set is necessary
18201
Reduction for BA...*39 and J2UX

- rear connection

flexibars
0.739

- for total replacement of BA*39 or J2UX circuit breaker with rear connection OD-BD-MZ39 and CS-BD-A021 connecting sets are necessary
CS-BD-JX75
18023
Reduction for BA...*39-75 and J2UX75 - Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs,

0.558
1
front connection, withdrawable design flexibars
- for total replacement of BA*39-75 or J2UX75T circuit breakers with front connection in withdrawable design OD-BHD-MS75 connecting set
and ZO-BD-0250-300 plug-in device or ZV-BD-0250-300 withdrawable device are necessary
CS-BD-JT75
18024
Reduction for J2UX75T - front

0.711
1
connection, withdrawable design
flexibars
- for total replacement of J2UX75T circuit breaker with front connection in withdrawable design OD-BHD-MS75 connecting set and
ZO-BD-0250-300 plug-in device or ZV-BD-0250-300 withdrawable device are necessary
RETROFIT
E8
24771
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
MOUNTING SETS
3P
Type
OD-BHD-MS39
24741
Reduction for BA...*39-50 and J2UX50 - front connection
Weight [kg]
Package [set]1)
0.7
RETROFIT
- DIMENSIONS see page E28

- for total replacement of BA *39-50 or J2UX50 circuit breaker with front connection 2 CS-BD-A039 connecting sets are necessary
OD-BD-MZ39
18203
Reduction for BA...*39 and J2UX - rear connection
1.255
RETROFIT
- DIMENSIONS see page E28

- for total replacement of BA*39 or J2UX circuit breaker with rear connection 2 connecting sets CS-BD-Z039 and CS-BD-A021 are necessary
RETROFIT
OD-BD-MT75
- DIMENSIONS see page E34, E38

- for total replacement of J2UX75T circuit breaker with front connection in withdrawable design 2 CS-BD-JT75 connecting sets and ZO-BD-0250-300
plug-in device or ZV-BD-0250-300 withdrawable device are necessary
OD-BHD-MS75
RETROFIT
Reduction for J2UX75T - front connection, withdrawable design
14563
Reduction for BA...*39-75 and J2UX75 - front connection,

withdrawable design
0.446
- DIMENSIONS see page E34, E37

- for total replacement of BA...*39-75 or J2UX75 circuit breaker with front connection in withdrawable design 2 CS-BD-JX75 connecting sets
and ZO-BD-0250-300 plug-in device or ZV-BD-0250-300 withdrawable device are necessary
1)
- one set enables to replace replacing one circuit breaker (set includes coupling elements necessary to assemble circuit breaker and mounting set)
RETROFIT
E9
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
SWITCHES
3P 4P
Single make contacts
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
PS-BHD-1000

24700
60 500 V a.c./d.c.
Contacts
0.012
PS-BHD-1000-Au
24702
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.012
Single break contacts

Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
PS-BHD-0100

24701
60 500 V a.c./d.c.
Contacts
0.013
PS-BHD-0100-Au
24703
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.013
Double
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
PS-BHD-0200

13690
60 500 V a.c./d.c.
Contacts
0.026
PS-BHD-0200-Au
13693
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.026
PS-BHD-1100
13691
60 500 V a.c./d.c.
0.025
PS-BHD-1100-Au
13694
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.025
PS-BHD-2000
13689
60 500 V a.c./d.c.
0.024
PS-BHD-2000-Au
13692
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.024
Make-and-break
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
PS-BHD-0010

18021
60 250 V a.c./d.c.
Contacts
0.013
PS-BHD-0010-Au
18022
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.013
PS-BHD-0020
35 893
60 250 V a.c./d.c.
0.026
PS-BHD-0020-Au
37467
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.026
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.045
Early
Type
SP-BHD-0002
16169
Contacts
Early contact
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION for all switches, see page E61
SHUNT TRIPS
3P 4P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
SV-BHD-X024

24650
24, 40, 48 V a.c./d.c.
0.14
SV-BHD-X110
24630
110 V a.c./d.c.
0.14
SV-BHD-X230
24620
230, 400, 500 V a.c./ 220 V d.c.
0.14
3P 4P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
SP-BHD-X024

24450
24, 40, 48 V a.c./d.c.
Description
0.11
SP-BHD-X110
24430
110 V a.c./d.c.
0.11
SP-BHD-X230
24420
230, 400, 500 V a.c./ 220 V d.c.
0.11
1)
SP-BHD-X024-0001
24550
24, 40, 48 V a.c./d.c.
early contact
0.12
SP-BHD-X110-00011)
24530
110 V a.c./d.c.
early contact
0.12
SP-BHD-X230-00011)
24520
230, 400, 500 V a.c./ 220 V d.c. early contact
0.12

1)
- cannot be used in combination with MP-BD-X... motor drive
DELAY UNIT
Type
BZ-BX-X230-A
Product code
36696
Description
Enables to delay the undervoltage release tripping
of circuit breakers Modeion
E10
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.12
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
HAND DRIVES
3P 4P
Type
Product code Name - description
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
RP-BD-CK10
13651
Hand drive unit
- without locking
0.223
RP-BD-CK20
13652
Hand drive unit
- with locking
0.223

Hand drive unit must be fitted with: for control on the switching unit - black hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP10 or RP-BHD-CP20
for control through the switchboard door - extension shaft RP-BHD-CH..
- hand drive bearing RP-BHD-CN..
- hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BD-CK21
13684
Hand drive unit - yellow label
- with locking
0.223

Hand drive unit must be fitted with: for control on the switching unit - red hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP21
RP-BD-CK30
37250
Hand drive unit for right side control
0.484
RP-BD-CK31
37251
Hand drive unit for left side control
0.484
RP-BHD-CP10
13655
Hand drive lever - black
- without locking
0.075
RP-BHD-CP20
13656
- with locking
0.075
- with locking
0.075
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
RP-BHD-CP21
13657
Hand drive lever - red
RP-BHD-CN40
37246
Hand drive bearing, degree of protection IP40

- is used in combination with the black lever of RP-BHD-CP10, RP-BHD-CP20 hand drive
RP-BHD-CN41
37247
Hand drive bearing - yellow label, degree of protection IP40

- is used in combination with the red lever of RP-BHD-CP21 hand drive
RP-BHD-CN60
37248
Hand drive bearing, degree of protection IP66

RP-BHD-CN61
37249
Hand drive bearing - yellow label, degree of protection IP66

E11
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
HAND DRIVES
3P 4P
Type
RP-BHD-CH10
13658
Extension shaft - length 365 mm, can be shortened
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.205
0.255
RP-BHD-CH20
13659
Extension shaft - telescopic, length 245 410 mm

Type
3P 4P
RP-BHD-CB10
18290
Mechanical interlocking - for fixed design
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.16
0.23

- mechanical interlocking must be fitted with: 2 hand drive units RP-BD-CK..
2 hand drive levers RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BHD-CD10
18289
Mechanical parallel switching - for fixed design

- mechanical parallel switching must be fitted with: 2 hand drive units RP-BD-CK..
hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP..
MB-BD-PV05
19612
MB-BHD-PV03
19613
Mechanical interlocking - for two circuit breakers BD250
Mechanical interlocking - for one BD250 and one BH630

circuit breaker
- mechanical blocking with Bowden cable is intended for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable design
0.448
0.448
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
MP-BD-X0241)

21216
Motor drive
24 V a.c. / d.c.
1.529
MP-BD-X0481)
19790
Motor drive
48 V a.c. / d.c.
1.529
MP-BD-X110
13537
Motor drive
110 V a.c. / d.c.
1.529
MP-BD-X230
13535
Motor drive
230 V a.c. / 220 V d.c.
1.529
MP-BD-X024-P1)
20592
Motor drive - with counter of cycles 24 V a.c. / d.c.
1.546
MP-BD-X048-P1)
19791
1.546
MP-BD-X110-P
13686
1.546
MP-BD-X230-P
13538
Motor drive - with counter of cycles 230 V a.c. / 220 V d.c.
- motor drive cannot be used in combination with SP-BHD-X...-0001
1)
- custom production
1.546
OD-BHD-PP01
0.08
0.1
13688
Operating voltage
Counter of cycles - cable length 1.1 m
- DIMENSIONS, see page E30

- upon agreement with the manufacturer, different conductor lengths can be supplied
OD-BHD-KA02
13809
Extension cable - to motor drive 12 wires, length 0.6 m

CONTROL RELAY
Type
Product code Specifications
Package [pc]
37425
24 V a.c./d.c.
0.06
OD-BHD-RX02
37426
48 V a.c./d.c.
0.06
OD-BHD-RA03
37427
110 230 V a.c.
0.06
OD-BHD-RD04
37428
110 V d.c.
0.06
E12
Weight [kg]
OD-BHD-RX01
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
ACCESSORIES
3P 4P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
OD-BHD-KS02
24740
0.077
OD-BHD-KS42
19575
0.039
- included with each switching unit order

- in case circuit breaker/switch-disconnector connection is reversed (supply to terminals 2, 4, 6) it is necessary in most cases to install these
barriers also on the lower side
- for more detailed information see page E22
OD-BD-KS03
13534
0.098
OD-BD-KS43
19576
0.141
- increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20 when using CS-BD-B012, B021, B022 and B014 block type terminals
- intended for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable design
OD-BD-UP01
13533
Lever with locking
0.009
0.001
0.08
- enables to lock the circuit breaker inswitched off manually position (loaded)
OD-BD-VP01
- enables sealing for:
OD-BD-VP02
15328
Bolt sealing insert
- cover of cavities
- terminal cover
- overcurrent release
- hand drive unit
- motor drive
18215
- enables sealing for overcurrent release setting e.g. circuit breakers in the main meter switchboard
OD-BHD-KA01
14555
Connecting cable - to connect the circuit breaker/switchdisconnector accessories in the plug-in/withdrawable

design - 15 wires (it is possible for plug-in design and
fixed design)
0.12
SO-BHD-0010
14560
Signalling of position - signals circuit breaker position

in the plug-in or withdrawable device
0.018
0.002
0.002
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page E50, E52
OD-BD-KK01
14559
Keying set - prevents inserting of another switching

unit to the plug-in or withdrawable device
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page E50, E52
OD-BHD-KT01
14642
Cover of switch on button - for motor drive, cover can

be sealed
E13
Modeion
NOTES
E14
BD250N, BD250S
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
3P 4P
Specifications
Type
Standards
Approval marks
Number of poles
Rated current
Circuit breaker
Rated frequency
at Ue = 690 V a.c.
Series
Switch-disconnector
Dimensions
Installation positions - fixed, plug-in and withdrawable design
Load
In
Iu
Ie
Ue
fn
Uimp
Ui
690 V a.c.
690 V a.c.
440 V d.c.
Icw / t

Icu

Ics
Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak value)
Icm / Ue
Switching off time at Icu

Losses per 1 pole fixed/withdrawable design
Electrical endurance
Switching frequency
Control force
Working environment
Climatic resistance
Pollution degree
Max. sea level
Seismic resistance
Plug-in design 3P/4P
Withdrawable design 3P/4P
Accessories
Switches - auxiliary/relative/signal/early
Shunt trip
Undervoltage release / with early switch
Front hand drive / with adjustable lever
Mechanical interlocking-with Bowden cable / for hand drive
Motor drive/with counter of cycles
Lever with locking
Bolt sealing insert/additional cover for overcurrent release
CIRCUIT BREAKER
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR
BD250N, BD250S
105/140 x 225 x 105 + 43 mm
3 kg/4 kg
EN 60 947-2, IEC 947-2
105/140 x 225 x 105 + 43 mm

3 kg/4 kg
EN 60 947-3, IEC 947-3
3, 4
100, 160, 200, 250 A
250 A
max. 690 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
8 kV
690 V
A
2.5 kA/1 s
3, 4
250 A
250 A
max. 690 V a.c.
max. 440 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
8 kV
690 V
AC-23B
DC-23B
3 kA/5 s
NORMAL
BD250N
60 kA
36 kA
16 kA
10 kA
30 kA
18 kA
8 kA
5 kA
75 kA
-
SUPERIOR
Ue
BD250S
100 kA 230 V a.c.
65 kA 415 V a.c.
25 kA 500 V a.c.
13 kA 690 V a.c.
50 kA 230 V a.c.
36 kA 415 V a.c.
13 kA 500 V a.c.
8 kA 690 V a.c.
140 kA 415 V a.c.
10 ms
18 W/25 W
30 000 cycles
3 000 cycles
120 cycles/hr
80 N
IP40
IP20
4 kA/ 415 V a.c.

4 kA/ 440 V d.c.
18 W/25 W
30 000 cycles
3 000 cycles
120 cycles/hr
80 N
IP40
IP20
40 C
-40 C +55 C
EN 60068
3
2000 m
3g ( 8 50 ) Hz
40 C
-40 C +55 C
EN 60068
3
2000 m
3g ( 8 50 ) Hz
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z/z/z
z/z/z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z

z
1)
Connection of switch-disconnector for DC circuits
E15
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
3P
Diagram
Ovldac
obvod
motorovho
pohonu
Control
circuit
of motor drive
Q3
L+
ON
Odnmateln
/ Vsuvn device
zazen
Plug-in/withdrawable
1
3
1
2 4
S
OF F
B
ZV -BD
Motorov
pohon
Motor drive
10 .Y 1
B1
Hlavn obvod
Auxiliary
releases / Early switch
10 .Y 3
10 .Y 1
A1
Pomocn
spout
/ Pedstihov
spna
Auxiliary
releases
/ Early switch
A1
9
X3
ZO-BD
SO 1
SE-BD
S5
C
or
or
SP-BHD-0002
SP-BHD-X...
NO
SV -BHD-X...
NC
SP-BHD-X...-0001
or
B
T1
TEST
T2
T3
10 .Y 4
10 .Y 2
10 .Y 2
A2
2
X4
B2
8
X3
A2
MP
cavity
dutinaNo.10
.10
PE
N-
SO 2
ZO-BD
SO 3
ZV -BD
4 2
1
Po.counter
cykl
Cycle
4 2
Odnmateln
/ Vsuvn zazen
device
Diagram description (3P and 4P design)

Propojovac cable
kabel
Connecting
10
11
12
13
14
15
X2
2.2
2.4
3.2
3.4
3. 1
2. 1
3. 3
3. 3
2. 1
pomocn
auxiliary
2. 3
3. 4
3. 1
3. 3
2. 1
2. 2
2. 4
2. 3
1. 4
3. 2
Spnae
Switches
pomocn
auxiliary
relativn
relative
1. 2
1. 3
1. 1
nvstn
signal
PS-BHD-0010
or
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
or
cavity
dutinaNo.1
.1
cavity
dutinaNo.2
.2
cavity
dutinaNo.3
.3
Propojovac cable
kabel
Connecting
10
11
12
13
14
15
3.1
PS-BHD-0020
2.1
PS-BHD-0200
3. 2
or
cavity
No.2
dutina
. 2 ++33
X1
1
or
2. 2
3. 4
PS-BHD-1100
PS-BHD-2000
or
2. 2
2. 4
or
3. 4
PS-BHD-0010
or
3. 1
or
3. 2
3. 4
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
or
2. 1
PS-BHD-0100
or
2. 2
2. 4
1. 1
1. 2
1. 4
PS-BHD-1000
MP
M
P
X3
X4
S5
YC
B
ON
OFF
S
motor drive - MP-BD-X...

motor
storage device
connector for connection of control circuits
connector for external counter of cycles
switch to indicate AUTO (NO-C) / MANUAL (NC-C) modes
external counter of cycles - OD-BHD-PP01
recommended wiring of the control circuits - it is not a part of motor drive
switch on button
switch off button
switch for energy storage (switched on = automatic storage,
switch may be continuously switched on)
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker - see page E69
J
switching unit - BD250..305
Q
main contacts
T1, T2, T3, T41)
current transformers
V
trip-free mechanism
circuit breaker - overcurrent release - SE-BD-....-.... switch-disconnector
SE-BD2)
- switch-disconnector unit - SE-BD-0250-V001
TEST
ZO-BD
plug-in device - ZO-BD-0250-300
ZV-BD
withdrawable device - ZV-BD-0250-300
X1, X2
connecting cable - OD-BHD-KA01
SO1, SO2, SO3
contacts signalling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector position in
plug-in or withdrawable device SO-BHD-0010 - for more detailed
information see page E50, E52
SP-BHD-X...
SV-BHD-X...
shunt trip
SP-BHD-X...-0001 undervoltage release with early contact
SP-BHD-0002
early contact
1)
E16
- only for 4-pole design of BD250..406 switching unit
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
4P
Diagram
Ovldac
obvod
motorovho
pohonu
Control
circuit
of motor drive
Q3
L+
ON
Odnmateln
/ Vsuvn zazen
device
N
1
3
2 4
S
OF F
B
ZV -BD
Motorov
pohon
Motor drive
10 .Y 1
B1
Hlavn
Mainobvod
circuit
10 .Y 3
10 .Y 1
A1
Pomocn
spout
/ Pedstihov
spna
Auxiliary
releases
/ Early switch
A1
9
X3
ZO-BD
SO 1
SE-BD
S5
C
or
or
SP-BHD-0002
SP-BHD-X...
NO
SV -BHD-X...
NC
SP-BHD-X...-0001
or
B
T1
TEST
T2
T3
MP
10 .Y 4
10 .Y 2
X4
10 .Y 2
A2
X3
B2
A2
T4 1)
6
cavity
No.10
dutina
.10
PE
N-
SO 2
ZO-BD
SO 3
ZV -BD
4 2
1
Po.counter
cykl
Cycle
4 2
Odnmateln
/ Vsuvn zazen
device
Propojovac
Connectingkabel
cable
10
11
12
13
14
15
X2
6. 4
6. 1
6. 3
6. 2
pomocn
auxiliary
5. 4
5. 1
5. 3
5. 2
pomocn
auxiliary
4. 2
4. 4
4. 3
4. 1
pomocn
auxiliary
2.2
2.4
3.2
3.4
3. 1
3. 3
2. 1
3. 3
2. 3
3. 4
3. 1
3. 2
3. 3
2. 1
Spnae
Switches
pomocn
auxiliary
pomocn
auxiliary
2. 2
2. 4
2. 3
1. 4
1. 1
1. 2
1. 3
relativn
relative
2. 1
Spnae
nvstn
signal
PS-BHD-0010
or
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
or
cavity
dutinaNo.1
.1
cavity
dutinaNo.2
.2
cavity
dutinaNo.3
.3
cavity
dutinaNo.2
. 2 ++ 33
cavity
dutinaNo.4
.4
cavity
dutinaNo.5
.5
PS-BHD-0010
or
6. 1
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
or
6. 2
5. 1
or
6. 4
PS-BHD-0100
or
5. 2
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
5. 4
or
4. 1
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
or
4. 2
3.1
4. 4
PS-BHD-0020
2.1
3. 2
PS-BHD-0200
or
2. 2
3. 4
PS-BHD-1100
PS-BHD-2000
or
2. 2
2. 4
or
3. 4
PS-BHD-0010
or
3. 1
or
3. 2
3. 4
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
or
2. 1
PS-BHD-0100
or
2. 2
2. 4
1. 1
1. 2
1. 4
PS-BHD-1000
cavity.6
No.6
dutina
X1
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Propojovac cable
kabel
Connecting
E17
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
3P 4P
Specifications
States of switches in the circuit breaker cavities
1
3 (4, 5, 6)1)
Switched off manually or by motor drive

electrically (loaded state)
Switched off by overcurrent release
Switched off from switched on state: by auxiliary

release, or by TEST push button or by the switch off
button on the motor drive
Cavities in switching unit, see page E63
1)
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0200
PS-BHD-1100
Switched on
State
of circuit breaker
PS-BHD-2000
SP-BHD-0002
SP-BHD-....-0001
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
2 and 3
PS-BHD-0100
2 and 3
PS-BHD-1000
2 and 3
PS-BHD-0100
10
PS-BHD-1000
Cavity
- cavities 4, 5, 6 are only for 4-pole design

Power circuit
connected with Cu/Al busbars or cables, and possibly cables
with cable lugs
options, see page E7

generally, conductors from the supply are connected to input
terminals 1, 3, 5 and conductors from the load to terminals 2, 4,

6; however, it is possible to reverse the connection (exchanging
input and output terminals without limiting rated short-circuit
ultimate breaking capacity Icu)
in case of reversed connection, in the majority of
cases, circuit breaker/switch-disconnector must be
fitted with OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers also
on the side of terminals 2, 4, 6, for more detailed
information see page E22
Recommended min. cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable designs
Cables S [mm2]
In [A]
Cu
Al
Cu
Busbars W x H [mm]
Al
40
10
16
50
10
16
63
16
25
80
25
35
100
35
50
20 x 2
25 x 2
125
50
70
25 x 2
25 x 3
160
70
95
25 x 3
25 x 4
200
95
120
25 x 4
25 x 5
250
120
150
25 x 5
25 x 6

mechanically reinforced in order to avoid transferring
of electrodynamic forces to the circuit breaker during
short-circuit
Maximum circuit breaker/switch-disconnector loads in accordance with ambient temperature

Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector BD250 - connection by Cu cable 1 x 120 mm2 per pole
50 C
55 C
60 C
65 C
70 C
250 A
250 A
250 A
250 A
250 A
the method of connecting the power circuit must observe the
deionization space of the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector,

see page E23
Auxiliary circuits
using flexible Cu conductors with cross-section 0.5 1 mm2

directly to terminals on these devices
motor drive and auxiliary circuits of the plug-in or
withdrawable design are connected by a connector
E18
Mechanical reinforcement of
conductors for BD250
Ik 25 kA
Ik 65 kA
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
3P 4P

Type
Imax [A]
Type of cable
sector stranded
sector solid
round stranded
round solid
Busbars and cable Dimensional
lugs W x H [mm] drawing 3P/4P
CS-BD-A011
CS-BD-A021
CS-BD-B421
CS-BD-T011
CS-BD-T411
CS-BD-B011
CS-BD-B411
CS-BD-B012
CS-BD-B412
CS-BD-B021
CS-BD-B421
CS-BD-B022
CS-BD-B422
CS-BD-B014
CS-BD-B414
250
25 x ...
250
25 x ...
page E27, E41
250
16 150 Cu
10 150 Cu
16 150 Cu
10 150 Cu
250
25 150 Cu / Al
16 150 Cu /Al
25 150 Cu / Al
16 150 Cu / Al
250
150 240 Cu / Al
120 240 Cu / Al
150 240 Cu / Al
120 240 Cu / Al
250
2 x ( 25 150 ) Cu / Al
2 x ( 16 150 ) Cu / Al
2 x ( 25 150 ) Cu / Al
2 x ( 16 150 ) Cu / Al
page E24, E39
250
2 x ( 150 240 ) Cu / Al
2 x ( 120 240 ) Cu / Al
2 x ( 150 240 ) Cu / Al
2 x ( 120 240 ) Cu / Al
page E25, E40
250
6 x ( 6 35 ) Cu / Al
6 x ( 6 35 ) Cu / Al
6 x ( 6 35 ) Cu / Al
6 x ( 6 35 ) Cu / Al
page E26, E40
CS-BD-A037
250
CS-BD-A039
250
RETROFIT - reduction for BA*39 and J2UX circuit breakers with front connection
page E27
CS-BD-Z039
250
RETROFIT - reduction for BA*39 and J2UX circuit breakers with rear connection
page E28
CS-BD-JX75
250
RETROFIT - reduction for BA...39-75 and J2UX75 circuit breakers with front connection in withdrawable design
page E28
RETROFIT - reduction for J2UX75T circuit breaker with front connection in withdrawable design
page E34, E38
CS-BD-JT75
250
CS-BD-PS01
10/16
1.5 2.5 / 4 6 Cu flexible conductor
CS-BD-PS41
10/16
1.5 2.5/4 6 Cu flexible conductor
page E26, E41

8
CS-BD-A011
25
OD-BHD-KS02
.5
.5
12
25
CS-BD-A021
2.
Click !
7.
3.
BD250...
6.
BD250...
193
3.
1.
3.
1.
2.
M8
4.
4.
12.5
5.
5.
8.
6.
15 Nm ...
9.
0.8 Nm
15 Nm ...
6
7.
0.8 Nm
E19
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
3P 4P

Front connection - Cu/Al cables cables - up to 150 mm2
Front connection - Cu cables

CS-BD-T011
CS-BD-B011
OD-BHD-KS02
7.
OD-BHD-KS02
BD250...
BD250...
6.
8.
7.
3.
4.
173
2.
Click !
2.
3.
15 Nm ...
Click !
20
173
1.
16 50 mm2 Al, Cu ... 15 Nm ...

70 150 mm 2 Al, Cu ... 20 Nm ...
6.
20
8.
10 50 mm 2Cu ... 15 Nm ...

70 150 mm 2 Cu ... 20 Nm ...
5.
4.
5 mm
5 mm
25
9.
6 mm
6 mm
25
5.
9.
0.8 Nm
6 mm
1.
10.
0.8 Nm
Front connection - Cu/Al cables up to 240 mm2
CS-BD-B012
OD-BHD-KS02
2.
2.
or OD-BD-KS03
8.
CS-BD-B021
OD-BHD-KS02
or
Click !
IP20
3.
8.
OD-BD-KS03
IP20
Click !
3.
BD250...
BD250...
F
8.
F
5.
9.
15 Nm ...
10.
5.
9.
8.
15 Nm ...
10.
6
1.
1.
M8
M8
4.
273
301
4.
7.
7.
185 240 mm 2
Al , Cu ... 30 Nm ...
6.
8 mm
8 mm
11.
0.8 Nm
E20
11.
0.8 Nm
8.
43
8.
120 150 mm 2
Al , Cu ... 25 Nm ...
25
30
6.
16 50 mm2
Al, Cu ... 15 Nm ...
6 mm
70 150 mm 2
Al, Cu ... 20 Nm ...
6 mm
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
3P 4P

OD-BHD-KS02

CS-BD-A011
CS-BD-B014
or
OD-BD-KS03
IP20
OD-BHD-KS02
2.
Click !
3.
6.
Click !
3.
BD250...
8.
9.
7.
5.
10.
2.
OD-BD-KS03
IP20
or
8.
CS-BD-B014
15 Nm ... 6
6.
8.
1.
M8
1.
M8
25
4.
4.
287
25 150 mm2 Cu ( Klauke )
13
5.
8.5
25 120 mm2 Al ( Klauke )
7.
2
8.
14.5
37.5
26
6.
6 16 mm
Cu, Al... 4 Nm...
15 Nm ...
4 mm
16 35 mm
Cu, Al... 6 Nm...
4 mm
6.
9.
0.8 Nm
0.8 Nm
11.
Front connection - reduction BD to BA*37
Front connection - reduction BD to BA*39 and J2UX

CS-BD-A039
CS-BD-A037
OD-BHD-KS02
2.
2.
Click !
OD-BHD-KS02
Click !
3.
3.
BD250...
F
7.
6.
BD250...
7.
6.
1.
M8
1.
M8
4.
273
308
4.
15 Nm ...
1
1
6
1
1
8.
50
5.
8.
25
15 Nm ...
50
5.
70
70
9.
0.8 Nm
22
9.
0.8 Nm
44
E21
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
3P 4P

Rear connection reduction BD to BA *39 and J2UX with rear connection
70
44
70
NOT INCLUDED IN ORDER
15
308
25
1
1
15 Nm
CS-BD-A021
CS-BD-Z039
2.
1.
15 Nm ...
MAX. 20
BD250...
3.
5.
4.
15 Nm ...
6.
0.8 Nm
Deionization spaces
FIXED DESIGN
- front connection
- terminals 1, 3, 5
(upper side)
a) if Ue 415 V a.c., it is necessary to use OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers or OD-BHD-KS03

terminal cover
b) if insulated conductors are not used for connecting power circuit to terminals 1, 3, 5, flexibars or rear
connection, it is necessary to use OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers or OD-BHD-KS03 terminal cover
- terminals 2, 4, 6
(lower side)
Only in case that circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected to the source using terminals 2, 4, 6
and at the same time:
a) Ue 415 V a.c., it is necessary to use OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers or OD-BHD-KS03 terminal cover
b) insulated conductors are not used for connecting power circuit to terminals 2, 4, 6, flexibars or rear
- rear connection
PLUG-IN AND WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
E22
- insulating barriers and terminal covers need not be used

BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
3P 4P
Deionization spaces
C=20
B=105
B=105
C=20
B=105
H
OD-BHD-KS02
G=80
A1
F=0

(using OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers from 100 mm
to max. 150 mm, or by adding additional insulation for
the conductors with barriers to obtain at least A1 value)
100-150
A2
E=105
225
G=0
A2minimum distance:
busbar
20
C, D, E, F, Gminimum distance between the

circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and uninsulated
earthed wall
minimum distance of circuit breakers without using
of uninsulated barriers is 50 mm
H
> 15 mm
Busbar
max.3 mm
max.3 mm
Cable
Flexibar
When insulating conductors, cables, flexibars or rear connection are used up to U <= 415 V a.c.,
it is not necessary to use OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers.
[V]
230
BD250S wired with Ik
[kA]
100
BD250N wired with Ik
[kA]
60
G [mm]
500
690
36
25
13
36
16
10
H [mm]
10
< 80
30
80
415
> 36 65
10
[mm]
50
50
50
50
50
A1
[mm]
100
150
100
150
150
A2
[mm]
200
250
200
250
250
[mm]
50
50
50
50
50
A1
[mm]
100
150
100
150
150
A2
[mm]
150
200
150
200
200
[mm]
50
50
50
50
50
A1
[mm]
100
150
100
150
150
A2
[mm]
150
200
150
200
200
note: Ik - max. short-circuit current in the protected circuit (rms)
E23
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
3P
Dimensions
35
100
25
18
100 ... < AC 415 V
103
150 ... > AC 415 V
35
Drilling diagram
35
48
60
20
5
8.,5
16
26
117
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set CS-BD-B012)

105
42
105
35
25
35
223
335
162
193
225
248
273
35
30
22
E24
162
35
105
105
31.5
31,5
35.5
35,5
121
44x
x
55.
,55
29,5
29.5
225
162
154
167
193
213
65
26
17
R88
35
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
105
40
105
35
24
25
35
261
224
335
162
193
225
244
281
301
35
25
18
18
E25
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
3P
Dimensions
105
35
28
42
105
25
35
269
219
335
162
193
225
248
294
319
35
30
22
22

105
58
47
36
105
24
35
35
24
24
11
25
8,4
8.4
8,4
8.4
8,4
8.4
E26
259
236
213
335
162
193
223
225
246
269
287
35
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Drilling diagram
Fixed design, rear connection (connecting set CS-BD-A021)
98
105
8,5
8.5
20
35
21
7,5
7.5
35
46
35
4x
5
.,5
35
225
193
R6
16
28
16
8.,55
5
1,5
1.5
162
193
162
225
154
193
65
48
105
35
36
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set CS-BD-A037)
RETROFIT
105
50
50
35
35
24
29
1
1
12,5
12.5
225
36,5
36.5
162
193
273
35
32
32
E27
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
3P
Dimensions
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set CS-BD-A039, mounting set OD-BHD-MS39)
70
RETROFIT
70
3
35
29
25
35
225
360
162
193
308
35
81,5
81.5
105
25
1
1
32
29,5
29.5
3
32
140
25
15
11
70
210
RETROFIT
12
Fixed design, rear connection (connecting set CS-BD-Z039, mounting set OD-BD-MZ39)
32
4x
15
1
1
105
25
307
360
225
395
36
46
105
70
E28
70
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Fixed design, hand drive
42.5
42,5
BH250...
RP-BD-CK..
133
50
37
RP-BHD-CP..
90
50
140
25

RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BD-CK..
70
RP-BHD-CN..
BD250...
133
50
70
37
RP-BHD-CH..
90
SWITCHBOARD
PANEL
PANEL ROZVDE
140
25
180 495 (CH10)

375 540 (CH20)

MIN. 145
27.5
6.5
55
SWITCHBOARD DOOR HINGE
4x
50
55
E29
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
3P
Dimensions
105
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
90
RP-BHD-CN..
RP-BHD-CP..
45
RP-BD-CK30
133
RP-BHD-CH...
BD250...
30
163
71
67 380 (CH10)
256 445 (CH20)
105
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
RP-BD-CK31
RP-BHD-CN..
70
RP-BHD-CP..
90
133
RP-BHD-CH...
BD250...
45
163
50
71
88 400 (CH10)
276 465 (CH20)
Fixed design, motor drive MP-BD-X...
Opening dimensions in switchboard

door for external counter of cycles
.9
82
138
195
27
247
E30
14
R
m
ax
R487
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Plug-in device
Drilling diagram
25
35
35
18
55
55,.
44xx
140
290
227
193
162
140
232
258
278
290
35
227
145
5
55,.5
44xx
20
31.5
31,5
75
31.5
31,5
75
26
20
,.55
8
16
35
35
35
35
35
26
105
105
Plug-in device, terminal cover OD-BD-KS03

103
70
105
35
400
105
E31
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
3P
Dimensions
Drilling diagram
Plug-in design
98
36
182
105
290
105
140
157
E32
35
227
35
35
258
8,5
7.5
28
35
Plug-in design
,.55
55
44xx
R6
31,5
31.5
16
28
16
,5
8.5
75
1,5
1.5
45
4x
5
.,5
140
258
52
258
290
98
21
21
105
20
7,5
7.5
46
105
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Plug-in design, hand drive
225
175
Plug-in design, motor drive

282
31
E33
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
3P
Dimensions
70
70
20
RETROFIT
106,5
106.5
25
2x
10
10
Plug-in device (connecting set CS-BD-JX75, mounting set OD-BHD-MS75)
106,5
106.5
290
180
433
483
4x
25
160
1
1
70
70
20
154
151,5
25
2x
10
Plug-in device (connecting set CS-BD-JT75, mounting set OD-BD-MT75)
4x
290
154
528
578
180
25
160
E34
RETROFIT
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Withdrawable device
Drilling diagram
25
35
,5
18
35
4x
,5
140
290
193
227
162
140
232
258
278
290
35
227
145
4x
20
75
,.5
8
16
31,5
31.5
31,5
75
26
35
20
35
35
26
105
105
Withdrawable device, terminal cover OD-BD-KS03

103
70
180
35
130
105
400
140
105
179
140
27,5
27.5
E35
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
3P
Dimensions
Withdrawable design
Working position
Inspection position
212
182
179
105
105
30
75
140
290
140
65
74.9
74,9
105
180
170
140
187
157
Withdrawable design, hand drive
Working position
Inspection position
255
140
140
175
E36
30
75
75,2
75.2
225
205
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Withdrawable design, motor drive
Working position
Inspection position
312
282
31
75
140
75
140
20
RETROFIT
140
290
180
5
4x
106.5
106,5
433
483
75
106.5
106,5
25
1
2x
70
10
Withdrawable device (connecting set CS-BD-JX75, mounting set OD-BHD-MS75)
70
31
30
25
160
E37
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
3P
Dimensions
2x
70
70
20
RETROFIT
140
154
290
528
578
180
75
4x
151.5
151,5
154
25
1
1
10
Withdrawable device (connecting set CS-BD-JT75, mounting set OD-BD-MT75)
25
160
Withdrawable device, rear connection (connecting set CS-BD-A021)
105
98
28
16
17
.,5
8
37
E38
75
45
,.5
5
4x
35
35
258
258
140
52
21
7,5
7.5
20
46
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
4P
Dimensions
35
35
Drilling diagram
35
103
18
100 ... < AC 415 V
25
150 ... > AC 415 V
35
48
60
162
121
29,5
29.5
225
162
154
167
193
213
65
26
17
R88
20
,.5
8
16
26
70
105
117
140
31.5
31,5
35,5
35.5
5
5.,5
5
44xx
35
35
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set CS-BD-B012 + CS-BD-B412)

105
42
25
35
35
35
223
335
162
193
225
248
273
35
140
30
22
E39
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
4P
Dimensions
105
40
24
25
35
35
35
261
224
335
162
193
225
244
281
301
35
140
25
18
18

105
28
42
35
35
25
35
269
219
335
162
193
225
248
294
319
35
30
22
E40
22
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
4P
Dimensions
105
58
47
36
24
35
35
35
259
236
213
225
335
162
193
223
246
269
287
35
140
25
11
8,4
8.4
8,4
8.4
8,4
8.4
Fixed design, rear connection (connecting set CS-BD-A021 + CS-BD-A421)

105
2
133
8,5
8.5
20
35
21
35
35
7,5
7.5
46
35
225
193
162
.,5
5
4x
140
16
28
16
,.5
8
1,5
1.5
193
225
162
65
48
154
35
Drilling diagram
36
35
E41
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
4P
Dimensions
77.5
77,5
BH250...
RP-BD-CK..
133
50
37
RP-BHD-CP..
90
50
140
25

RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BD-CK..
RP-BHD-CN..
70
BD250...
133
50
70
37
RP-BHD-CH..
90
SWITCHBOARD
PANEL
PANEL
ROZVDE
140
25
180 495 (CH10)

375 540 (CH20)

MIN. 145
27.5
E42
55
4x
50
55
6.5
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
4P
Dimensions
Opening dimensions in switchboard

door for external counter of cycles
14
R
m
ax
.9
,9
RR448877
82
138
195
27
140
247
Plug-in device
Drilling diagram
25
35
35
18
35
140
227
145
290
227
193
140
162
232
20
,.55
88
16
31,5
31.5
31,5
31.5
75
26
75
258
278
35
290
44xx
55
.,55
,.5
5
4x
20
26
35
35
35
35
35
140
105
E43
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S

Dimensions
Plug-in device, terminal cover OD-BD-KS43
103
70
140
35
400
105
Plug-in design
182
105
290
140
140
157
E44
4P
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
4P
Dimensions
Drilling diagram
Plug-in design, rear connection (connecting set CS-BD-A021+ CS-BD-A421)
140
2
20
35
105
258
28
16
75
45
4x
5
.,5
140
258
,5
8.
36
35
35
16
290
52
21
7.5
7,5
46
140
E45
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
4P
Dimensions
225
290
140
175
290
140
E46
282
31
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
4P
Dimensions
Withdrawable device
Drilling diagram
25
214
35
35
18
35
.,5
5
4x
227
140
145
290
227
193
162
140
232
258
278
35
290
,.55
55
44xx
20
,5
8 .
16
75
35.5
35,5
31.5
31,5
75
26
35
20
26
35
35
140
105
215
Withdrawable device, terminal cover OD-BD-KS43

103
70
215
35
130
140
140
400
105
140
27,5
27.5
E47
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
4P
Dimensions
Withdrawable design
Working position
Inspection position
212
182
213
105
105
30
75
140
290
140
65
74,9
140
215
170
140
187
157
Withdrawable design, rear connection (connecting set CS-BD-A021 + CS-BD-A421)
Drilling diagram
46
2
105
35
140
290
258
52
65
21
7,5
7.5
140
133
20
213
37
28
16
17
E48
75
45
.,5
5
4x
,.5
8
215
35
35
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
4P
Dimensions
Working position
Inspection position
255
213
225
30
75
140
290
140
65
75,2
140
215
175
205
Working position
213
282
31
290
140
65
75
140
Inspection position
312
31
75
30
140
215
E49
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
PLUG-IN DEVICE
3P 4P
Plug-in device
Circuit breaker
in plug-in design
Description
Plug-in design of the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is
intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid
exchange of the circuit breaker along with both visual and
conductive disconnection of the circuit are needed.
plug-in device includes complete accessories for assembling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in plugin design from the originally fixed design
components of the plug-in device are:
- base of the plug-in device
- 2 connecting sets (total of 6 terminals) - for fitting onto
the switching unit
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off of the circuit breaker for handling inserting
and removal)
- set of mounting bolts - for affixing circuit breaker to
plug-in device (set of mounting bolts is used to fasten
the plug-in device into the switchboard, that is included in delivery of switching unit)
Signalling of position SO-BHD-0010

Plug-in device may be fitted with a maximum of four
switches (for 4-pole design, max. 6 switches) for signalling
the inserted/removed position.
Keying set OD-BD-KK01
Plug-in device and circuit breaker can be fitted with keying set,
which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker into the plugin device.
Circuit breaker accessories in plug-in design
Circuit breaker in plug-in design has the same accessories as
the fixed circuit breaker.
Advantages and enhanced safety for operator:
unambiguous remote signalling of the circuit breaker
position
option to lock plug-in device with padlocks to prevent
inserting of circuit breaker

Circuit breaker positions
Circuit breaker in plug-in design has two positions:
1. inserted (working position)
2. removed
visible and conductive disconnection of the power cir-
cuit
easy exchange of circuit breakers in case of failure
IP20 degree of protection of all termination points
plug-in device does not need earthing
Power circuit
- connecting set CS-BD-A011 is used for connecting with
busbars or cable lugs, that is included in delivery of
switching unit BD250...
- for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connecting sets, see page E7
- connection must comply with our recommendations, see
page E18
Locking plug-in device against
inserting circuit breaker
Keying set
OD-BD-KK01
Auxiliary circuits
These are connected using 15-wire OD-BHD-KA01 cable.
Connecting cable
OD-BHD-KA01
States of switches SO-BHD-0010 in plug-in device

according to circuit breaker position
Cavity
11, 12, 13, 14 (19, 20)1)

1
Circuit breaker
2
4
position
Inserted
0 1
Removed
1 0
1)
- cavities 19 and 20 are only for 4-pole design
Position of cavities for
switch SO-BHD-0010
in plug-in device
Specifications SO-BHD-0010
Type
11, 12, 13, 14
Keying set
OD-BD-KK01
SO-BHD-0010

Rated frequency
Ue
Ui
fn
Ie / Ue AC-13
Ie / Ue DC-15
Ith
Thermal current
S
Degree of protection of terminals (connected switch)
SO-BHD-0010
400 V a.c.
250 V d.c.
500 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
3 A /400 V a.c.
0.15 A /250 V d.c., 0.3 A /125 V d.c., 4 A /30 V d.c.
6A
001
0.5 1 mm2
IP20
For wiring diagram of circuit breaker in plug-in device with accessories see page E16.
E50
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
PLUG-IN DEVICE
3P 4P
Recommended circuit breaker manipulation
During the manipulation with circuit breaker in plug-in design with motor drive, the circuit breaker may reach the state,
in which the first attempt at switching on by motor drive is
unsuccessful. Switching on is executed after repeated make
impulse. To avoid this eff ect, some of the following steps may
be done:
1) To keep the process of manipulation with the circuit breaker,
see Recommended circuit breaker manipulation below
2) To connect OD-BHD-R control relay into the motor
drive circuit according to wiring diagram, see page E72
Circuit breaker in plug-in design with motor drive
Recommended process of manipulation

After every manipulation with circuit breaker in plug-in design
it is necessary to accomplish the operations in following sequence, after repeated insertion into the plug-in device:
1) press the switch off button (red) on the motor drive, see Fig.
2) press the switch on button (green) on the motor drive, see Fig.
Changes in states of switches in cavities of switching unit at removal of the circuit breaker
State of circuit breaker befor removing
State of switches before removing - inserted position
3 (4, 5, 6)1)
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0100
3 (4, 5, 6)
PS-BHD-1000
2
PS-BHD-0100
1
PS-BHD-1000
Cavity
State of switches after removing - withdrawn position

1)
Switched on

(loaded state)
Switched off from switched on state: by auxiliary release,

or by TEST push button or by the switch off button on
the motor drive
1)
E51
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
3P 4P
Withdrawable device
Circuit breaker
in withdrawable design
Description
Withdrawable design of the circuit breaker/switchdisconnector is intended for demanding industrial
applications where rapid exchange of the circuit breaker,
frequent checking and both visual and conductive
disconnection of the circuit are needed.
withdrawable device includes complete accessories for
assembling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in withdrawable design from the originally fixed design
components of the withdrawable device are:
- base of the withdrawable device
- 2 movable side plates
- 2 connecting sets (total of 6 terminals) - for fitting onto
the switching unit
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching
off of the circuit breaker for handling inserting and
withdrawing)
- set of mounting bolts is used to fasten the withdrawable
device into the switchboard, that is included in delivery
of switching unit

Withdrawable device can be fitted with the switches for
signalling the position of the circuit breaker inserted/
withdrawn/removed.

Circuit breaker in withdrawable design has three positions:
2. withdrawn (inspection position)
3. removed

unambiguous remote and local signalling of the circuit
breaker and arrestment positions
checking of circuit breaker and accessories function in the
inspection position
locking withdrawable device against inserting circuit
breaker, locking of circuit breaker in inserted (operating)
position, locking of circuit breaker in withdrawn
(checking) position - locking by means of padlocks
visible and conductive disconnection of the power circuit
withdrawable device does not need earthing
Keying set OD-BD-KK01

Withdrawable device and circuit breaker can be fitted with
keying set, which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker
into the withdrawable device.
Locking withdrawable
device against inserting
circuit breaker
States of switches SO-BHD-0010 in withdrawable device

according to circuit breaker and arrestment positions
Cavity
11, 12, 13, 14 15, 17

16, 18
(19, 20)1) (19, 20)1)
1
circuit breaker against
manipulation
Position of cavities for switch

SO-BHD-0010 in withdrawable device

Rated frequency
16, 18
E52
Circuit breaker accessories in withdrawable design

Circuit breaker in withdrawable design has the same
accessories as fixed circuit breaker.
Keying set
OD-BD-KK01
Connecting cable
OD-BHD-KA01
SO-BHD-0010
Ue
15, 17
11, 12, 13, 14
Auxiliary circuits
Circuit breaker and

2
4
2
4
2
4
arrestment position
Inserted and not arrested
0 1
1 0
0 1
Inserted and arrested
0 1
1 0
1 0
Withdrawn and not arrested
1 0
0 1
0 1
Withdrawn and arrested
1 0
0 1
1 0
Removed and not arrested
1 0
1 0
0 1
Removed and arrested
1 0
1 0
1 0
- operating state is always in arrested position
- in arrested position it is possible to lock the withdrawable device (for
more information, seeAdvantages and enhanced safety for operator)
1)
Type
Keying set
OD-BD-KK01
Power circuit
- connecting set CS-BD-A011 is used for connecting with
switching unit BD250..
- for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connecting sets, see page 10
page 19
Ui
fn
Ie / Ue AC-13
Ie / Ue DC-15
Ith
Thermal current
S
SO-BHD-0010
400 V a.c.
250 V d.c.
500 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
3 A /400 V a.c.
0.15 A /250 V d.c., 0.3 A /125 V d.c., 4 A /30 V d.c.
6A
001
0.5 1 mm2
IP20
For wiring diagram of circuit breaker in withdrawable device with accessories see page E16.
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
3P 4P
During the manipulation with circuit breaker in withdrawable
design with motor drive, the circuit breaker may reach the
state, in which the first attempt at switching on by motor
drive is unsuccessful. Switching on is executed after repeated
make impulse. To avoid this effect, some of the following
steps may be done:
seeRecommended circuit breaker manipulation below
2) To connect OD-BHD-R control relay into the motor drive
circuit according to wiring diagram, see page E72
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design with motor drive

After every manipulation with circuit breaker in withdrawable
design is necessary to accomplish the operations in following
sequence, after repeated insertion into the plug-in device:
2) press the switch on button (green) on the motor drive, see Fig.
Changes in states of switches in cavities of switching unit at inserting and withdrawing of the circuit breaker
State before insertion/withdrawal
State after insertion/withdrawal
State of circuit breaker before insertion
State of switches before insertion - withdrawn position
State of switches after insertion - inserted position
State of circuit breaker before withdrawal
State of switches before withdrawal - inserted position
State of switches after withdrawal - withdrawn position
3 (4, 5, 6)1)
3 (4, 5, 6)1)
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
2
PS-BHD-0100
1
PS-BHD-1000
Cavity
Switched on

(loaded state)

the motor drive
1)
E53
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
OVERCURRENT RELEASES L001 - LINES
3P 4P
Protection of lines with low starting currents
Specifications
Description
Type
- for BD250... switching unit

- nominal currents are given by type designation
- the thermal memory cannot be disabled
- short-circuit release is fixed at the setting 4 x In
L001
L
Tripping characteristic
SE-BD-0...-L001
10000
Ir
5000
60
30
2000
1000
10
500
5
200
2
1
100
50
t [min]
20
10
I n= 160 A
I n= 200 A
I n= 250 A
5
2
t [s]
0. 5
0. 2
0. 1
0.05
Irm
0.02
0.01
0. 5
E54
10
20
x In
50
In [A]
Irm [A]
SE-BD-0160-L001
160
640
SE-BD-0200-L001
200
800
SE-BD-0250-L001
250
1000
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
OVERCURRENT RELEASES DTV3 - DISTRIBUTION
3P 4P
Protection of lines and transformers
Specifications - adjustable
Description
Type
DTV3
L

- reduced current setting
- possibility to switch off the thermal memory
- setting of the value of the short-circuit release
- signalling of operating state and of the value of passing current
In [A]
Ir
Irm
SE-BD-0100-DTV3
100
SE-BD-0160-DTV3
160
SE-BD-0250-DTV3
250
SE-BD-....-DTV3
10000
Ir
min
5000
ma x
60
30
Ir
2000
Irm
1000
10
500
5
200
2
1
100
50
t [min]
20
10
In= 100 A
In= 160 A
In= 250 A
t [s]
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
8x
8x
4x
4x
In= 100 A
Irm
0.02
0.01
x In
0.1
0.05
8x
8x
4x
4x
In= 160 A
Irm
0.02
0.01
x In
0.1
0.05
8x
8x
Irm
4x
4x
In= 250 A
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
Reduced current setting Ir, resp.

rated current according to the protected device
10
Setting of the current

value of the short-circuit release
20
x In
50
Ir [A]
40
43
46
48
50
55
58
61
63
69
72
76
80
87
91
100
63
69
72
80
87
91
100
110
115
120
125
130
137
144
150
160
100
110
115
125
137
144
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
restart
Irm
T(0)
T(t)
4 x Ir
8 x Ir
T(0)
T(t)
4 x Ir
8 x Ir
T(0)
T(t)
4 x Ir
8 x Ir
Switching ON/OFF of the thermal memory
E55
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
OVERCURRENT RELEASES MTV8 - MOTORS

Direct protection for motors and generators
Possibility of protection of lines and transformers
3P 4P
Type
In [A]
Description
- possibility to set 8 characteristics
- 4 in mode M ( motors protection)
- 4 in mode TV (protection of transformers and lines)
- undercurrent release - in case of failure of one or two phases in
mode M the switch off delay is 4 s
- delay setting at 7.2 x Ir
- delay setting of short-circuit release 0 or 50 ms
SE-BD-0100-MTV8
100
MTV8
L
Ir
tr
Irm
50ms
SE-BD-0160-MTV8
0ms
160
SE-BD-0250-MTV8

rated current according to the protected device

Choice of characteristic type. Delay setting at 7.2 Ir.

Switching ON/OFF of the thermal memory.
E56
250
Ir [A]
tr [s] (7.2 x Ir)
restart
Irm [kA]
40
43
46
48
50
55
58
61
63
69
72
76
80
87
91
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
0.125
0.25
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.25
1.5
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.25
100
1 (TV 1)
T(t)
0.125
63
69
72
80
87
91
100
110
115
120
125
130
137
144
150
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
0.2
0.4
0.6
1.0
1.3
1.6
2.0
2.4
2.0
2.0
1.6
1.3
1.0
0.6
0.4
160
1 (TV 1)
T(t)
0.2
100
110
115
125
137
144
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
0.35
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.25
1.5
2.0
2.5
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
250
1 (TV 1)
T(t)
0.35
0 ms
50 ms
0 ms
50 ms
0 ms
50 ms
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
3P 4P
Tripping characteristic SE-BD-....-MTV8

Characteristic "TV"
10000
Characteristic "M"
10000
Ir
min
5000
TV
ma x
60
30
2000
Irm
30
1000
10
10
500
0ms 50ms
tr
2000
Irm
500
20
200
100
50
20
t [min]
tr
20
10
10
In = 100 A
In = 160 A
In = 250 A
100
50
tr
t [min]
20
20
10
10
15
20
15
In = 100 A
In = 160 A
In = 250 A
5
3
t [s]
ma x
Ir
5
200
min
1000
5
2
Ir
5000
60
0ms 50ms
tr
Ir
2
1
t [s]
0.5
1
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
50
50
0.05
0.05
0.25
0.125
In = 100 A
0.02
0.6 0.8 1.0
0.4
1.25
Irm [kA]
1.5
0.01
0.25
0.125
In = 100 A
0.02
0.6 0.8 1.0
0.4
1.25
Irm [kA]
1.5
0.01
x In
0.1
x In
0.1
50
50
0.05
0.05
0.4
0.2
In = 160 A
0.02
1.0 1.3 1.6
0.6
2.0
2.4
Irm [kA]
0.01
0.4
0.2
In = 160 A
0.02
1.0 1.3 1.6
0.6
2.0
2.4
Irm [kA]
0.01
x In
0.1
x In
0.1
50
50
0.05
0.05
0.5
0.35
In = 250 A
0.02
0.75 1.0
1.25
1.5 2.0 2.5
Irm [kA]
0.01
0.5
0.35
In = 250 A
0.02
0.75 1.0
1.25
1.5 2.0 2.5
Irm [kA]
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
0.1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
E57
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
OVERCURRENT RELEASES MTV9 - MOTORS, TIME SELECTIVITY SETTING

Enables to set delay of independent release
Type
In [A]
Description
- 4 in mode M (motors protection)
- setting of the value of the short-circuit release (delay = 0 ms)
- delayed short-circuit release setting 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms
SE-BD-0100-MTV9
100
MTV9
L
Ir
tr
Irmv
tv
SE-BD-0160-MTV9
160
SE-BD-0250-MTV9

rated current according to the
protected device

value of the delayed
short-circuit release

E58
3P 4P
250
Ir [A]
tr [s] (7.2 x Ir)
restart
Irm [kA]
40
43
46
48
50
55
58
61
63
69
72
76
80
87
91
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
100
1 (TV 1)
T(t)
63
69
72
80
87
91
100
110
115
120
125
130
137
144
150
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
160
1 (TV 1)
T(t)
100
110
115
125
137
144
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
250
1 (TV 1)
T(t)
0 ms
100 ms
200 ms
300 ms
0 ms
100 ms
200 ms
300 ms
0 ms
100 ms
200 ms
300 ms
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
3P 4P
Tripping characteristic SE-BD-....-MTV9

Characteristic TV
Ir
TV
max
60
2000
30
1000
10
1
50
t [min]
3
100
50
t [min]
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
I n =100 A
I n =160 A
I n =250 A
5
2
t [s]
0. 5
I n =100 A
I n =160 A
I n =250 A
9 xI r
5 xI r
7 xI r
0.02
I rm v
0.01
0. 1
0.2
0. 5
300
200
100
tv [ms]
0. 1
0.05
0.02
10
20
x In
50
I rm v
0.01
5
tr [s]
0. 2
100
tv [ms]
0. 1
0.05
8
3
0. 5
300
200
0. 2
I n =100 A
I n =160 A
I n =250 A
15
tr [s]
3 xI r
t [s]
I n =100 A
20
200
2
100
Irm v
tv
15
500
9 xI r
2000
20
200
tr
Ir
1000
10
500
max
5 xI r
7 xI r
10
min
5000
60
Irm v
tv
3 xI r
30
tr
Ir
Ir
I n =160 A
min
5000
Characteristic M
10000
I n =250 A
10000
0. 1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
E59
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
OVERCURRENT RELEASES 4D01 - DISTRIBUTION WITH N-POLE PROTECTION

Protection of lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S networks
Type
Description
In [A]
Ir [A]
100
40
43
46
48
50
55
58
61
63
69
72
76
80
87
91
100
- for 4-pole BD250... switching unit with protected 4th pole

- setting of the protection level of 4th pole (possibility of total switch off )
SE-BD-0100-4D01
4D01
L
Ir
IN
tr
Irm
IN
5000
60
30
IN
Ir
2000
1000
10
0.5 xIr
0.75 xIr
1 xI r
SE-BD-0...-4D01
10000
min
Ir
tr
Irm
max
SE-BD-0160-4D01
160
20
500
10
5
200
2
1
3
100
50
t [min]
20
20
10
tr [s]
2
1
1
0. 5
I n =100 A
I n =160 A
I n =250 A
2 xI r
0.05
9 xI r
I
7 xI r
0. 1
4 xI r
0. 2
I rm
SE-BD-0250-4D01
0.02
0.01
0. 1
0.2
0.5

protected device
Setting of the protection level of N pole
E60
63
69
72
80
87
91
100
110
115
120
125
130
137
144
150
160
tr [s] (7.2 x Ir)
restart Irm [kA]
IN [A] (m x Ir )
1
2
0.5
0.75
OFF
0.5
0.75
OFF
0.5
0.75
OFF
3
T(0)
10
20
20
10
T(t)
3
1
1
T(0)
3
10
20
20
10
T(t)
3
1
10
t [s]
4P
10
20
x In
50
Setting of the
current value of the
short-circuit release
Delay setting at 7.2 Ir.

250
100
110
115
125
137
144
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
1
3
T(0)
10
20
20
10
T(t)
3
1
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
SWITCHES
3P 4P
Specifications
PS-BHD-..00
PS-BHD-..00-Au1)
60 500 V a.c.
60 500 V d.c.
500 V
5 60 V a.c.
5 60 V d.c.
500 V
Type
Simple
Ue
Ui
Rated frequency
fn
Ie / Ue AC-15
Ie / Ue DC-13
Ith
Thermal current
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
6 A/240 V, 4 A/400 V, 2 A/500 V

0.4 A/240 V, 0.3 A/400 V, 0.2 A/500 V
10 A
AC-12, DC-12 0.004 0.5 A/5 V,

0.004 0.01/60 V
0.5 A
01, 10, 02, 11, 20
0.5 1 mm2
IP20
IP20
Degree of protection of terminals (of connected switch)

Double
Type
Make-and-break
SP-BHD-0002
PS-BHD-0010/0020
PS-BHD-0010-Au/0020-Au1)
250 V a.c.
250 V
60 250 V a.c.
60 250 V d.c.
250 V
5 60 V a.c.
5 60 V d.c.
250 V
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Ue
Ui
Rated frequency
fn
Ie / Ue
Ie / Ue
Ith
Thermal current
50/60 Hz
1 A/250 V a.c.
-
001/002
2
001/002
0.5 1 mm
0.5 1 mm
IP20
IP20

1)
AC-15 1.5 A/250 V a.c. AC-12, DC-12 0.004 0.5 A/5 V,

DC-13 0.2 A/250 V d.c.
0.004 0.01/60 V
6A
0,5 A
02, 11, 20
01, 10, 02, 11, 20
0.5 1 mm2
0.5 1 mm2
IP20
- PS-BHD-....- Au is not suitable to control electromagnetic loads
Type designation, number and type of contacts according to contact arrangement

Double make-and-break
Arrangement of contacts Type
Early
Number of contacts
Contact types
01
PS-BHD-1000 (-Au)
make
20
PS-BHD-2000 (-Au)
make
01
PS-BHD-0100 (-Au)
break
02
PS-BHD-0200 (-Au)
break
11
PS-BHD-1100 (-Au)
1+1
breaking+switching
001
PS-BHD-0010 (-Au)
make-and-break
002
PS-BHD-0020(-Au)
make-and-break
Function and names of switches according to their location in cavities
SV -BHD-X...
SP-BHD-X...
10
1 2 3
PS-BHD-....
Position of switch
Switch name
Switch function
Cavity 1
Signal
signals tripping of circuit breaker by overcurrent release
Cavity 2
Relative
signals tripping of circuit breaker by releases, TEST push button or by switch off
Cavity 3 (4, 5, 6)2)
Auxiliary
signals position of circuit breaker/switch-disconnectors main contacts
Cavity 10
Early
makes/breaks in advance before making the main contact of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
- states of switches in the circuit breaker cavities, see page E18
2)
Cavities in BD250... switching unit
Diagram
Switches
cavity No.1
6. 4
6. 1
6. 2
6. 3
5. 4
5. 1
5. 2
5. 3
4. 1
auxiliary
auxiliary
4. 2
4. 4
4. 3
2.2
2.4
3.2
3.4
auxiliary
3. 1
2. 1
2. 1
3. 3
3. 3
2. 3
3. 4
3. 1
3. 2
3. 3
2. 1
cavity No.2
cavity No.3
cavity No.2 + 3
cavity No.4
cavity No.5
PS-BHD-0010
or
6. 1
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
or
6. 2
6. 4
PS-BHD-0010
or
5. 1
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
or
5. 2
4. 1
or
5. 4
PS-BHD-0100
or
4. 2
PS-BHD-1000
4. 4
PS-BHD-0020
3.1
2.1
2. 2
PS-BHD-0200
or
3. 2
3. 4
PS-BHD-1100
or
2. 2
PS-BHD-2000
PS-BHD-0010
or
3. 4
3. 1
or
2. 4
PS-BHD-0100
or
3. 2
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
3. 4
or
2. 1
PS-BHD-0100
or
2. 2
2. 4
PS-BHD-1000
or
1. 1
1. 2
10 .Y 4
1. 4
10 .Y 2
cavity No.10
auxiliary
auxiliary
2. 2
2. 4
2. 3
1. 4
1. 2
relative
PS-BHD-0010
or
PS-BHD-010 0
SP-BHD-0002
PS-BHD-100 0
1. 3
1. 1
signal
10 .Y 3
10 .Y 1
early
cavity No.6
E61
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
SHUNT TRIPS
3P 4P
Specifications
Type
SV-BHD-X
Ue
Rated frequency
24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V a.c.

24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
fn
Input power at 1.1 Ue
AC
DC
< 3 VA
<3W
Characteristic
20 ms
Loading time
0,5 1 mm2
(connected release)
IP20

operating voltage
SV -BHD-X...
SP-BHD-X...
10
10
1 2 3
PS-BHD-....
Ue
Type
24, 40, 48 V a.c./d.c.
SV-BHD-X024
110 V a.c./d.c.
SV-BHD-X110
230, 400, 500 V a.c. /220 V d.c.
SV-BHD-X230
The specific rated operating voltage of the release

is set up by jumpers directly on the release. It is
always set to the maximum value by default (see
Fig. 1).
Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector switching off by shunt trip

Main contacts
2
4
6
1
3
5
20
1
0
Auxiliary switch
3.4
3.4
3.3
3.3
20
1
0
Auxiliary switch
14
3.2
13
3.1
20
1
0
Relative switch
30
1
2.4
2.3
0
Relative switch
30
1
2.2
2.1
1
0
10
10 3
50
00
10 2
50
0
1 5
10
50
t [ms ]
States and positions of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector lever

States of circuit
Switched on
Switched off by releases, TEST or by switch off
E62

BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
3P 4P
Specifications
SP-BHD-X
SP-BHD-X-00012)
24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V a.c.

24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V a.c.

24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
< 3 VA
<3W
U 0.85 Ue - circuit breaker can be
switched on
U 0.35 Ue - circuit breaker must trip
< 3 VA
<3W
U 0.85 Ue - circuit breaker can be
switched on
U 0.35 Ue - circuit breaker must trip
Type
Ue
Rated frequency
fn
AC
DC
Characteristic 1)
20 ms
(connected release)
0.5 1 mm2
0.5 1 mm2
IP20
IP20
10
10

SV -BHD-X...
SP-BHD-X...
Early switch
Ue
Rated frequency
fn
50/60 Hz
Ie /Ue
1 A/250 V a.c.
10, 01
0.5 1 mm2
(connected switch)
IP20
250 V a.c.
1)
- tripping of the undervoltage release can be delayed using the delay unit BZ-BX-X230-A, for more detailed information see page P
2)
- cannot be used in combination with MP-BD-X.... motor drive
Type designation according

to rated operating voltage
Number and type of contacts by arrangement of contacts

Arrangement of contacts Number of contacts
Contact types
Ue
Type
01
break
24, 40, 48 V a.c.
SP-BHD-X024
10
make
110 V a.c./d.c.
SP-BHD-X110
230, 400, 500 a.c./220 V d.c.
SP-BHD-X230

Fig. 1).
Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector switching

off by undervoltage release
Main contacts
2
4
6
1
3
5
20
1
0
Auxiliary switch
3.4
3.4
3.3
3.3
20
1
0
Auxiliary switch
14
3.2
13
3.1
20
1
0
Relative switch
2.4
2.3
30
1
0
Relative switch
30
1
2.2
2.1
States and positions of circuit breaker/

switch-disconnector lever
0
Early switch
10.Y 1
10.Y 3
Early switch
Switched on
20
1 5
10.Y2
10.Y4
10.Y 1
10.Y 3
10
10.Y2
10.Y4
States of circuit breaker/ Lever position of circuit

switch-disconnector
20
10 3
50
00
10 2
50
0
1 2 3
PS-BHD-....
10
50
10
20 ms
Loading time
t [ms ]
Switched off by releases,

TEST or by switch off
Switched off manually or
by motor drive electrically
(loaded state)
E63
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
AUXILIARY RELEASES
3P 4P
Specifications
Reaction time of the auxiliary releases
Shunt trip
SV
SP
0
1
0
>50
>50
OK
OK
OK
t (ms)
t (ms)
Cooperation of motor drive and shunt trip or undervoltage release

It is necessary to keep time delay when the control of the circuit breaker is
done by motor drive and shunt trip or undervoltage release. The following
time delays have to be kept between the disconnection of voltage from the
shunt trip or bringing the voltage to the undervoltage release and the control
Shunt trip
HK
HK
1
0
50
SV
50
SP
SP
1
0
>50
>50
20 700
1
0
20 700
IMP ON
IMP ON
t (ms)
t (ms)

States of circuit
Switched on
Switched off by releases, TEST or by
switch off button on the motor drive
E64

Symbol
Description
HK
main contacts
OK
IMP ON
SV
SP
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
HAND DRIVES
3P 4P
Description
The hand drive enables to the circuit breaker/switchdisconnector by turning the lever, e.g. to switch machines
mounting on the switching unit (also additionally) after the
your choice, see page E11.
a) from the front panel (Fig.1)

Hand drive unit RP-BD-CK..
+ Hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP..
b) through the switchboard door (Fig.2)
Hand drive unit RP-BD-CK..
+ Extension shaft RP-BHD-CH.
+ Hand drive bearing PR-BHD-CN..
+ Hand drive lever + RP-BHD-CP..
Fig. 1 - DIMENSIONS see page E29
The hand drive unit is fixed directly to switching unit of the

circuit breaker.
The hand drive bearing is fixed to the switchboard door and
it provides degree of protection IP40 or IP66.
hand drive bearing.
(length 365 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic
(adjustable length 245 410 mm).

The hand drive unit and hand drive lever are also supplied
with the possibility to lock the circuit breaker in position
switched off manually.
The unit and lever of the hand drive can be locked using
three padlocks with shank diameter max. 6 mm.
Each hand drive bearing prevents the door from opening
when the circuit breaker is switched on or in a state of being
switched off by releases and in the circuit breaker stateswitched
off manually and when the hand drive lever is locked up.
switching, see page E66.
Fig. 2 - DIMENSIONS see page E29
By a screwdriver it is possible to unlock the mechanism

blocking the switchboard door opening with the circuit breaker
switched on (for bearing RP-BHDCN40 and RP-BHD-CN41).
Specifications
Colour Locking while the circuit Degree of
breaker is in OFF state protection
Locking of the switchboard door opening in the

circuit breaker state
switched on
switched off manually and Switchboard door opening with Length [mm]
locked
the circuit breaker switched on
Type
Description
RP-BD-CK10
Hand drive unit
blue
no
RP-BD-CK20
Hand drive unit
blue
yes
RP-BD-CK21
Hand drive unit
yellow
yes
RP-BD-CK30
blue
RP-BD-CK31
blue
RP-BHD-CP10
Hand drive lever
black
no
RP-BHD-CP20
Hand drive lever
black
yes
RP-BHD-CP21
Hand drive lever
red
yes
RP-BHD-CN40
Hand drive bearing
black
IP40
yes
yes
yes
RP-BHD-CN41
Hand drive bearing
yellow
IP40
yes
yes
yes
RP-BHD-CN60
Hand drive bearing
black
IP66
yes
yes
no
RP-BHD-CN61
Hand drive bearing
yellow
IP66
yes
yes
no
RP-BHD-CH10
Extension shaft
365 (can be
shortened)
RP-BHD-CH20
Extension shaft - telescopic
245 410
E65
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
3P 4P
RP-BHD-CB10 Mechanical interlocking

can be used between two BD250 circuit breakers or between
BD250 and BH630 circuit breakers. Both circuit breakers must
be equipped with a hand drive (at least one with a hand drive
unit and hand drive lever), see page E65. In order to use the
interlocking, it is absolutely necessary to comply with the dimensions that are shown in the figure and given in the table.
Right switching unit
Left switching unit
BD250..3..
Dimension [mm]
BD250..3..
BD250..4..
BH630..3..
BH630..4..
X
105
105
122.5
122.5
BD250..4..
L
112
112
128.5
128.5
X
140
140
157.5
157.5
BH630..3..
L
145.5
145.5
162.5
162.5
X
122.5
122.5
140
140
BH630..4..
L
128.5
128.5
145.5
145.5
X
181
181
185
185
L
185.5
185.5
189
189
RP-BHD-CD10 Mechanical parallel switching

Enables simultaneous switching of two circuit breakers/
switch-disconnectors. Parallel switching can be used
between two BD250 circuit breakers or between BD250
and BH630 circuit breakers. Both circuit breakers must be
equipped with a hand drive unit and at least one with a hand
drive lever, see page E65. In order to use parallel switching,
it is absolutely necessary to comply with the dimensions that
are shown in the figure and given in the table.

BD250..3..
Left switching unit
Dimension [mm]
1)
E66
BD250..3..
BD250..4..
BH630..3..
BH630..4..
Xmin
+7
105
105+7
122.5+7
122.5+7
BD250..4..
Xmax
Xmin
-7
164.5
164.5-7
164.5-7
164.5-7
Xmax
+7
122.5
122.5+7
140+7
140+7
Xmin
-7
164.5
164.5-7
164.5-7
164.5-7
- Switching unit BH630..4.. (4-pole design) can only be on the left side
BH630..4.. 1)
BH630..3..
Xmax
+7
122.5
122.5+7
140+7
140+7
-7
164.5
164.5-7
164.5-7
164.5-7
Xmin
Xmax
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
MECHANICAL INTERLOCKING
3P 4P
MB-BD-PV05
MB-BHD-PV03
breakers may be switched off simultaneously.
Mechanical interlocking MB-BD-PV05 is intended for two
BD250 circuit breakers.
Interlocking MB-BHD-PV03 is intended for one BD250
circuit breaker and one BH630.
Circuit breakers may be in fixed, plug-in and withdrawable
designs.
Type of circuit breakers
BD250
BD250
Type of mechanical interlocking MB-BD-PV05
BD250
BH630
MB-BHD-PV03
Circuit breakersplace in switchboard

Detailed information can be found in the instructions for use,
which you may download from our website www.oez.com.

During the manipulation with circuit breaker with mechanical
interlocking and motor drive, the circuit breaker may reach
the state, in which the first attempt at switching on by motor
steps may be done:
109
Rmin
=4

drive circuit according to wiring diagram, see page E73

1) Shunt trip/undervoltage release must be used to switch
off the circuit breaker. Circuit breaker switching off
cannot be made by motor drive.
2) Circuit breaker can be stored and switched on only if the
second circuit breaker is in switch-off mode. Circuit breaker
status indicator on motor drive is in O position. Between
storing and switching on the circuit breaker, it is necessary
to keep the time interval min. 100 ms. Switch S must be
disconnected.
3) In case of infringement of these principles, the first
switching on of circuit breaker is unsuccessful.
45
0 700
30
min. 80
E67
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Description
It is used for remote control of the circuit breaker (switch
DIMENSIONS see page E30
off/on).
Simple mounting on the circuit breaker after the circuit
breaker cover of cavities is removed.
Usage in industrial applications e.g. switching of stand
by units etc. or wherever the automatic operation of electric
devices is needed.
In order to speed up the circuit breakers switch off (e.g.
safety STOP button) the undervoltage release or shunt trip
can be used.
On the motor drive front panel there is a change-over
switch to select the drive modes AUTO/MANUAL:
- AUTO mode remote control. The circuit breaker
is controlled by buttons for remote switch off/on,
furthermore in this position mechanical control can be
used on the front panel of the motor drive.
- MANUAL mode manual control. Control voltage is not
needed. The circuit breaker can be switched on using
the green switch on button and switched off using
the red switch off button on the front part of the drive
cover. Electric switch on is blocked. Electric switch off is
functional. The accumulation of energy can be done by
means of hinged lever.
Possibility to indicate remotely the state of the AUTO/
MANUAL switch.
Switch S (external switch has to be bought separately)
enables the choice of automatic accumulation of energy
(circuit breaker loading).
- automatic accumulation of energy is switched on (S
switch closed): after tripping of the circuit breaker by the
overcurrent release, by auxiliary release, or by TEST push
button or by the switch off button on the motor drive,
motor drive immediately accumulates energy (circuit
breaker loading), motor drive is then ready to switch on
the circuit breaker
- automatic accumulation of energy is switched off (S

switch open): after tripping of the circuit breaker by the
overcurrent release, by auxiliary release, or by TEST push
button or by the switch off button on the motor drive, both
motor drive and circuit breaker stay in position switched
off by releases. In this position motor drive waits for the
impulse from switch S. When the impulse is brought in
the motor drive accumulates energy (turn on the circuit
breaker) and after this loading the motor drive is ready to
switch on the circuit breaker. It is not possible to switch on
the circuit breaker when motor drive is not loaded
Front panel state indicating device of the stored energy
signals the state of motor drive storage devices. The state
can be signalled from a distance.
The drive may be furnished with an electromechanical
counter of cycles.
- internal design on the motor drive cover
- external design OD-BHD-PP01 for mounting on the
switchboards door or inside the switchboard by means
of metal holder, that is part of the delivery
Motor drive can be sealed by means of bolt sealing insert
(OD-BD-VP01).
Drive can be locked in off position by up to three padlocks
(shank diameter max. 4.3 mm).
Switch on button can be covered and sealed (ODBHDKT01).
Drive is connected by multi-pole connector with cavities
( in order to connect cables special tongs have to be used).
Drive can be furnished with cable (OD-BHD-KA02), that
has on one side connector to the motor drive and on the
other side free terminals for connection to etc. switchboards
terminal block.
Specifications
Type
Cover of switch on button OD-BHD-KT01
MP-BD-X, MP-BD-X-P
Operating voltage
Ue
Rated frequency
fn
Control impulse length for switching on

for switching off
< 50 ms
800 ms
3 cycles/min
Protection
of the change-over switch AUTO / MANUAL
Type
Conductor lengths
1)
- for sequence of control impulses, see page E71
E68
10 cycles
Input power
50 / 60 Hz
400 ms 1)
20 ms 700 ms 1)
400 ms 1)
Control impulse length for storage
Connecting cable OD-BHD-KA02
24, 48, 110, 230 V a.c.

24, 48, 110, 220 V d.c.
30 000 cycles
AC
DC
24, 48, 110 V a.c.; 230 V a.c.
24, 48, 110 V d.c.; 220 V d.c.
Ie / Ue
100 VA
100 W
LPN-4C-1; LPN-2C-1
5 A/250 V a.c.
0.5 A/250 V d.c.
OD-BHD-KA02
12
0.35 mm2
0.6 m
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Specifications
Circuit breaker switching on by motor drive - electrically by ON push button
Circuit breaker switching off by motor drive - electrically by OFF push button
Main contacts
Main contacts
50
2
4
6
1
3
5
0
Auxiliary switch
Auxiliary switch
50
3.4
3.4
3.3
3.3
Auxiliary switch
13
3.1
Auxiliary switch
40
14
3.2
13
3.1
Relative switch
Relative switch
1
1
2.4
2.3
2.4
2.3
Relative switch
Relative switch
1
2.2
2.1
1
2.2
2.1
Early switch
Early switch
20
10.Y2
10.Y4
10.Y 1
10.Y 3
10.Y2
10.Y4
10.Y 1
10.Y 3
20
1
0
10
50
1 5
0
Early switch
900
1
0
1 5
10.Y 1
10.Y 3
Early switch
10
10.Y2
10.Y4
10 3
50
00
10.Y 1
10.Y 3
900
10 2
50
0
10.Y2
10.Y4
800
t [ms ]
14
3.2
800
10
3.3
3.3
10 3
50
00
3.4
3.4
800
10 2
50
0
1
3
5
10
50
2
4
6
t [ms ]
Diagram
Circuit breaker switching on and off by motor drive - electrically by ON and OFF push button

States of circuit
Ovldac
obvod
motorovho
pohonu
Control
circuit
of motor drive

Q3
L+
Switched on
ON

S
OF F

Motorov
pohon
Motor drive
Diagram description
9
X3
NC
NO
S5
C
Symbol
Description
MP
motor drive MP-BD-X...
motor
storage device
X3
X4
S5*)
YC
external counter of cycles OD-BHD-PP01
recommended wiring of the control circuits

(not included in motor drive order)
ON
switch on button
OFF
switch off button
switch for energy storage

(switched on = automatic storage, may be continuously switched on)
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker - see page E68
MP
X3
X4
PE
N-
Po.counter
cykl
Cycle
*) For custom production it is possible to make the design with signalling of storage device state
E69
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Specifications
Switching off of the circuit breaker with motor drive by overcurrent release
(switch S in switched on state-automatic storage)
Switching off of the circuit breaker with motor drive by shunt trip or
undervoltage release (switch S in switched on state-automatic storage)
Main contacts
2
4
6
1
3
5
Main contacts
20
2
4
6
1
3
5
20
1
0
Auxiliary switch
3.4
3.4
3.3
3.3
Auxiliary switch
20
3.4
3.4
3.3
3.3
20
1
0
Auxiliary switch
14
3.2
13
3.1
Auxiliary switch
20
14
3.2
13
3.1
20
1
0
Relative switch
1
2.4
2.3
Relative switch
520
30
30
1
2.4
2.3
Relative switch
2.1
Relative switch
30
1
2.2
520
520
30
1
2.2
2.1
520
Signal switch
30
1
1.2
1.1
520
0
Signal switch
30
520
t [ms ]
10
10 3
50
00
10 2
50
0
1 5
10
10
50
1 5
10 3
50
00
10
50
1.3
10 2
50
0
1.4
t [ms ]
Diagram
Circuit breaker switching on by motor drive (electrically by ON push button)
and tripping by shunt trip

and tripping by undervoltage release
Ovldac
Control
circuit ofobvod
motor drive
Ovldac
Control
circuit ofobvod
motor drive
Q3
Q3
L+
L+
ON
ON
S
OF F
OF F
SP-BHD-X...
NO
S5
C
X3
or
NC
NO
S5
C
or
2
X4
2
X4
X3
cavity No.10
dutina
.10
N-
PE
Po.counter
cykl
Cycle
E70
cavity No.10
dutina
.10
N-
PE
N-
N-
B2
B2
8
X3
A2
MP
A2
MP
B1
B1
SV -BHD-X...
NC
SP-BHD-X...
SV -BHD-X...
X3
A1
Motorov
Motor drivepohon
A1
Motorov
Motor drivepohon
Po.counter
cykl
Cycle
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Specifications
Circuit breaker switching off by overcurrent or auxiliary release and switching
on by motor drive - S switch permanently closed (automatic storage)
Circuit breaker switching on and off by motor drive

- S switch permanently closed (automatic storage) or open
800
HK
50
50
HK
800
PS
520
> 600
RS
>100
> 1400
> 1400
20 1500
IMP ON
400
IMP OFF
Circuit breaker switching off by overcurrent or auxiliary release and

switching on by motor drive - S switch closed only for storing up
20 700
IMP ON
1
0
t [ms ]
R OFF
t [ms ]
Symbol
Description
HK
main contacts
PS
auxiliary switch
RS
relative switch
R OFF
circuit breaker closing instant by release
IMP S
impulse to store up motor drive energy (generated by S switch)
IMP ON
make impulse for the motor drive
IMP OFF
break impulse for the motor drive
random segment of time
50
X+520
RS
> 880
HK
1
0
> 880
1
0
X
> 1400
400
IMP S
1
0
R OFF
>100
20 700
IMP ON
t [ms ]

States of circuit
Lever position of circuit breaker/

switch-disconnector
Switched on
E71
Modeion
BD250N, BD250S
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Diagram
Recommended wiring diagram of connecting the circuit breaker
control circuits in withdrawable/plug-in design with motor drive
- connecting with control relays
- operating voltage Ue 24 V a.c./d.c., 48 V a.c./d.c., 110 230 V a.c., 110 V d.c.
Switching off by motor drive
Q3
L+
S
OFF
A1
K1
OD-BHD-R...
NO
NC
S5
C
MP
X3
X4
1
YC
PE
E72
N-
A2
K2
3.PS-BHD-1000
1.PS-BHD-0100
X3
ON
3.3
1.1
3.4
1.2
Diagram description
Symbol
Description
MP
motor drive - Ue of drive must be the same as Ue of control relay
M
motor
P
storage device
X3
X4
S5
switch to indicate AUTO (NO-C) MANUAL (NC-C) modes
YC
OFF
switch off button
S
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker for 24 V a.c. LPN-4C-1
for 48 Va.c. LPN-4C-1
for 24 Vd.c. LPN-DC-4C-1
OD-BHD-R
control relay for 24 V a.c./d.c. OD-BHD-RX01
for 48 V a.c./d.c. OD-BHD-RX02
for 110230 V a.c. OD-BHD-RA03
for 110 V d.c. OD-BHD-RD04
3.PS-BHD-1000 auxiliary switch
1.PS-BHD-0100 signal switch
BD250N, BD250S
MOTOR DRIVES
Modeion
3P 4P
Diagram
Recommended wiring diagram of connecting the circuit breakers control circuits
with mechanical interlocking and motor drive (valid for all circuit breakers)
Switching off is possible only by undervoltage release or shunt trip
Q3
L+
OFF
A1
K1
A1
SP-BHD-X...
B1
SV-BHD-X...
OD-BHD-R...
NO
NC
A2
23.PS-BHD-1000
X3
13.PS-BHD-1000
ON
1.PS-BHD-0100
OFF
3.3
1.1
3.3
3.4
1.2
3.4
K2
S5
A2
B2
MP
X3
X4
1
YC
PE
N-
Diagram description
Symbol
Description
MP
M
motor
P
storage device
X3
X4
S5
YC
OFF
switch off button
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker for 24 Va.c. LPN-4C-1
OD-BHD-R
13.PS-BHD-1000 switch inserted in cavity 3 (first circuit breaker)
- auxiliary switch
23.PS-BHD-1000 switch inserted in cavity 3 (second circuit breaker)
- auxiliary switch
SP-BHD-X...
undervoltage release - Ue of release must be the same as Ue of control relay
SV-BHD-X...
shunt trip - Ue of release must be the same as Ue of control relay
E73
Modeion
NOTES
E74
BD250N, BD250S
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
Switching units, plug-in device, withdrawable device .......................................................................................F4
Overcurrent releases, switch-disconnector unit ......................................................................................................F6
Connecting sets...........................................................................................................................................................................F7
Mounting sets .............................................................................................................................................................................F9
Switches ........................................................................................................................................................................................F10
Shunt trips ...................................................................................................................................................................................F10
Undervoltage releases .........................................................................................................................................................F10
Delay unit .....................................................................................................................................................................................F10
Hand drives .................................................................................................................................................................................F11
Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching ...................................................................................................F12
Motor drives ...............................................................................................................................................................................F12
Control relay ...............................................................................................................................................................................F12
Accessories ..................................................................................................................................................................................F13
- specifications.......................................................................................................................................F15
- diagram...............................................................................................................................................F16
- connecting, mounting .........................................................................................................................F18
- deionization spaces .............................................................................................................................F22
- dimensions ..........................................................................................................................................F24
Plug-in device
- description, specifications, diagram.....................................................................................................F48
Withdrawable device - description, specifications, diagram.....................................................................................................F50

L001 - lines
- description, specifications, tripping characteristics ...........................................................................F52
DTV3 - distribution
MTV8 - motor
MTV9 - motor with adjustable timing selectivity

4D01 - distribution with N-pole protection

Connecting sets
Switches
- specifications, diagram........................................................................................................................F59
Shunt trips
Hand drives
- description, specifications ...................................................................................................................F63

- description, specifications, dimensions ...............................................................................................F64
Motor drives
F2
- description, specifications, diagram ....................................................................................................F66
3P 4P
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S

CONNECTING SETS
Clamp terminals
CS-BH-T011
3P 4P
Block terminals
Block terminals
Block terminals
CS-BH-B011, CS-BH-B012
HAND DRIVES
RP-BH-CK..
RP-BHD-CP..
CS-BH-B021, CS-BH-B022
CS-BH-B031
CS-BH-B014
Potential terminals
Potential terminals
Front connection
CS-BH-A021
CS-BH-A011
CS-BH-PS01
SWITCHING UNIT
PLUG-IN DEVICE
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
BH630SE305
BH630NE305
ZO-BH-0630-300
ZV-BH-0630-300
RP-BHD-CH..
RP-BHD-CN..

RP-BHD-CD10
RP-BHD-CB10
Mechanical blocking with Bowden cable
MB-BH-PV04
MB-BHD-PV03
MOTOR DRIVES
MP-BH-X
OD-BHD-KA02
SWITCHES PS-BHD-
Simple
OD-BHD-PP01
SHUNT TRIP
Double
Make-and-break
SV-BHD-X
Early
ACCESSORIES TO
ZO... AND ZV...
Connecting cable
OD-BHD-KA01
SP-BHD-X
SE-BH-....-L001
SE-BH-....-DTV3
SE-BH-0630-V001
SO-BHD-0010
SE-BH-....-MTV8
ACCESSORIES
SE-BH-....-MTV9
SE-BH-0630-4D01
Insulating barriers
Sealing insert
Additional cover
for overcurrent release
Terminal cover
Lever with locking
OD-BH-UP01
OD-BH-VP01
OD-BH-VP02
OD-BH-KS03
OD-BHD-KS02
Keying set
OD-BH-KK01
F3
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
SWITCHING UNITS
3P
Product code
Iu [A]
Icu [kA]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
BH630NE305
Type
14412
630
36
5.3
BH630SE305
14413
630
65
5.3
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page F15

- the method of power circuit connection must observe recommendations, see page F18 as well as deionization space, see page F22
must be fitted with
1)
- 2 CS-BH-A011 connecting sets - for connecting busbars or cable lugs 1)

- insulating barriers OD-BHD-KS02
- mounting bolts set OD-BH-MS01 (4 x M5x25)
- conductor holder OD-BH-DV01
- overcurrent release SE-BH-....-.... (circuit breaker) or switchdisconnector unit SE-BH-0630-V001 (switch-disconnector)
- for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BH-... connecting sets, see page F7
PLUG-IN DEVICE
3P
Type
Product code
ZO-BH-0630-300
14556
Name
Plug-in device
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
2.61
must be fitted with

- mounting bolts set OD-BH-MS02 (4 x M5x30) for affixing switching
- switching unit BH630..305
- for connecting plug-in device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets CS-BH-A011 can be used that are included with
the BH630..305 switching unit- for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BH-... connecting sets, see page F7
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
3P
Type
Product code
ZV-BH-0630-300
14553
Name
Withdrawable device
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
3.664
must be fitted with

- switching unit BH630..305
- for connecting withdrawable device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets CS-BH-A011 can be used that are included with
the BH630..305 switching unit- for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BH-... connecting sets, see page 60
F4
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
SWITCHING UNITS
4P
Product code
Iu [A]
Icu [kA]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
BH630NE405
Type
19583
630
36
6.65
BH630SE405
19585
630
65
6.65
BH630NE406
19584
630
36
BH630SE406
19586
630
65

- the method of power circuit connection must observe recommendations, see page F18 as well as deionization space, see page F22
must be fitted with
1)
- 2 connecting sets - for connecting busbars or cable lugs 1)

- insulating barriers
- mounting bolts set OD-BH-MS01 (4 x M4x35)
- conductor holder OD-BH-DV01
- overcurrent release SE-BH-....-.... (circuit breaker) or switchdisconnector unit SE-BH-0630-V001 (switch-disconnector)
- for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BH-... connecting sets, see page F7
PLUG-IN DEVICE
4P
Type
Product code
ZO-BH-0630-400
20649
Name
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
3.4
Plug-in device
must be fitted with

- mounting bolts set OD-BH-MS02 (4 x M4x40) - for affixing switching
- switching unit BH630..405 or BH630..406
- for connecting plug-in device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets can be used that are included with the BH630..40
switching unit... - for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BH-... connecting sets, see page F7
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
4P
Type
Product code
ZV-BH-0630-400
20650
Name
Withdrawable device
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
4.5
must be fitted with

- switching unit BH630..405 or BH630..406
- for connecting withdrawable device with busbars or cable lugs, connecting sets can be used that are included with the
BH630..40... switching unit- for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use CS-BH-... connecting sets, see page F7
F5
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
3P 4P
L001 - characteristic L - lines

without Ir setting
In [A]
Type
Product code
Description
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
250
SE-BH-0250-L001
20614
Without Ir setting
0.345
315
SE-BH-0315-L001
20615
Without Ir setting
0.345
400
SE-BH-0400-L001
20616
Without Ir setting
0.345
500
SE-BH-0500-L001
20617
Without Ir setting
0.345
630
SE-BH-0630-L001
20618
Without Ir setting
0.345

In [A]
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
250
SE-BH-0250-DTV3
Product code
25300
Description
0.345
400
SE-BH-0400-DTV3
25200
0.345
630
SE-BH-0630-DTV3
25100
0.345
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]

possibility of protection of lines and transformers
In [A]
Type
Product code
Description
250
SE-BH-0250-MTV8
25310
0.345
400
SE-BH-0400-MTV8
25210
0.345
630
SE-BH-0630-MTV8
25110
0.345
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
MTV9 - characteristic M - motor with adjustable timing selectivity

enables to set the delay of independent release to 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms
In [A]
Type
Product code
Description
250
SE-BH-0250-MTV9
19566
0.345
400
SE-BH-0400-MTV9
19567
0.345
630
SE-BH-0630-MTV9
19568
0.345
4P
4D01 - characteristic D - distribution with N-pole protection

protection of lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S networks
In [A]
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
250
SE-BH-0250-4D01
Product code
33426
Description
0.355
400
SE-BH-0400-4D01
33427
0.355
630
SE-BH-0630-4D01
33428
0.355

- intended for BH630..406 switching unit
3P 4P
Ie [A]
Type
630
SE-BH-0630-V001
F6
Product code
25120
Name
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.295
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
CONNECTING SETS
3P 4P
3 terminals
Type
CS-BH-T011

24820
Clamp terminals
S [mm2]
Weight [kg]
Package [set]1)
35240
0.433
CS-BH-B011
24761
Block terminals
150240
Cu/Al cables
0.279
CS-BH-B012
24762
Block terminals
25150
Cu/Al cables
0.302
Block terminals
2 x 150240 Cu/Al cables
- double
CS-BH-B022
15816
Block terminals
- double
- using the OD-BH-KS03 cover the degree of protection IP20 is fulfilled
0.721
0.750
0.9
0.567
0.3
0.186
0.021
CS-BH-B021
CS-BH-B031
24781
36604
Block terminals
3x 150 240
Cu/Al cables
CS-BH-A021
24780
Rear connection
CS-BH-B014
20121
Block terminals
- for 6 cables
6 x 635
Cu/Al cables
CS-BH-A011
24760
Front connection

flexibars

- included in every supply of switching units
CS-BH-PS01
13683
Potential terminals
1.5 2.5; 4 6 Cu flexible conductor
1 terminal
Type
CS-BH-T411

19589
Clamp terminal
S [mm2]
Weight [kg]
Package [set]
35240
0.148
CS-BH-B411
19593
Block terminal
150240
Cu/Al cables
0.093
CS-BH-B412
19588
Block terminal
25150
Cu/Al cables
0.101
0.24
2 x 25150
0.25
CS-BH-B421
19590
CS-BH-B422
19591
Double block
terminal
Double block
terminal
Cu/Al cables

1)
- set includes three terminals
F7
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
CONNECTING SETS
3P
1 terminal
Type
CS-BH-B431
36605
Block terminals
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
3x 150240 Cu/Al cables
0.3
6 x 635
0.1
0.189
0.005
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.47
CS-BH-B414
21169
Block terminal
- for 6 cables
Cu/Al cables
CS-BH-A421
19592
Rear connection
CS-BH-PS41
36032
Potential terminal
1.52.5/46
RETROFIT
3 terminals
Type
CS-BH-A037
24783

- front connection
flexibars
RETROFIT
24782
CS-BH-Z039
18202
RETROFIT
RETROFIT
CS-BH-A039
RETROFIT
Reduction for BA...*39-50 and J2UX50 Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs,

0.628
1
- front connection
flexibars
- for total replacement of BA *39-50 or J2UX50 circuit breaker with front connection OD-BHD-MS39 connecting set is necessary
0.954

- for total replacement of BA*39 or J2UX circuit breaker with rear connection connecting set OD-BH-MZ39 and connecting set CS-BH-A021
are necessary
CS-BH-JX75
14562
Reduction for BA...*39-75 and J2UX75 - Cu/Al busbars, cable lugs,

1.924
1
front connection, withdrawable design flexibars
- for total replacement of BA*39-75 or J2UX75T circuit breakers with front connection in withdrawable design OD-BHD-MS75 connecting set
and ZO-BH-0630-300 plug-in device or ZV-BH-0630-300 withdrawable device are necessary
CS-BH-JT75
14561
Reduction for J2UX75T - front

2.64
1
connection, withdrawable design
flexibars
- for total replacement of J2UX75T circuit breaker with front connection in withdrawable design OD-BHD-MS75 connecting set and ZOBH-0630-300 plug-in device or ZV-BH-0630-300 withdrawable device are necessary
RETROFIT
F8
Reduction for BA...*39 and J2UX

- rear connection
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
MOUNTING SETS
3P
Type
OD-BHD-MS39

24741
Reduction for BA...*39-50 and J2UX50 - front connection
Weight [kg]
Package [set]1)
0.7
RETROFIT
- DIMENSIONS see page F27

- for total replacement of BA *39-50 or J2UX50 circuit breaker with front connection 2 CS-BH-A039 connecting sets are necessary
OD-BH-MZ39
18204
Reduction for BA...*39 and J2UX - rear connection
1.195
RETROFIT
- DIMENSIONS see page F27

- for total replacement of BA*39 or J2UX circuit breaker with rear connection 2 connecting sets CS-BH-Z039 and CS-BH A021 are necessary
RETROFIT
OD-BH-MT75
0.5
- DIMENSIONS see page F33, F37

- for total replacement of J2UX75T circuit breaker with front connection in withdrawable design 2 CS-BH-JT75 connecting sets and
ZO-BH-0630-300 plug-in device or ZV-BH-0630-300 withdrawable device are necessary
OD-BHD-MS75
RETROFIT
Reduction for J2UX75T - front connection, withdrawable

design
14563
Reduction for BA...*39-75 and J2UX75 - front connection,

withdrawable design
0.446
- DIMENSIONS see page F33, F37

- for total replacement of BA...*39-75 or J2UX75 circuit breaker with front connection in withdrawable design 2 CS-BH-JT75 connecting sets
and ZO-BH-0630-300 plug-in device or ZV-BH-0630-300 withdrawable device are necessary
1)
- one set enables to replace one circuit breaker (set includes coupling elements necessary to assemble circuit breaker and mounting set)
RETROFIT
F9
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
AUXILIARY SWITCHES
3P 4P
Single make contacts
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
PS-BHD-1000

24700
60 500 V a.c./d.c.
Contacts
0.012
PS-BHD-1000-Au
24702
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.012
Single break contacts

Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
PS-BHD-0100

24701
60 500 V a.c./d.c.
Contacts
0.013
PS-BHD-0100-Au
24703
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.013
Double
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
PS-BHD-0200

13690
60 500 V a.c./d.c.
Contacts
0.026
PS-BHD-0200-Au
13693
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.026
PS-BHD-1100
13691
60 500 V a.c./d.c.
0.025
PS-BHD-1100-Au
13694
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.025
PS-BHD-2000
13689
60 500 V a.c./d.c.
0.024
PS-BHD-2000-Au
13692
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.024
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.013
Make-and-break
Type
PS-BHD-0010
Contacts
18021
60 250 V a.c./d.c.
PS-BHD-0010-Au
18022
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.013
PS-BHD-0020
35 893
60 250 V a.c./d.c.
0.026
PS-BHD-0020-Au
37467
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.026
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.045
Early
Type
SP-BHD-0002
16169
Contacts
Early switch
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION for all switch, see page F59
SHUNT TRIPS
3P 4P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
SV-BHD-X024

24650
24, 40, 48 V a.c./d.c.
0.14
SV-BHD-X110
24630
110 V a.c./d.c.
0.14
SV-BHD-X230
24620
230, 400, 500 V a.c./220 V d.c.
0.14
3P 4P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
SP-BHD-X024

24450
24, 40, 48 V a.c./d.c.
0.11
SP-BHD-X110
24430
110 V a.c./d.c.
0.11
SP-BHD-X230
24420
230, 400, 500 V a.c./220 V d.c.
0.11
SP-BHD-X024-00011)
24550
24, 40, 48 V a.c./d.c.
- with early contact
0.12
SP-BHD-X110-00011)
24530
110 V a.c./d.c.
- with early contact
0.12
1)
24520
230, 400, 500 V a.c./220 V d.c. - with early contact
0.12
SP-BHD-X230-0001
Description

1)
- cannot be used in combination with MP-BH-X... motor drive
DELAY UNIT
Type
BZ-BX-X230-A
Product code
36696
Description
- enables to delay the undervoltage release tripping
of circuit breakers Modeion
F10
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.12
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
HAND DRIVES
3P 4P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
RP-BH-CK10
13653
Hand drive unit
- without locking
0.223
RP-BH-CK20
13654
Hand drive unit
- with locking
0.223

Hand drive unit must be fitted with: for control on the switching unit - black hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP10 or RP-BHD-CP20
RP-BH-CK21
13685
Hand drive unit - yellow label
- with locking
0.223

Hand drive unit must be fitted with: for control on the switching unit - red hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP21
RP-BH-CK30
37252
Hand drive unit for right side control
0.512
RP-BH-CK31
37253
Hand drive unit for left side control
0.512
RP-BHD-CP10
13655
- without locking
0.075
RP-BHD-CP20
13656
- with locking
0.075
- with locking
0.075
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.14
RP-BHD-CP21
13657
Hand drive lever - red
RP-BHD-CN40
37246
Hand drive bearing - degree of protection IP40

RP-BHD-CN41
37247
Hand drive bearing - yellow label - degree of protection IP40

RP-BHD-CN60
37248

RP-BHD-CN61
37249
Hand drive bearing - yellow label - degree of protection IP66

F11
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
HAND DRIVES
3P 4P
Type
RP-BHD-CH10
13658
Extension shaft - length 365 mm, can be shortened
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.205
0.255
RP-BHD-CH20
13659
Extension shaft - telescopic, length 245 410 mm

Type
3P 4P
Product code Name
RP-BHD-CB10
18290
Mechanical interlocking - for fixed design
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.16
0.23
0.448
0.448

- mechanical interlocking must be fitted with: 2 hand drive units RP-BH-CK..
2 hand drive levers RP-BHD-CP..
RP-BHD-CD10
18289
Mechanical parallel switching - for fixed design

- mechanical parallel switching must be fitted with: 2 hand drive units RP-BH-CK..
hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP..
MB-BH-PV04
19611
Mechanical blocking with Bowden cable - for two circuit

breakers BH630
MB-BHD-PV03
19613
Mechanical blocking with Bowden cable - for one BD250 and
one BH630 circuit breaker
- mechanical blocking with Bowden cable is intended for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable design
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
MP-BH-X0241)

20590
Motor drive
24 V a.c./d.c.
Operating voltage
1.691
MP-BH-X0481)
19792
Motor drive
48 V a.c./d.c.
1.691
MP-BH-X110
13539
Motor drive
110 V a.c./d.c.
1.691
MP-BH-X230
13536
Motor drive
230 V a.c./220 V d.c.
1.691
MP-BH-X024-P1)
20591
Motor drive
24 V a.c./d.c.
1.708
MP-BH-X048-P1)
19793
Motor drive - with counter of cycles
48 V a.c./d.c.
1.708
MP-BH-X110-P
13687
110 V a.c./d.c.
1.708
230 V a.c./220 V d.c.
1.708
0.08
0.1
MP-BH-X230-P
13540
- motor drive cannot be used in combination with SP-BHD-X...-0001
1)
- custom production
OD-BHD-PP01
13688
Counter of cycles - cable length 1.1 m
- DIMENSIONS, see page F66

OD-BHD-KA02
13809
Extension cable - to motor drive, 12 wires, length 0.6 m

CONTROL RELAY
Type
Product code Specifications
Package [pc]
1
OD-BHD-RX01
37425
24 V a.c./d.c.
0.06
OD-BHD-RX02
37426
48 V a.c./d.c.
0.06
OD-BHD-RA03
37427
110 230 V a.c.
0.06
OD-BHD-RD04
37428
110 V d.c.
0.06
F12
Weight [kg]
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
ACCESSORIES
3P 4P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
OD-BHD-KS02

24740
0.077
OD-BHD-KS42
19575
0.039
- included with each switching unit order

- in case circuit breaker/switch-disconnector connection is reversed (supply to terminals 2, 4, 6) it is necessary in most cases to install these
barriers also on the lower side
- for more detailed information see page F22
OD-BH-KS03
13531
0.144
OD-BH-KS43
19587
0.209
- increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20 when using CS-BH-B012, B021, B022 and B014 block type terminals
- intended for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable design
OD-BH-UP01
13532
Lever with locking
0.013
0.001
0.1
- enables to lock the circuit breaker inswitched off manually position (loaded)
OD-BH-VP01
- enables sealing for:
OD-BH-VP02
15330
Bolt sealing insert
- cover of cavities
- terminal cover
- hand drive unit
- motor drive
18216
- enables to seal set overcurrent releases e.g. circuit breakers in the main meter switchboard
OD-BHD-KA01
14555
Connecting cable - to connect the circuit breaker/switchdisconnector accessories in the plug-in/withdrawable

design - 15 wires (it is possible for plug-in design and
fixed design)
0.12
SO-BHD-0010
14560
Signalling of position - signals circuit breaker position

in the plug-in or withdrawable device
0.018
0.005
0.002
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page F48, F50
OD-BH-KK01
14554
Keying set - prevents inserting in the plug-in or

withdrawable device of another switching unit
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page F48, F50
OD-BHD-KT01
14642

be sealed
F13
Modeion
NOTES
F14
BH630N, BH630S
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P 4P
Specifications
Type
Standards
CIRCUIT BREAKER
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR
BH630N, BH630S
140/185 x 275 x 105 + 49 mm
5.4/7.4 kg
EN 60 947-2
IEC 947-2
140/185 x 275 x 105 + 49 mm

5.4 kg
EN 60 947-3
IEC 947-3
3, 4
250, 315, 400, 500, 630 A
630 A
max. 690 V a.c.
-
3, 4
630 A
630 A
max. 690 V a.c.
max. 440 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
8 kV
690 V
A
8 kA/50 ms, 7 kA/300 ms,
6.5 kA/1 s
NORMAL SUPERIOR
Ue
BH630N BH630S
60 kA 100 kA 230 V a.c.
36 kA
65 kA 415 V a.c.
20 kA
35 kA 500 V a.c.
15 kA
20 kA 690 V a.c.
40 kA
75 kA 230 V a.c.
18 kA
36 kA 415 V a.c.
10 kA
20 kA 500 V a.c.
8 kA
15 kA 690 V a.c.
75 kA 140 kA 415 V a.c.
20 ms
75W/85W
20 000 cycles
5 000 cycles
120 cycles/hr
110 N
IP40
IP20
50/60 Hz
8 kV
690 V
AC-23B
DC-23B
7.5 kA/5 s
Approval marks
Number of poles
Rated current
Circuit breaker
Rated frequency
at Ue = 690 V a.c.
Series
Switch-disconnector
Dimensions
Installation positions - fixed, plug-in and withdrawable design
Load
In
Iu
Ie
Ue
fn
Uimp
Ui
690 V a.c.
690 V a.c.
440 V d.c.
Icw / t

Icu

Ics
14 kA/ 415 V a.c.

Icm / Ue
14 kA/ 440 V d.c.
(peak value)
75W/85W
20 000 cycles
5 000 cycles
Switching frequency
120 cycles/hr
Control force
110 N
IP40
IP20
40 C
40 C
-40 +55 C
-40 +55 C
Working environment
Climatic resistance
EN 60068
EN 60068
Pollution degree
3
3
Max. sea level
2000 m
2000 m
Seismic resistance
3g ( 8 50 ) Hz
3g ( 8 50 ) Hz
z/z
z/z
Plug-in design 3P/4P
z/z
z/z
Withdrawable design 3P/4P
z/z
z/z
Accessories
z/z/z/z
z/z/z/z
z
z
Shunt trip
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z
z
Lever with locking
Bolt sealing insert / additional cover for overcurrent release
z/z
z/z
z available, unavailable, + being prepared
1)
F15
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
3P
Diagram
Ovldac
obvod
motorovho
pohonu
Control
circuit
of motor drive
Q3
L+
ON
Odnmateln
/ Vsuvn device
zazen
1
3
1
2 4
S
OF F
B
ZV -BH
Motorov
pohon
Motor drive
B1
10 .Y 1
Hlavn
Mainobvod
circuit
10 .Y 3
10 .Y 1
10 9
12
A1
Pomocn
spout
/ Pedstihov
spna
Auxiliary
releases
/ Early switch
A1
X3
ZO-BH
SO 1
SE-BH
NO
S6
S5
or
SP-BHD-0002
SV -BHD-X...
NC
SP-BHD-X...
NO
NC
SP-BHD-X...-0001
or
or
B
T1
TEST
T2
T3
10 .Y 4
10 .Y 2
10 .Y 2
2
X4
A2
B2
11
X3
A2
MP
cavity
dutinaNo.10
.10
PE
N-
SO 2
ZO-BH
SO 3
ZV -BH
4 2
1
Po.counter
cykl
Cycle
4 2
Odnmateln
/ Vsuvn zazen
device
Diagram description (3P and 4P design)

MP
M
P
X3
X4
S5
motor drive - MP-BH-X...

motor
storage device
switch to indicate AUTO (NO-C) / MANUAL
(NC-C) modes
S6
switch to indicate full storage (ready to
switch on: NO-C)
YC
external counter of cycles - OD-BHD-PP01
B
- it is not a part of motor drive
ON
switch on button
OFF
switch off button
S
switch for energy storage (switched on =
automatic storage, switch may be
continuously switched on)
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker - see page F67
J
switching unit - BH630..
Q
main contacts
1)
T1, T2, T3, T4 current transformers
V
trip-free mechanism
SE-BH
circuit breaker - overcurrent release
- SE-BH-....-....
switch-disconnector - switch-disconnector
unit - SE-BH-0630-V001
TEST
ZO-BH
plug-in device - ZO-BH-0630-....
ZV-BH
withdrawable device - ZV-BH-0630-....
X1, X2
connecting cable - OD-BHD-KA01
SO1, SO2, SO3 contacts signalling circuit breaker/
switch-disconnector position in plug-in or
withdrawable device SO-BHD-0010 - for
more detailed information see page F48, F50
SP-BHD-X...
SV-BHD-X...
shunt trip
SP-BHD-X...-0001 undervoltage release with early contact
SP-BHD-0002 early contact
Propojovaccable
kabel
Connecting
10
11
12
13
14
15
X2
2.2
2.4
3.2
3.4
3. 1
2. 1
3. 3
2. 1
3. 3
2. 3
5. 2
pomocn
auxiliary
5. 4
5. 1
4. 4
pomocn
auxiliary
5. 3
4. 2
4. 1
3. 4
4. 3
3. 1
3. 2
3. 3
2. 1
Spnae
Switches
pomocn
auxiliary
pomocn
auxiliary
2. 2
2. 4
2. 3
1. 4
relativn
relative
1. 2
1. 3
1. 1
nvstn
signal
PS-BHD-0010
or
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
or
cavity
dutinaNo.1
.1
cavity
dutinaNo.2
.2
cavity
dutinaNo.3
.3
cavity
dutinaNo.4
.4
cavity
dutinaNo.5
.5
PS-BHD-0020
3.1
or
2.1
3. 2
PS-BHD-0200
or
2. 2
3. 4
PS-BHD-1100
or
2. 2
3. 4
PS-BHD-2000
PS-BHD-0010
2. 4
PS-BHD-0100
or
5. 1
or
5. 2
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
4. 1
or
5. 4
PS-BHD-0100
or
4. 2
4. 4
PS-BHD-1000
PS - BH D--0 010
or
3. 1
or
3. 2
3. 4
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
or
2. 1
PS-BHD-0100
or
2. 2
2. 4
1. 1
1. 2
1. 4
PS-BHD-1000
cavity
No.2
dutina
. 2 ++ 33
X1
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Propojovac cable
kabel
Connecting
1)
F16
- only for 4-pole design of BH630..406 switching unit
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
4P
Diagram
Ovldac
obvod
motorovho
pohonu
Control
circuit
of motor drive
Q3
L+
ON
2 4
Odnmateln
/ Vsuvn zazendevice
N
1
1
OF F
B
10 .Y 1
A1
Hlavn
Mainobvod
circuit
10 .Y 3
10 .Y 1
B1
A1
Pomocn
spout
/ Pedstihov
spna
Auxiliary
releases
/ Early switch
10 9
12
ZV -BH
Motorov
pohon
Motor drive
X3
ZO-BH
SO 1
SE-BH
NO
S6
S5
or
SP-BHD-0002
SV -BHD-X...
NC
SP-BHD-X...
NO
NC
SP-BHD-X...-0001
or
or
B
T1
TEST
T2
T3
MP
10 .Y 4
10 .Y 2
X4
X3
10 .Y 2
A2
B2
A2
T4
6
11
1)
cavity
No.10
dutina
.10
PE
N-
SO 2
ZO-BH
SO 3
ZV -BH
4 2
4 2
Odnmateln
/ Vsuvn zazendevice
Po.counter
cykl
Cycle
Propojovac
Connectingkabel
cable
10
11
12
13
14
15
X2
9. 4
9. 1
9. 3
9. 2
pomocn
auxiliary
8. 4
8. 1
8. 3
8. 2
pomocn
auxiliary
7. 4
7. 1
7. 3
7. 2
pomocn
auxiliary
6. 2
6. 4
6. 3
6. 1
pomocn
auxiliary
2.2
2.4
3.2
3.4
3. 1
2. 1
3. 3
3. 3
2. 3
5. 4
5. 1
5. 3
5. 2
4. 2
2. 1
Spnae
Switches
pomocn
auxiliary
pomocn
auxiliary
4. 4
4. 3
4. 1
pomocn
auxiliary
3. 4
3. 1
3. 2
3. 3
2. 1
pomocn
auxiliary
2. 2
2. 4
2. 3
1. 4
relativn
relative
1. 2
1. 3
1. 1
nvstn
signal
PS-BHD-0010
or
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
or
cavity
dutinaNo.1
.1
cavity
dutinaNo.2
. 2
cavity No.3
dutina
. 3
cavity
dutinaNo.5
.5
cavity No.2
dutina
. 2 ++ 33
cavity
dutinaNo.6
.6
cavity
dutinaNo.7
.7
cavity No.8
dutina
.8
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0100
or
9. 1
or
9. 2
PS-BHD-1000
9. 4
PS-BHD-0010
or
8. 1
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
or
8. 2
PS-BHD-0010
8. 4
PS-BHD-0100
or
7. 1
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
or
7. 2
6. 1
or
7. 4
PS-BHD-0100
or
6. 2
PS-BHD-1000
6. 4
PS-BHD-0020
3.1
2.1
2. 2
PS-BHD-0200
or
3. 2
2. 2
PS-BHD-1100
or
3. 4
3. 4
2. 4
PS-BHD-2000
PS-BHD-0010
or
5. 1
PS-BHD-0100
or
5. 2
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
cavity
dutinaNo.4
.4
5. 4
PS-BHD-0100
or
4. 1
or
4. 2
4. 4
PS-BHD-1000
PS - BH D--0010
or
3. 1
PS-BHD-0100
or
3. 2
3. 4
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
or
2. 1
PS-BHD-0100
or
2. 2
2. 4
1. 1
1. 2
1. 4
PS-BHD-1000
cavity No.9
dutina
. 9
X1
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Propojovac
kabel
Connecting
cable
F17
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
3P 4P
Specifications

1)
PS-BHD-0010
SP-BHD-0002
SP-BHD-X...-0001
Cavities in switching unit see page F61
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0100
Switched off from switched on state: by auxiliary

release, or by TEST push button or by the switch off
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
Switched on
State
of circuit breaker
PS-BHD-0200
3, 4, 5
(6, 7, 8, 9)1)
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
2 and 3
PS-BHD-0100
2 and 3
PS-BHD-1000
2 and 3
10
PS-BHD-1100
3, 4, 5
(6, 7, 8, 9)1)
PS-BHD-2000
1
Cavity
- cavities 6, 7, 8, 9 are only for 4-pole design

Power circuit
Recommended min. cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable designs
Cables S [mm2]
In [A]
Busbars W x H [mm]
Cu
Al
Cu
Al

options, see page F7
100
35
50
20 x 2
25 x 2
125
50
70
25 x 2
25 x 3
generally, conductors from the supply are connected to

input terminals 1, 3, 5, (N) and conductors from the load to
terminals 2, 4, 6, (N); however, it is possible to reverse the
connection (exchanging input and output terminals without
limiting rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu)
160
70
95
25 x 3
32 x 3
200
95
120
25 x 4
25 x 5
250
120
150
25 x 5
32 x 5
315
150
185
32 x 5
32 x 6
in case of reversed connection, in the majority of

cases, circuit breaker/switch-disconnector must be
fitted with OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers also
on the side of terminals 2, 4, 6 for more detailed
information see page F22
400
185
240
32 x 6
32 x 8
500
2 x 120
input and output conductors/busbars must be mechanically re-
inforced to avoid transferring of electrodynamic force to the circuit

breaker/switch-disconnector during short-circuit
the method of connecting the power circuit must observe the
deionization space of the circuit breaker, see page F23
Auxiliary circuits
using flexible Cu conductors with cross-section 0.5 1 mm2 directly to terminals on these devices
motor drive and auxiliary circuits of the plug-in or withdrawable design are connected using a connector
F18
630
2 x 185
2 x 185
1)
2 x 240
32 x 8
2)
32 x 12
32 x 12
3)
32 x 16 2)
1)
connection of withdrawable and plug-in design by min 2x240 mm2 Cu
2)
withdrawable and plug-in design can not be connected by Al
3)
connection of withdrawable and plug-in design by min 32x16 Cu
Maximum circuit breaker/switch-disconnector loads in accordance with ambient temperature

Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector BH630 - connection by Cu cable 2 x 185 mm2 per pole
50 C
55 C
60 C
65 C
70 C
630 A
630 A
600 A
570 A
540 A
Mechanical reinforcement of
conductors for BH630
Ik 25 kA
Ik 65 kA
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P 4P

Type
Imax [A]
Type of cable
sector stranded
sector solid
round stranded
round solid
Busbars and cable Dimensional
lugs W x H [mm] drawing 3P/4P
CS-BH-A011
CS-BH-A411
CS-BH-A021
CS-BH-A421
CS-BH-T011
CS-BH-T411
CS-BH-B011
CS-BH-B411
CS-BH-B012
CS-BH-B412
CS-BH-B021
CS-BH-B421
CS-BH-B022
CS-BH-B422
CS-BH-B014
CS-BH-B414
CS-BH-B031
CS-BH-B431
CS-BH-A037
630
32 x ...
630
32 x ...
page F26, F39
400
35 240 Cu
35 240 Cu
35 240 Cu
35 240 Cu
400
150 240 Cu/Al
120 240 Cu/Al
150 240 Cu/Al
120 240 Cu/Al
315
25 150 Cu/Al
16 150 Cu/Al
25 150 Cu/Al
16 150 Cu/Al
630
2 x (150 240) Cu/Al
2 x (120 240) Cu/Al
2 x (150 240) Cu/Al
2 x (120 240) Cu/Al
page F24, F40
500
2 x (25 150) Cu/Al
2 x (16 150) Cu/Al
2 x (25 150) Cu/Al
2 x (16 150) Cu/Al
page F24, F38
250
6 x (6 35) Cu/Al
6 x (6 35) Cu/Al
6 x (6 35) Cu/Al
6 x (6 35) Cu/Al
page F25, F39
630
3 x (150 240) Cu/Al
3 x (120 240) Cu/Al
3 x (150 240) Cu/Al
3 x (120 240) Cu/Al
page F25, F39
400
page F26
CS-BH-A039
630
page F27
CS-BH-Z039
630
RETROFIT - reduction for BA*39 circuit breaker with rear connection
page F27
CS-BH-JX75
630
RETROFIT - reduction for BA39-75 and J2UX75 circuit breakerwith front connection in withdrawable design
page F33, F37
CS-BH-JT75
630
RETROFIT - reduction for J2UX75T circuit breaker with front connection in withdrawable design
page F33, F37
CS-BH-PS01
10/16
CS-BH-PS41
10/16

11
16
CS-BH-A011
32
32
CS-BH-A021
OD-BHD-KS02
2.
Click !
7.
3.
BH630...
6.
BH630...
3.
1.
234
3.
2.
1.
M10
4.
4.
16
5.
6.
8.
5.
20 Nm ...
20 Nm ...
7.
9.
0.8 Nm
0.8 Nm
F19
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
3P 4P

Front connection - Cu cables
Front connection - Cu/Al cables

CS-BH-B011
or
CS-BH-B012
CS-BH-T011
OD-BHD-KS0 2
OD-BHD-KS02
BH630...
7.
6.
BH630...
7.
6.
3.
4.
209
2.
Click !
2.
3.
20 Nm ...
Click !
8 mm
25
209
1.
6.
1.
8.
9.
CS-BH-B011
5.
35
25
120 150 mm 2 Al , Cu ...

25 Nm ... 8 mm
4.
185 240 mm 2 Al , Cu ...

30 Nm ... 8 mm
35 70 mm 2 Cu ...
25 Nm ... 6 mm
5.
9.
0.8 Nm
10.
0.8 Nm
CS-BH-B012
35
95 240 mm 2 Cu ....
30 Nm ... 6 mm
16 50 mm 2 A l, Cu ...
15 Nm ... 6 mm
70 150 mm 2 Al, Cu...

20 Nm ... 6 mm
Front connection - 2x Cu/Al cables
Front connection - 6x Cu/Al cables
CS-BH-B021
OD-BHD-KS02
or
OD-BHD-KS0 2
CS-BH-B022
or
or
8.
M8 1.
OD-BH-KS03
IP20
8.
CS-BH-B014
M10 1.
OD-BH-KS03
IP20
BH630...
BH630...
8.
8.
9.
9.
5.
20 Nm ...
10.
20 Nm ...
10.
5.
8
2.
2.
Click !
3.
369
326
4.
Click !
4.
7.
7.
0.8 Nm
55
30
F
8.
0.8 Nm
11
CS-BH-B021
120 150 mm 2 Al , Cu ... 25 Nm ...
185 240 mm 2 Al , Cu ... 30 Nm ...
8 mm
8 mm
CS-BH-B022
16 50 mm 2 A l, Cu ... 15 Nm ...
70 150 mm 2 Al, Cu... 20 Nm ...
F20
6 mm
6 mm
11.
8.
14.5
6.
37.5
26
6.
3.
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P 4P

Front connection - reduction BH to BA37
CS-BH-A037
CS-BH-A011
OD-BHD-KS02
OD-BHD-KS02
or OD-BH-KS03
IP20
F
2.
2.
Click !
6.
Click !
3.
7.
6.
3.
BH630...
BH630...
6.
7.
8.
1.
M10
1.
M10
4.
32
314
4.
17
50 300 mm2 Cu ( Klauke )

5.
20 Nm ...
50 240 mm2 Al ( Klauke )
13
5.
10.,5
8.
50
20 Nm ...
50
8
9.
0.8 Nm
6.
16
F
9.
32
0.8 Nm
Front connection - reduction BH to J2UX and BA39
Rear connection - reduction BH to J2UX and BA39 with rear connection

70
2.
OD-BHD-KS0 2
NOT INCLUDED IN ORDER
BH630...
15
6.
1
1
308
3.
25
Click !
7.
44
70
CS-BH-A039
20 Nm
CS-BH-A021
CS-BH-Z039
2.
1.
1.
M10
20 Nm ...
8 mm
4.
8.
25
5.
70
70
MAX. 20
20 Nm ...
BH630...
308
11
9.
15
0.8 Nm
3.
44
5.
4.
20 Nm ...
8 mm
0.8 Nm
6.
F21
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
3P 4P
Deionization spaces
FIXED DESIGN
- front connection
- terminals 1, 3, 5
(upper side)
a) if Ue 415 V a.c., it is necessary to use OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers

or OD-BHD-KS03 terminal cover
b) if insulated conductors are not used for connecting power circuit to terminals 1, 3, 5, flexibars or
rear connection, it is necessary to use OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers or OD-BHD-KS03 terminal
cover
- terminals 2, 4, 6
(lower side)
Only in case that circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected to the source using terminals 2, 4, 6
and at the same time:
a) Ue 415 V a.c., it is necessary to use OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers or OD-BHD-KS03 terminal cover
b) insulated conductors are not used for connecting power circuit to terminals 2, 4, 6, flexibars or rear
- rear connection
PLUG-IN AND WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
F22

BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P 4P
Deionization spaces
C=20
B=140
B=140
C=20
B=140

G=80
E=105
OD-BHD-KS02
A1
100 150
A2

(using OD-BHD-KS02 insulating barriers from 100 mm
to max. 150 mm, or by adding additional insulation for
the conductors with barriers to obtain at least A1 value)
A2minimum distance:
busbar
G=0
275
F=0
20
C, D, E, F, Gminimum distance between the

circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and uninsulated
earthed wall
minimum distance of circuit breakers without using
of uninsulated barriers is 50 mm
H
> 15 mm
Busbar
max.3 mm
max.3 mm
Cable
AC U
[V]
230
BH630S wired with Ik
[kA]
100
BH630N wired with Ik
[kA]
60
G [mm]
415
> 36 65
500
36
> 20 35
36
690
20
> 15 20
20
15
15
H [mm]
13
< 80
30
80
Flexibar
13
[mm]
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
A1
[mm]
150
200
100
200
150
250
150
A2
[mm]
250
300
200
300
250
350
250
[mm]
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
A1
[mm]
100
150
100
150
150
150
150
A2
[mm]
150
200
150
200
200
200
200
[mm]
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
A1
[mm]
100
150
100
150
150
150
150
200
150
200
200
200
200
A2 [mm]
150
Note: Ik - max. short-circuit current in the protected circuit (rms)
F23
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
3P
Dimensions
45
2
100
25
75,5
75.5
18
100 ... < AC 415 V
103
150 ... > AC 415 V
45
Drilling diagram
45
60
33
194
65
275
194
154
201
259
17
25
234
60
R94
134.5
134,5
40.5
40,5
45,5
45.5
47,5
47.5
105
33
140
117
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set CS-BH-B021, CS-BH-B022)

45
45
105
42
28
25
46,2
319
269
435
194
234
275
298
344
369
140
32
F24
(M
20
1
1
25
25
5x
5
x
22
22 CS-BH-B021
18
18 CS-BH-B022
45
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set CS-BH-B014)
105
60
49
38
26
45
45
34
34
46,2
297
274
251
194
435
234
262
285
275
308
326
140
11
25
8,4
8.4
8,4
8.4
8,4
8.4
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set CS-BH-B031)

105
25
32
28
28
279
325
371
449
194
45
435
234
304
350
396
421
45
22
22
22
F25
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
3P
Dimensions
Fixed design, rear connection (connecting set CS-BH-A021)
53
105
125
11,5
11.5 26
45
45
Drilling diagram
20
45
45
35
1
1
25
2.5
2,5
45
20.5
20,5
140
40,5
40.5
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set CS-BH-A037)
50
45
45
19.5
19,5
50
F26
275
194
3
1
12,5
12.5
32
234
314
45
32
140
32
31
RETROFIT
R7
4x
5)
x2
M5
(
5
275
234
194
234
275
194
65
154
60
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set CS-BH-A039, mounting set OD-BHD-MS39)
70
RETROFIT
70
45
31
25
16.5
16,5
45
275
194
56.5
56,5
1
1
15 25
1
1
32
27.5
27,5
70
4x
210
RETROFIT
25 15
11
Fixed design, rear connection (connecting set CS-BH-Z039, mounting set OD-BH-MZ39)
32
12
308
234
45
140
140
140
308
25
360
275
395
40.5
40,5
53
105
70
70
F27
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
3P
Dimensions
60
BH630...
RP-BH-CK..
51
37
RP-BHD-CP..
90
143
50
25
140

RP-BH-CK..
70
RP-BHD-CP..
BH630...
RP-BHD-CN..
143
51
70
37
RP-BHD-CH..
90
SWITCHBOARD
PANEL
PANEL ROZVDE
25
140
180 495 (CH10)
375 540 (CH20)

MIN. 100
27.5
F28
55
4x
50
55
6.5
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
140
RP-BHD-CN..
90
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
RP-BH-CK30
45
RP-BHD-CP..
143
71
RP-BHD-CH...
BH630...
30
163
50 362 (CH10)
238 427 (CH20)
140
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
RP-BHD-CN..
RP-BH-CK31
RP-BHD-CP..
70
143
RP-BHD-CH...
45
50
71
90
BH630...
163
70 382 (CH10)
258 447 (CH20)
Fixed design, motor drive MP-BH-X...
Opening dimensions in switchboard door

for external counter of cycles
275
14
m
ax
31
92
149
204
27
140
247
F29
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
3P
Dimensions
Plug-in device
Drilling diagram
25 6
45
45
18
5
6,.
44xx
179
66,.55
44xx
277
166
358
277
194
234
166
317
284
342
358
45
20
96
20
11
33
25
35
140
Plug-in device, terminal cover OD-BH-KS03

103
70
140
35
518
105
F30
40,5
40.5
40.5
40,5
96
26
45
105
47,5
47.5
45
47,5
47.5
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Plug-in design
187
140
358
105
140
157
Plug-in design, rear connection (connecting set CS-BH-A021)
Drilling diagram
105
20
125
317
317
166
67
26
53
66,.55
44xx
35
25
20.5
20,5
1
1
96
58
45
40,5
40.5
45
47,5
47.5
F31
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
3P
Dimensions
225
175

282
F32
31
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
RETROFIT
Plug-in device (connecting set CS-BH-JX75, mounting set OD-BHD-MS75)

2x
70
20
70
16
77.5
77,5
25 15
358
77.5
77,5
182
433
483
5
4x
32
160
Plug-in device (connecting set CS-BH-JT75, mounting set OD-BH-MT75)

70
20 16
70
126,5
126.5
125
25 15
2x
1
1
RETROFIT
4x
125
358
528
578
180
32
160
F33
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
3P
Dimensions
Withdrawable device
Drilling diagram
25
45
18
45
,5
6.
44xx
179
,5
6.
44xx
277
166
277
358
234
194
166
284
317
342
358
45
20
96
20
11
25
40,5
40.5
40.5
40,5
96
26
33
45
35
140
105
Withdrawable device, terminal cover OD-BH-KS03

103
70
215
35
204
140
140
518
105
214
F34
140
27.5
27,5
47,5
47.5
45
47,5
47.5
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Withdrawable design
Working position
Inspection position
217
105
187
213
30
105
140
140
358
65
124
124
140
170
140
215
Withdrawable design, rear connection (connecting set CS-BH-A021)

213
157
187
Working position
Inspection position
105
125
26
53
140
317
166
317
358
65
67
20
45
215
20,5
20.5
35
25
11
96
58
,.5
66
44xx
53
140
45
47,5
47.5
F35
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
3P
Dimensions
Working position
Inspection position
255
30
140
140
124
124
225
205
175
Working position
Inspection position
312
F36
30
124
124
140
31
140
282
31
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Withdrawable device (connecting set CS-BH-JX75, mounting set OD-BHD-MS75)
70
20 16
70
25 15
77,5
77.5
4x
124
358
77,5
77.5
182
433
483
RETROFIT
140
2x
32
160
Withdrawable device (connecting set CS-BH-JT75, mounting set OD-BH-MT75)

2x
70
RETROFIT
20 16
70
126.5
126,5
125
25 15
1
1
358
140
125
528
578
180
124
6
4x
32
160,1
160.1
F37
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
4P
Dimensions
45
103
25
75.5
18
100 ... < AC 415 V
45
150 ... > AC 415 V
45
Drilling diagram
45
33
194
65
275
194
154
201
17
234
60
25
259
60
1
1
25
40.5
45.5
4x
.5
134.5
R94
20
92.5
105
33
185
117
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set CS-BH-B021 + CS-BH-B421, CS-BH-B022 + CS-BH-B422 )
105
42
28
25
45
45
45
319
269
435
194
234
275
298
344
369
45
32
F38
22
22 CS-BH-B021
18
18 CS-BH-B022
45
47.5
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
4P
Dimensions
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set CS-BH-B014 + CS-BH-B414)
105
38
45
45
11
11
45
26
45
25
297
251
274
435
275
194
234
262
285
308
326
185
11
6x8,5
6x8.5
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set CS-BH-B031 + CS-BH-B431)

105
25
28
28
279
325
371
449
45
435
45
194
234
304
350
396
421
45
22
22
22
32
F39
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
4P
Dimensions
Fixed design, rear connection (connecting set CS-BH-A021 + CS-BH-A421)
53
Drilling diagram
170
11.5
26
105
20
45
7.5
40
45
275
234
R7
4x
6
.5
194
45
35
1
1
25
2.5
234
275
194
65
154
60
20.5
185
40.5

105
BH630...
RP-BH-CK..
51
37
RP-BHD-CP..
90
143
50
25
140

RP-BH-CK..
70
27,5
27.5
MIN. 145
RP-BHD-CP..
BH630...
RP-BHD-CN..
143
51
70
90
SWITCHBOARD
PANEL
PANEL ROZVDE
25
140
180 495 (CH10)
375 540 (CH20)
F40
55
37
SWITCHBOARD
DOOR HINGE
ZVS DVE ROZVDE
46x
50
55
66.5,
RP-BHD-CH..
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
4P
Dimensions
92
149
204
31
247
14
m
ax
Opening dimensions in switchboard door for external counter of cycles
27
F41
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
4P
Dimensions
Plug-in device
Drilling diagram
25 6
45
45
45
18
179
44xx
6
6.,5
5
.5,5
66
44xx
277
166
358
277
234
194
166
284
317
342
358
45
20
40,5
40.5
96
40,5
96
26
20
1
1
25
33
45
35
105
185
Plug-in device, terminal cover OD-BH-KS43

103
70
35
518
105
F42
47,5
47.5
45
47,5
47.5
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
4P
Dimensions
Plug-in design
187
185
358
105
140
157
Plug-in design, rear connection (connecting set CS-BH-A021 + CS-BH-A421)
Drilling diagram
53
105
170
20
45
317
166
317
40,5
40.5
35
25
1
1
96
58
.,5
6
4x
20.5
20,5
358
67
26
185
45
47,5
47.5
F43
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
4P
Dimensions
185
358
225
175
358
185
F44
282
31
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
4P
Dimensions
Withdrawable device
Drilling diagram
25
259
18
45
4x
6
.,5
45
179
45
166
358
277
234
194
166
284
317
342
358
45
20
96
40,5
40.5
96
26
20
1
1
25
33
45
47,5
47.5
35
185
105
260
Withdrawable device, terminal cover OD-BH-KS43

103
70
260
35
204
185
140
518
105
140
27,5
27.5
F45
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
4P
Dimensions
Withdrawable design
Working position
Inspection position
217
105
187
258
30
105
140
140
358
65
124
124
185
170
140
260
187
157
Drilling diagram
Withdrawable design, rear connection (connecting set CS-BH-A021 + CS-BH-A421)

258
170
53
3
105
45
26
185
166
317
358
65
67
20
F46
53
140
260
20.5
20,5
35
25
11
96
58
5.5
66,
x
44x
45
47,5
47.5
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
4P
Dimensions
Working position
Inspection position
255
258
30
225
260
140
140
358
65
124
124
185
205
175
Working position
Inspection position
312
258
282
31
30
124
140
358
65
124
31
140
185
260
F47
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
PLUG-IN DEVICE
3P 4P
Plug-in device
Circuit breaker
in plug-in design
Description
Plug-in design of the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is
intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid
exchange of the circuit breaker along with both visual and
conductive disconnection of the circuit are needed.
plug-in device includes complete accessories for assembling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in plugin design from the originally fixed design
components of the plug-in device are:
- base of the plug-in device
- 2 connecting sets - for fitting onto the switching unit
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off of the circuit breaker for handling inserting
and removal)
- set of mounting bolts - for affixing circuit breaker to
plug-in device (set of mounting bolts is used to fasten
the plug-in device into the switchboard, that is included in delivery of switching unit)

Plug-in device may be fitted with a maximum of four
switches (for 4-pole design, max. 6 switches) for signalling
the inserted/removed position.
Keying set OD-BH-KK01
Plug-in device and circuit breaker can be fitted with keying
set, which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker into
the plug-in device.
Circuit breaker accessories in plug-in design
Circuit breaker in plug-in design has the same accessories as
the fixed circuit breaker.
unambiguous remote signalling of the circuit breaker
position
option to lock plug-in device with padlocks to prevent

Circuit breaker in plug-in design has two positions:
2. removed
inserting of circuit breaker

plug-in device does not need earthing
Power circuit
- connecting set CS-BH-A011 is used for connecting with
switching unit
- for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connecting sets, see page F7
page F18
Locking plug-in device against
inserting circuit breaker
Keying set
OD-BH-KK01
Auxiliary circuits
These are connected using 15-wire connecting OD-BHD-KA01
cable.
Connecting cable
OD-BHD-KA01
States of switches SO-BHD-0010 in plug-in device

according to circuit breaker position
Cavity
11, 12, 13, 14 (19, 20)1)

1
Circuit breaker
2
4
position
Inserted
0 1
Removed
1 0
1)
Position of cavities for
switch SO-BHD-0010
in plug-in device
Type
11, 12, 13, 14
Keying set
OD-BH-KK01
SO-BHD-0010

Rated frequency
Ue
Ui
fn
Ie /Ue
Ie /Ue
Ith
Thermal current
S
AC-13
DC-15
SO-BHD-0010
400 V a.c.
250 V d.c.
500 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
3 A /400 V a.c.
0.15 A /250 V d.c., 0.3 A /125 V d.c., 4 A /30 V d.c.
6A
001
0.5 1 mm2
IP20
For wiring diagram of circuit breaker in plug-in device with accessories see page F16.
F48
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
PLUG-IN DEVICE
3P 4P
During the manipulation with circuit breaker in plug-in
steps may be done:
circuit according to wiring diagram, see page F70
Circuit breaker in plug-in design with motor drive

After every manipulation with circuit breaker in plug-in design it is necessary to accomplish the operations in following
2) press the switch on button (green) on the motor drive,
see Fig.
Changes in states of switches in cavities of switching unit at removal of the circuit breaker
State of circuit breaker befor removing
State of switches before removing - inserted position
State of switches after removing removed position
3, 4, 5, (6, 7, 8, 9)1)
3, 4, 5, (6, 7, 8, 9)1)
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
2
PS-BHD-0100
1
PS-BHD-1000
Cavity
Switched on

(loaded state)

the motor drive
Note: 0 - contact open, 1 - contact closed
1)
F49
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
3P 4P
Withdrawable device
Circuit breaker
in withdrawable design
Description
Withdrawable design of the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
is intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid
exchange of the circuit breaker, frequent checking and both
visual and conductive disconnection of the circuit are needed.
withdrawable device includes complete accessories for
assembling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in withdrawable design from the originally fixed design
components of the withdrawable device are:
- base of the withdrawable device
- 2 movable side plates
- 2 connecting sets - for fitting onto the switching unit
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching
off of the circuit breaker for handling inserting and
withdrawing)
- set of mounting bolts is used to fasten the withdrawable
device into the switchboard, that is included in delivery
of switching unit
3. removed
Keying set OD-BH-KK01
Withdrawable device and circuit breaker can be fitted with
keying set, which prevents inserting of any other circuit
breaker into the withdrawable device.
device against inserting
circuit breaker
States of switches SO-BHD-0010 in withdrawable device

Cavity
11, 12, 13, 14,

(19, 20)1)
15, 17
circuit breaker against
manipulation
Position of cavities for switch

SO-BHD-0010 in withdrawable device
16, 18

Rated frequency
16, 18
F50
Auxiliary circuits
unambiguous remote and local signalling of the circuit
breaker and arrestment positions
inspection position
locking withdrawable device against inserting of circuit
breaker, locking of circuit breaker in inserted (operating)
position, locking of circuit breaker in withdrawn (checking)
position - locking by means of padlocks
withdrawable device does not need earthing
Keying set
OD-BH-KK01
Connecting cable
OD-BHD-KA01
SO-BHD-0010
Ue
15, 17
11, 12, 13, 14
Power circuit
connecting set CS-BH-A011 is used for connecting with
switching unit
for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connecting sets, see page F7
connection must comply with our recommendations, see
page F18
Circuit breaker and

2
4
2
4
2
4
arrestment position
Inserted and not arrested
0 1
1 0
0 1
Inserted and arrested
0 1
1 0
1 0
Withdrawn and not arrested
1 0
0 1
0 1
Withdrawn and arrested
1 0
0 1
1 0
Removed and not arrested
1 0
1 0
0 1
Removed and arrested
1 0
1 0
1 0
- operating state is always in arrested position
- in arrested position it is possible to lock the withdrawable device (for
more information, seeAdvantages and enhanced safety for operator)
1)
Type
Keying set
OD-BH-KK01

Withdrawable device can be fitted with the switches for
signalling the position of the circuit breaker inserted/
withdrawn/removed.
Ui
fn
Ie /Ue
Ie /Ue
Ith
Thermal current
S
AC-13
DC-15
SO-BHD-0010
400 V a.c.
250 V d.c.
500 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
3 A/400 V a.c.
0.15 A/250 V d.c., 0.3 A/125 V d.c., 4 A/30 V d.c.
6A
001
0.5 1 mm2
IP20
For wiring diagram of circuit breaker in withdrawable device with accessories see page F16.
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
3P 4P
During the manipulation with circuit breaker in withdrawable
steps may be done:
circuit according to wiring diagram, see page F70

After every manipulation with circuit breaker in withdrawable
design it is necessary to accomplish the operations in following
2) press the switch on button (green) on the motor drive,
see Fig.
Changes in states of switches in cavities of switching unit at inserting and withdrawing of the circuit breaker
State before insertion/withdrawal
State after insertion/withdrawal
State of switches before insertion - withdrawn position
State of switches before withdrawal - inserted position
3, 4, 5, (6, 7, 8, 9)1)
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
3, 4, 5, (6, 7, 8, 9)
PS-BHD-1000
2
PS-BHD-0100
State of switches after withdrawal - withdrawn position

1)
PS-BHD-1000
Cavity
State of switches after insertion - inserted position
Switched on

(loaded state)

the motor drive
1)
F51
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
OVERCURRENT RELEASES L001 - LINES
3P 4P
Protection of lines with low starting currents
Specifications
Description
Type
- for BH630... switching unit

- nominal currents are given by type designation
- the thermal memory cannot be disabled
- short-circuit release is fixed at the setting 4 x In
L001
L
SE-BH-0...-L001
10000
Ir
5000
60
30
2000
1000
10
500
5
200
2
100
50
t [min]
20
10
5
2
I n= 250 A
I n= 315 A
I n= 400 A
I n= 500 A
I n= 630 A
Irm
I n=250 A
0. 1
0.05
I n=315 A
0. 2
I
I n=400 A
0. 5
I n=500 A
I n=630 A
t [s]
20
x In
0.02
0.01
0. 5
F52
10
50
In [A]
Irm [A]
SE-BH-0250-L001
250
1000
SE-BH-0315-L001
315
1260
SE-BH-0400-L001
400
1600
SE-BH-0500-L001
500
2000
SE-BH-0630-L001
630
2520
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P 4P
Description
Typ
DTV3
L

In [A]
Ir
Irm
SE-BH-0250-DTV3
250
SE-BH-0400-DTV3
400
SE-BH-0630-DTV3
630
SE-BH-0-DTV3
10000
min
5000
Ir
max
60
Ir
2000
30
Irm
1000
10
500
5
200
2
100
50
t [min]
20
10
In= 250 A
In= 400 A
In= 630 A
t [s]
1
0. 5
0. 2
0. 1
0.05
4x
4x
4x
4x
12.5x
12.5x
12.5x
12.5x
Irm
In= 250 A
0.02
0.01
x In
0. 1
0.05
Irm
In= 400 A
0.02
0.01
x In
0. 1
4x
4x
0.05
12.5x
12.5x
Irm
In= 630 A
0.02
Ir=575 A.630 A~Irm=7 kA
0.01
0. 1
0.2
0. 5

protected device
2 5
10
20
x In

50
Ir [A]
100
110
115
125
137
144
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
275
290
315
345
360
400
250
260
275
290
305
315
345
360
400
435
455
480
500
550
575
630
restart
Irm
T(0)
T(t)
4 x Ir
12.5 x Ir
T(0)
T(t)
4 x Ir
12.5 x Ir
T(0)
T(t)
4 x Ir
12.5 x Ir
F53
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S

3P 4P
Type
In [A]
Ir [A]
tr [s] (7,2 x Ir)
250
100
110
115
125
137
144
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
0.32
0.6
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.1
3.75
3.75
3.1
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.6
0.32
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
275
290
315
345
360
400
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
0.5
1.0
1.6
2.4
3.2
4.0
5.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
4
3.2
2.4
1.6
1
0.5
250
260
275
290
305
315
345
360
400
435
455
480
500
550
575
630
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
0.8
1.4
2
3
4
5.1
6.3
7
6.3
6.3
5.1
4
3
2
1.4
0.8
Description
- undercurrent release - in case of failure of one or two phases
in mode M the switch off delay is 4 s
- signalling of operating state and of the value of passing
current
SE-BH-0250-MTV8
MTV8
L
Ir
tr
Irm
50ms
SE-BH-0400-MTV8
400
0ms
SE-BH-0630-MTV8

protected device
Setting of the current value of the short-circuit release
Choice of characteristic type. Delay setting at 7.2 Ir .

F54
630
Irm [kA]
0 ms
50 ms
0 ms
50 ms
0 ms
50 ms
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P 4P
Tripping characteristic SE-BH-....-MTV8

Characteristic "TV"
10000
min
5000
Ir
Characteristic "M"
10000
TV
ma x
60
30
2000
5000
Irm
30
1000
10
10
500
0ms 50ms
tr
2000
Irm
500
20
200
100
50
20
t [min]
tr
20
10
10
In = 250 A
In = 400 A
In = 630 A
100
50
tr
t [min]
20
20
10
10
15
20
15
In = 250 A
In = 400 A
In = 630 A
5
3
t [s]
ma x
Ir
5
200
Ir
1000
5
2
min
60
0ms 50ms
tr
Ir
2
1
t [s]
0.5
1
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
50
50
0.05
0.05
0.6
0.32
In = 250 A
0.02
1.5 2.0 2.5
1.0
3. 1
Irm [kA]
3.75
0.01
0.6
0.32
In = 250 A
0.02
1.5 2.0 2.5
1.0
3. 1
Irm [kA]
3.75
0.01
x In
0.1
x In
0.1
50
50
0.05
0.05
1.0
0.5
In = 400 A
0.02
2.4 3.2 4.0
1.6
5.0
6.0
Irm [kA]
0.01
1.0
0.5
In = 400 A
0.02
2.4 3.2 4.0
1.6
5.0
6.0
Irm [kA]
0.01
x In
0.1
x In
0.1
50
50
0.05
1.4
0.8
In = 630 A
0.02
2.0
0.05
6.3
3.0 4.0 5. 1 7.0 Irm [kA]
0.01
1.4
0.8
In = 630 A
0.02
2.0
6.3
3.0 4.0 5. 1 7.0 Irm [kA]
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
0.1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
F55
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S

Enables to set the delay of independent release
Type
In [A]
Ir [A]
tr [s] (7.2 x Ir)
restart
Irm [kA]
250
100
110
115
125
137
144
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
275
290
315
345
360
400
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
250
260
275
290
305
315
345
360
400
435
455
480
500
550
575
630
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
Description
- undercurrent release - in case of failure of one or two phases
in mode M the switch off delay is 4 s
- setting of the value of the short-circuit release (delay = 0 ms)
- delay setting of short-circuit release 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms
current
SE-BH-0250-MTV9
MTV9
L
Ir
tr
Irmv
SE-BH-0400-MTV9
tv
400
SE-BH-0630-MTV9

protected device
630
Setting of the current value of the delayed short-circuit release

F56
3P 4P
0 ms
100 ms
200 ms
300 ms
0 ms
100 ms
200 ms
300 ms
0 ms
100 ms
200 ms
300 ms
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P 4P
Tripping characteristic SE-BH-....-MTV9

Characteristic "TV"
Ir
TV
max
60
2000
30
1000
1000
10
500
10
1
50
t [min]
50
t [min]
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
I n =250 A
I n =400 A
I n =630 A
5
2
t [s]
0. 5
I n =250 A
I n =400 A
I n =630 A
9 xI r
5 xI r
7 xI r
0.02
I rm v
0.01
0. 1
0.2
0.5
300
200
100
tv [ms]
0. 1
0.05
0.02
10
20
x In
50
I rm v
0.01
5
tr [s]
0. 2
100
tv [ms]
0. 1
0.05
0. 5
300
200
0. 2
I n =250 A
I n =400 A
I n =630 A
15
tr [s]
3 xI r
t [s]
3
100
9 xI r
200
2
100
20
200
20
15
500
I n =250 A
5
2
2000
Irm v
tv
tr
Ir
5 xI r
7 xI r
10
max
3 xI r
30
min
5000
60
Irm v
tv
tr
Ir
Ir
I n =400 A
min
5000
Characteristic "M"
10000
I n =630 A
10000
0. 1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
F57
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
OVERCURRENT RELEASES 4D01 - DISTRIBUTION WITH N-POLE PROTECTION

Protection of lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S networks
Type
Description
In [A]
Ir [A]
250
100
110
115
125
137
144
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
- for 4-pole BH630... switching unit with protected 4th pole

- setting of the protection level of 4th pole (possibility of total switch off )
SE-BH-0250-4D01
4D01
L
Ir
IN
tr
Irm
IN
5000
60
30
2000
IN
Ir
1000
10
0.5 xIr
0.75 xIr
1 xI r
SE-BH-0...-4D01
10000
min
Ir
tr
Irm
SE-BH-0400-4D01
max
400
20
500
10
5
200
2
1
3
100
50
t [min]
20
20
10
tr [s]
2
1
1
0. 5
I n=250 A
I n=400 A
I n=630 A
9 xI r
7 xI r
2 xI r
0. 1
0.05
4 xI r
I n =250 A
I n =400 A
I n =630 A
0. 2
SE-BH-0630-4D01
I rm
0.02
0.01
0. 1
0.2
0.5

protected device
Setting of the protection level of N pole
F58
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
275
290
315
345
360
400
tr [s] (7.2 x Ir)
restart Irm [kA]
IN [A] (m x Ir )
1
2
0.5
0.75
OFF
0.5
0.75
OFF
0.5
0.75
OFF
3
T(0)
10
20
20
10
T(t)
3
1
1
3
T(0)
10
20
20
10
T(t)
3
1
10
t [s]
4P
10
20
x In
50
630
250
260
275
290
305
315
345
360
400
435
455
480
500
550
575
630
1
3
T(0)
10
20
20
10
T(t)
3
1

Switching on/off of the thermal memory.
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
SWITCHES
3P 4P
Specifications
PS-BHD-..00
PS-BHD-..00-Au1)
60 500 V a.c.
60 500 V d.c.
500 V
5 60 V a.c.
5 60 V d.c.
500 V
Type
Ue
Ue
Ui

Simple
Rated frequency
fn
Ie /Ue AC-15
Ie /Ue DC-13
Ith
Thermal current
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
6 A/240 V, 4 A/400 V, 2 A/500 V

0.4 A/240 V, 0.3 A/400 V, 0.2 A/500 V
10 A
AC-12, DC-12 0.004 0.5 A/5 V,

0.004 0.01/60 V
0.5 A
01, 10, 02, 11, 20
0.5 1 mm2
IP20
IP20

Type
Double
Ue
Ue
Ui

Rated frequency
fn
Ie /Ue
Ie /Ue
Ith
Thermal current
Make
and break
Make-and-break
SP-BHD-0002
PS-BHD-0010/0020
PS-BHD-0010-Au/0020-Au1)
250 V a.c.
250 V
60 250 V a.c.
60 250 V d.c.
250 V
5 60 V a.c.
5 60 V d.c.
250 V
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
1 A/250 V a.c.
AC-15 1.5 A/250 V a.c.

DC-13 0.2 A/250 V d.c.
6A
AC-12, DC-12 0.004 0.5 A/5V,

0.004 0.01/60V
0,5 A
001/002
001/002
02, 11, 20
0.5 1 mm
0.5 1 mm
0.5 1 mm2
IP20
IP20
IP20

1)
01, 10, 02, 11, 20
0.5 1 mm2
- PS-BHD-.- Au is not suitable to control electromagnetic loads
Type designation, number and type of contacts according to contact arrangement

Arrangement of contacts Type
Double make-and-break
Number of contacts
Contact types
01
PS-BHD-1000 (-Au)
make
20
PS-BHD-2000 (-Au)
make
01
PS-BHD-0100 (-Au)
break
02
PS-BHD-0200 (-Au)
break
11
PS-BHD-1100 (-Au)
1+1
breaking+switching
001
PS-BHD-0010 (-Au)
make-and-break
002
PS-BHD-0020 (-Au)
make-and-break
Function and names of switches according to their location in cavities
Early
Position of switch
Switch name
Switch function
Cavity 1
Signal
signals tripping of circuit breaker by overcurrent release
Cavity 2
Relative
signals tripping of circuit breaker by releases, TEST push button or by switch off button
on the motor drive
Cavity 3, 4, 5 (6, 7, 8, 9)2)
Auxiliary
signals position of circuit breaker/switch-disconnectors main contacts
Cavity 10
Early
makes/breaks in advance before making the main contact of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
- states of switches in the circuit breaker cavities, see page F18
2)
Cavities in BH630... switching unit
Diagram
Spnae
Switches
cavity
dutinaNo.1
.1
9. 4
9. 1
9. 3
9. 2
pomocn
auxiliary
8. 4
8. 1
8. 3
8. 2
pomocn
auxiliary
7. 4
7. 1
7. 3
7. 2
pomocn
auxiliary
6. 2
6. 4
6. 3
6. 1
pomocn
auxiliary
2.2
2.4
3.2
3.4
3. 1
2. 1
2. 1
3. 3
3. 3
2. 3
pomocn
auxiliary
5. 4
5. 1
5. 2
5. 3
4. 2
pomocn
auxiliary
4. 4
4. 1
3. 4
pomocn
auxiliary
4. 3
3. 1
3. 2
3. 3
2. 1
cavity
dutinaNo.2
.2
cavity
dutinaNo.3
.3
cavity
dutinaNo.4
.4
cavity
dutinaNo.5
.5
cavity
No.2
dutina
.2 + 3
cavity
dutinaNo.6
.6
cavity
dutinaNo.7
.7
cavity
dutinaNo.8
.8
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0100
or
9. 1
9. 4
or
9. 2
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
or
8. 1
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
or
8. 2
7. 1
or
8. 4
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-1000
or
7. 2
6. 1
or
7. 4
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
or
6. 2
PS-BHD-0020
3.1
6. 4
2.1
2. 2
PS-BHD-0200
or
3. 2
3. 4
PS-BHD-1100
or
2. 2
3. 4
PS-BHD-2000
PS-BHD-0010
PS-BHD-0100
or
2. 4
5. 2
or
5. 1
PS-BHD-1000
5. 4
PS-BHD-0010
or
4. 1
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0100
PS - BHD-- 0010
or
4. 2
3. 1
or
4. 4
PS-BHD-0100
PS-BHD-1000
PS-BHD-0010
or
3. 2
2. 1
or
3. 4
PS-BHD-0100
or
2. 2
2. 4
1. 1
PS-BHD-1000
or
1. 2
10.Y 4
1. 4
10.Y 2
cavity
dutinaNo.10
.10
pomocn
auxiliary
2. 2
2. 4
1. 4
2. 3
1. 2
relativn
relative
PS-BHD-0010
or
PS-BHD-0100
SP-BHD-0002
PS-BHD-1000
1. 3
1. 1
nvstn
signal
10.Y 3
10.Y 1
pedstihov
early
cavity No.9
dutina
.9
F59
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
SHUNT TRIPS
3P 4P
Specifications
Type
SV-BHD-X
Ue
Rated frequency
24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V a.c.

24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
fn
AC
DC
< 3 VA
<3W
Characteristic
20 ms
Loading time
0.5 1 mm2
Degree of protection of terminals (connected release)
IP20
10

operating voltage
Cavities in BH630... switching unit
Ue
Type
24, 40, 48 V a.c./d.c.
SV-BHD-X024
110 V a.c./d.c.
SV-BHD-X110
230, 400, 500 V a.c. /220 V d.c.
SV-BHD-X230

Fig. 1).

Main contacts
2
4
6
1
3
5
20
1
0
Auxiliary switch
5.4
4.4
3.4
3.4
5.3
4.3
3.3
3.3
20
1
0
Auxiliary switch
5.2
4.2
14
3.2
5.1
4.1
13
3.1
30
1
0
Relative switch
20
1
2.4
2.3
0
Relative switch
30
1
2.2
2.1


switch-disconnector
1
0
Switched on
1
10
10 3
50
00
10 2
50
0
1 5
10
50
t [ms ]
F60
Switched off by releases, TEST

or by switch off button on the
motor drive
Switched off manually or by
motor drive electrically (loaded
state)
Lever position of
circuit breaker/
switch-disconnector
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P 4P
Specifications
SP-BHD-X
SP-BHD-X-00012)
24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V a.c.

24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V a.c.

24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
Type
Ue
Rated frequency
fn
< 3 VA
< 3 VA
<3W
<3W
U 0.85 Ue - it is possible to switch on the circuit breaker
U 0.35 Ue - the circuit breaker must trip
AC
DC
Characteristic1)
20 ms
(connected release)
0.5 1 mm2
0.5 1 mm2
IP20
IP20
10
10

Early switch
Ue
Rated frequency
fn
50/60 Hz
Ie /Ue
1 A/250 V a.c.
10, 01
250 V a.c.
0.5 1 mm2
(connected switch)
IP20
1)
- tripping of the undervoltage release can be delayed using the delay unit BZ-BX-X230-A, for more detailed information see page P2
2)
- cannot be used in combination with MP-BH-X.... motor drive

operating voltage
Number and type of contacts by arrangement of contacts

Contact types
Ue
Type
01
break
24, 40, 48 V a.c.
SP-BHD-X024
10
switches
110 V a.c./d.c.
SP-BHD-X110
230, 400, 500 a.c./220 V d.c.
SP-BHD-X230

Fig. 1).
Main contacts
2
4
6
1
3
5
20
1
0
Auxiliary switch
5.4
4.4
3.4
3.4
5.3
4.3
3.3
3.3
30
1
0
Auxiliary switch
5.2
4.2
14
3.2
5.1
4.1
13
3.1
30
0
Relative switch
30
1
2.4
2.3
0
Relative switch
2.2
2.1

30
1
0
Early switch
10.Y 1
10.Y 3
Early switch
Lever position
of circuit
breaker/switchdisconnector
Switched on
20
10
1 5
10 3
50
00
10 2
50
0
10.Y2
10.Y4
10.Y 1
10.Y 3

switch-disconnector
20
1
10.Y2
10.Y4
10
50
Umstn
dutin
ve spnacm
bloku BH630...
Cavities
in BH630...
switching
unit
20 ms
Loading time
t [ms ]
Switched off by releases, TEST

or by switch off button on the
motor drive
Switched off manually or by
motor drive electrically (loaded
state)
F61
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
AUXILIARY RELEASES
3P 4P
Specifications
Reaction time of the auxiliary releases
Shunt trip
SV
SP
0
1
0
>50
>50
OK
OK
OK
t (ms)
t (ms)
Cooperation of motor drive and shunt trip or undervoltage release

It is necessary to keep time delay when the control of the circuit breaker is
done by motor drive and shunt trip or undervoltage release. The following
time delays have to be kept between the disconnection of voltage from the
shunt trip or bringing the voltage to the undervoltage release and the control
Shunt trip
HK
HK
1
0
50
SV
50
SP
SP
1
0
>50
>50
20 700
1
0
20 700
IMP ON
IMP ON
t (ms)
t (ms)

States of circuit breaker/switchdisconnector
Switched on
Switched off by releases, TEST or by switch
off button on the motor drive
F62

switch-disconnector
Symbol
Description
HK
Main contacts
OK
IMP ON
SV
SP
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
HAND DRIVES
3P 4P
Description
The hand drive enables to control the circuit breaker/switchdisconnector by turning the lever, e.g. to switch machines
mounting on the switching unit (also additionally) after the
your choice, see page F11.
a) from the front panel (Fig. 1)

Hand drive unit RP-BH-CK..
+ Hand drive lever RP-BHD-CP..
b) through the switchboard door (Fig. 2)
Hand drive unit RP-BH-CK..
+ Extension shaft RP-BHD-CH..
+ Hand drive bearing PR-BHD-CN..
+ Hand drive lever + RP-BHD-CP..
Fig. 1 - DIMENSIONS see page F28
The hand drive unit is fixed directly to switching unit of the

circuit breaker.
The hand drive bearing is fixed to the switchboard door
and it provides degree of protection IP40 or IP66.
hand drive bearing.
(length 365 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (adjustable length 245 410 mm).

The hand drive unit and hand drive lever are also supplied with
the possibility to lock the circuit breaker in positionswitched off
manually. The unit and lever of the hand drive can be locked
using three padlocks with shank diameter max. 6 mm.
Each hand drive bearing prevents the door from opening
when the circuit breaker is switched on or in a state of being
switched off by releases and in the circuit breaker state
switched off manually and hand drive lever is locked up.
switching, see page F64.
Fig. 2 - DIMENSIONS see page F28
By a screwdriver it is possible to unlock the mechanism

blocking the switchboard door opening with the circuit breaker
switched on (for bearing RP-BHD-CN40 a RP-BHD-CN41).
Specifications
Colour Locking while the circuit Degree of
breaker is in OFF state protection

circuit breaker state
switched on
switched off manually and Switchboard door opening with Length [mm]
locked
the circuit breaker switched on
Type
Description
RP-BH-CK10
Hand drive unit
blue
no
RP-BH-CK20
Hand drive unit
blue
yes
RP-BH-CK21
Hand drive unit
yellow
yes
RP-BH-CK30
blue
RP-BH-CK31
blue
RP-BHD-CP10
Hand drive lever
black
no
RP-BHD-CP20
Hand drive lever
black
yes
RP-BHD-CP21
Hand drive lever
red
yes
RP-BHD-CN40
Hand drive bearing
black
IP40
yes
yes
yes
RP-BHD-CN41
Hand drive bearing
yellow
IP40
yes
yes
yes
RP-BHD-CN60
Hand drive bearing
black
IP66
yes
yes
no
RP-BHD-CN61
Hand drive bearing
yellow
IP66
yes
yes
no
RP-BHD-CH10
Extension shaft
365 (can be
shortened)
RP-BHD-CH20
Extension shaft - telescopic
245 410
F63
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
3P 4P
RP-BHD-CB10 Mechanical interlocking

can be used between two BH630 circuit breakers or between
BH630 and BD250 circuit breakers. Both circuit breakers must
be equipped with a hand drive (at least one with a hand
drive unit and hand drive lever) see page F63. In order to use
the interlocking, it is absolutely necessary to comply with the
dimensions that are shown in the figure and given in the table.
Left switching unit
BD250..3..
Dimension [mm]
BD250..3..
BD250..4..
BH630..3..
BH630..4..
X
105
105
122.5
122.5
BD250..4..
L
112
112
128.5
128.5
X
140
140
157.5
157.5
BH630..3..
L
145.5
145.5
162.5
162.5
X
122.5
122.5
140
140
BH630..4..
L
128.5
128.5
145.5
145.5
X
181
181
185
185
L
185.5
185.5
189
189
RP-BHD-CD10 Mechanical parallel switching

Enables simultaneous switching of two circuit breakers/
switch-disconnectors. Parallel switching can be used between
two BH6301 circuit breakers or between BH630 and BD250
circuit breakers. Both circuit breakers must be equipped with
a hand drive unit and at least one with a hand drive lever, see
page F63. In order to use parallel switching, it is absolutely
the fi gure and given in the table.

BD250..3..
Left switching unit
Dimension [mm]
1)
F64
BD250..3..
BD250..4..
BH630..3..
BH630..4..
Xmin
+7
105
105+7
122.5+7
122.5+7
BD250..4..
Xmax
Xmin
-7
164.5
164.5-7
164.5-7
164.5-7
+7
122.5
122.5+7
140+7
140+7
Xmax
Xmin
-7
164.5
164.5-7
164.5-7
164.5-7
- Switching unit BH630..4.. (4-pole design) can only be on the left side
BH630..4.. 1)
BH630..3..
+7
122.5
122.5+7
140+7
140+7
Xmax
-7
164.5
164.5-7
164.5-7
164.5-7
Xmin
Xmax
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
3P 4P
MB-BH-PV04
MB-BHD-PV03
breakers may be switched off simultaneously.
Mechanical interlocking MB-BH-PV04 is intended for
two BH630 circuit breakers. Interlocking MB-BHD-PV03 is
intended for one BH630 circuit breaker and one BD250.
Circuit breakers may be in fixed, plug-in and withdrawable
designs.
Type of circuit breakers
BH630
BH630
Type of mechanical interlocking MB-BH-PV04
BD250
BH630
MB-BHD-PV03
Circuit breaker place in switchboard

Detailed information can be found in the instructions for use,
which you may download from our website www.oez.com.

During the manipulation with circuit breaker with mechanical
interlocking and motor drive, the circuit breaker may reach
the state, in which the first attempt at switching on by motor
steps may be done:
Rmin
=4
148
1) To keep the process of manipulation with the circuit

breaker, see Recommended circuit breaker manipulation below
drive circuit according to wiring diagram, see page F71

1) Shunt trip/undervoltage release must be used to switch off
the circuit breaker. Circuit breaker switching off cannot be
made by motor drive.
2) Circuit breaker can be stored and switched on only if
the second circuit breaker is in switch-off mode. Circuit
breaker status indicator on motor drive is in O position.
Between storing and switching on the circuit breaker,
it is necessary to keep the time interval min. 100 ms.
Switch S must be disconnected.
3) In case of infringement of these principles, the first
switching on of circuit breaker is unsuccessful.
45
0-700
30
min. 80
F65
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Description
DIMENSIONS see page F29
off/on).
Usage in industrial applications e.g. switching of stand
by units etc. or wherever the automatic operation of electric
devices is needed.
can be used.
- AUTO mode remote control. The circuit breaker is
controlled by buttons for remote switch off/on, furthermore in this position mechanical control can be
used on the front panel of the motor drive
the green switch on button and switched off using
the red switch off button on the front part of the drive
cover. Electric switch on is blocked. Electric switch off is
functional. The accumulation of energy can be done by
Possibility to indicate remotely the state of the AUTO/MANUAL
switch.
Switch S (external switch has to be bought separately)
enables the choice of automatic accumulation of energy
(circuit breaker loading).
- automatic accumulation of energy is switched on (S switch
closed): after tripping of the circuit breaker by the overcurrent release, by auxiliary release, or by TEST push button or
by the switch off button on the motor drive, motor drive
immediately accumulates energy (circuit breaker loading),
motor drive is then ready to switch on the circuit breaker.
- automatic accumulation of energy is switched off (S switch
open): after tripping of the circuit breaker by the overcurrent release, by auxiliary release, or by TEST push button or
by the switch off button on the motor drive, both motor
drive and circuit breaker stay in position switched off by

releases. In this position motor drive waits for the impulse
from switch S. When the impulse is brought in the motor
drive accumulates energy (turn on the circuit breaker) and
after this loading the motor drive is ready to switch on the
circuit breaker. It is not possible to switch on the circuit
breaker when motor drive is not loaded.
Front panel state indicating device of the stored energy
signals the state of motor drive storage devices. The state can
be signalled from a distance.
The drive may be furnished with an electromechanical
counter of cycles:
- internal design on the motor drive cover
- external design OD-BHD-PP01 for mounting on the switchboards door or inside the switchboard by means of metal
holder, that is part of the delivery
Motor drive can be sealed by means of bolt sealing insert
(OD-BH-VP01).
Drive can be locked in off position by up to three padlocks
(shank diameter max. 4.3 mm).
Switch on button can be covered and sealed (OD-BHDKT01).
Drive is connected by multi-pole connector with cavities
( in order to connect cables special tongs have to be used).
Drive can be furnished with cable (OD-BHD-KA02), that
has on one side connector to the motor drive and on the
other side free terminals for connection to etc. switchboards
terminal block.
Specifications
Type
Operating voltage
Cover of switch on button OD-BHD-KT01
Connecting cable OD-BHD-KA02
Rated frequency
Control impulse length for storage
for switching off
Input power
Protection
Rated operating current of the change-over
switch AUTO / MANUAL
Type
Conductor lengths
1)
- for sequence of control impulses see page F69
F66
Ue
fn
AC
DC
24, 48, 110 V a.c.; 230 V a.c.
24, 48, 110 V d.c.; 220 V d.c.
Ie /Ue
MP-BH-X, MP-BH-X-P
24, 48, 110, 230 V a.c.
24, 48, 110, 220 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
400 ms 1)
20 700 ms 1)
400 ms 1)
< 60 ms
900 ms
3 cycles/min
10 cycles
20 000 cycles
100 VA
100 W
LPN-4C-1; LPN-2C-1
5 A/250 V a.c.
0.5 A/250 V d.c.
OD-BHD-KA02
12
0.35 mm2
0.6 m
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Specifications
Main contacts
50
2
4
6
1
3
5
Auxiliary switch
5.1
4.1
13
3.1
5.4
4.4
3.4
3.4
5.3
4.3
3.3
3.3
5.2
4.2
14
3.2
5.1
4.1
13
3.1
Auxiliary switch
Auxiliary switch
50
1
0
0
Relative switch
1
2.3
1
2.4
2.3
Relative switch
Relative switch
1
2.2
2.1
1
2.2
2.1
Early switch
Early switch
20
10.Y 1
10.Y 3
10.Y2
10.Y4
10.Y 1
10.Y 3
20
1
0
10
50
1 5
0
Early switch
900
1
0
1 5
10.Y 1
10.Y 3
10.Y2
10.Y4
10
10.Y2
10.Y4
Early switch
10 3
50
00
10.Y 1
10.Y 3
900
10 2
50
0
10.Y2
10.Y4
900
Relative switch
2.4
900
t [ms]
5.2
4.2
14
3.2
50
10
5.3
4.3
3.3
3.3
Auxiliary switch
10 3
50
00
5.4
4.4
3.4
3.4
900
10 2
50
0
1
3
5
10
50
2
4
6
Main contacts
t [ms ]
Diagram
- electrically by ON and OFF push button

States of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
Ovldac
obvod
motorovho
pohonu
Control
circuit
of motor drive
Lever position of
circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
Q3
L+
Switched on
ON
Switched off by releases, TEST or by switch off button

on the motor drive
S
OF F

(loaded state)
Motorov
pohon
Motor drive
X3
Diagram description
10 9
12
NC
NO NC
NO
S6
S5
MP
11
2
X4
X3
PE
N-
Po.counter
cykl
Cycle
Symbol
Description
MP
motor drive MP-BH-X...
motor
storage device
X3
X4
S5
S6
switch to indicate full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C)
YC

ON
switch on button
OFF
switch off button

(switched on = automatic storage, may be continuously switched on)
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker - see page F66
F67
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Specifications
Switching off of the circuit breaker with motor drive by overcurrent
release (switch S in switched on state-automatic storage)
Switching off of the circuit breaker with motor drive by shunt trip or
undervoltage release (switch S in switched on state-automatic storage)
Main contacts
2
4
6
1
3
5
Main contacts
20
2
4
6
1
3
5
20
1
0
Auxiliary switch
5.4
4.4
3.4
3.4
5.3
4.3
3.3
3.3
5.2
4.2
14
3.2
5.1
4.1
13
3.1
Auxiliary switch
20
1
0
5.4
4.4
3.4
3.4
5.3
4.3
3.3
3.3
5.2
4.2
14
3.2
5.1
4.1
13
3.1
30
1
0
Auxiliary switch
Auxiliary switch
30
1
0
30
1
0
Relative switch
1
2.4
2.3
Relative switch
650
20
2.3
Relative switch
2.1
Relative switch
30
1
2.2
650
30
1
2.4
650
2.1
650
30
1
2.2
Signal switch
20
1
1.2
1.1
650
1
0
0
Signal switch
30
650
t [ms ]
10
10 2
50
0
1 5
10
10 3
50
00
10
50
1 5
10 3
50
00
10
50
1.3
10 2
50
0
1.4
t [ms ]
Diagram
Circuit breaker switching on by motor drive (electrically by ON push

button) and tripping by undervoltage release
Ovldac
obvod
Control
circuit of
motor drive
Ovldac
obvod
Control
circuit of
motor drive
Q3
Q3
L+
L+
ON
ON
S
OF F
OF F
NO NC
NO
S6
S5
X3
or
12
NC
10 9
NO NC
NO
S6
C
S5
C
or
2
X4
X3
11
2
X4
X3
cavity
dutinaNo.10
.10
cavity.10
No.10
dutina
PE
N-
N-
Po.counter
cykl
Cycle
F68
B2
B2
A2
MP
11
A2
MP
B1
B1
SV -BHD-X...
SP-BHD-X...
NC
10 9
SV -BHD-X...
12
SP-BHD-X...
X3
A1
Motorov
pohon
Motor drive
A1
Motorov
pohon
Motor drive
PE
N-
N-
Po.counter
cykl
Cycle
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
MOTOR DRIVE
3P 4P
Specifications
- S switch permanently closed (automatic storage) or open
800
HK
Circuit breaker switching off by overcurrent or auxiliary release and switching on

by motor drive - S switch permanently closed (automatic storage)
50
50
HK
800
PS
1
0
520
> 600
RS
> 880
1
0
0
> 1400
>100
1
0
> 1400
20 700
IMP ON
400
IMP OFF
20 700
IMP ON
1
0
t [ms ]
R OFF
t [ms ]
Circuit breaker switching off by overcurrent or auxiliary release and

switching on by motor drive - S switch closed only for storing up
50
HK
1
0
X+520
RS
> 880
1
0
X
> 1400
400
IMP S
1
0
R OFF
>100
20 700
IMP ON
t [ms ]
Symbol
Description
HK
main contacts
PS
auxiliary switch
RS
relative switch
R OFF
IMP S
impulse to store up motor drive energy (generated by S switch)
IMP ON
IMP OFF
random segment of time

States of circuit

switch-disconnector
Switched on
Switched off by releases, TEST or by switch
off button on the motor drive
F69
Modeion
BH630N, BH630S
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Diagram
Recommended wiring diagram of connecting the circuit breaker
control circuits in withdrawable/plug-in design with motor drive
Switching off by motor drive
Q3
L+
S
OFF
10
A1
K1
OD-BHD-R...
NO
NC
NO
NC
S6
S5
C
MP
X3
11
X4
1
YC
PE
F70
N-
A2
K2
3.PS-BHD-1000
12
1.PS-BHD-0100
X3
ON
3.3
1.1
3.4
1.2
Diagram description
Symbol
Description
MP
M
motor
P
storage device
X3
X4
S5
YC
OFF
switch off button
S
Q3
OD-BHD-R
3.PS-BHD-1000 auxiliary switch
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
MOTOR DRIVES
3P 4P
Diagram
Recommended wiring diagram of connecting the circuit breakers control circuits
with mechanical interlocking and motor drive (applicable for any circuit breaker)
Switching off is possible only by undervoltage release or shunt trip
Q3
L+
OFF
12
10
A1
K1
A1
SP-BHD-X...
B1
SV-BHD-X...
OD-BHD-R...
NO
NC
A2
3.3
1.1
3.3
3.4
1.2
3.4
K2
S5
S6
C
A2
B2
NO
NC
23.PS-BHD-1000
X3
13.PS-BHD-1000
ON
1.PS-BHD-0100
OFF
MP
X3
11
X4
1
YC
PE
N-
Diagram description
Symbol
Description
MP
M
motor
P
storage device
X3
X4
S5
YC
S6
switch to indicate full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C)
OFF
switch off button
Q3
OD-BHD-R
13.PS-BHD-1000 switch inserted in cavity 3 (first circuit breaker)
- auxiliary switch
23.PS-BHD-1000 switch inserted in cavity 3 (second circuit breaker)
- auxiliary switch
SP-BHD-X...
undervoltage release - Ue of release must be the same as Ue of control relay
SV-BHD-X...
shunt trip - Ue of release must be the same as Ue of control relay
F71
Modeion
NOTES
F72
BH630N, BH630S
Modeion
BL1000S
Modeion
BL1000S
Switching units, withdrawable device..........................................................................................................................G4
Overcurrent releases ...............................................................................................................................................................G5
Signalling units ..........................................................................................................................................................................G5
Connecting sets ..........................................................................................................................................................................H6
Auxiliary switches .....................................................................................................................................................................H7
Shunt trips ....................................................................................................................................................................................H7
Undervoltage releases ...........................................................................................................................................................H7
Hand drives ...................................................................................................................................................................................H8
Mechanical interlocking ........................................................................................................................................................H8
Motor drives .................................................................................................................................................................................H8
Accessories ....................................................................................................................................................................................H9
- specifications ........................................................................................................................................G6
- diagram ..............................................................................................................................................H11
- connecting, mounting ........................................................................................................................H12
- deionization spaces.............................................................................................................................H15
- dimensions .........................................................................................................................................H16
Withdrawable device
- description, specifications, diagram....................................................................................................H28
DTV3 - distribution
- description, specifications, tripping characteristics.............................................................................G7
MTV8 - motor
- description, specifications, tripping characteristics.............................................................................G8
U001 - universal
- description, specifications, tripping characteristics...........................................................................G10
Signalling units
Connecting sets
- specifications ......................................................................................................................................H13
Auxiliary switches
Shunt trips
Hand drives
- description, specifications...................................................................................................................H40
- description, specifications, dimensions ...............................................................................................H41
Motor drives
G2
3P
Modeion
BL1000S
3P
CONNECTING SETS
Clamp terminals
Clamp terminals
Block terminals
Block terminals
Block terminals
Rear connection
Front connection
Rear connection
CS-BL-W010
CS-BL-W011
CS-BL-B002
CS-BL-B003
CS-BL-B004
CS-BL-A022
CS-BL-A010
CS-BL-A020
HAND DRIVES
SWITCHING UNIT
BL1000SE305
RP-BL-CK10
RP-BL-CP
SWITCHING UNIT
- WITHDRAWABLE DESIGN
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
ZV-BL-1600-300
BL1000SE320
RP-BL-CH10
RP-BL-CN
RL-BL-CB10
Mechanical
blocking with
Bowden cable
MB-BL-....
MOTOR DRIVES
MP-BL-X
SO-BL-0010
SWITCHES PS-BL-
SHUNT TRIP
SIGNALLING UNITS
SV-BL-X
SP-BL-X
SE-BL-J.-DTV3
SE-BL-J.-MTV8
SE-BL-J1000-V001
SB-BL-0002
SE-BL-J....-U001
ACCESSORIES
Terminal cover
Lever with locking
Sealing insert
Extension cable
OD-BL-UP01
OD-BL-VP01
OD-BL-KA01
Insulating barriers
Insulating barriers
Insulating grommets
Mounting bolts
Terminal cover
OD-BL-KS08
OD-BL-KS03
OD-BL-MS02
OD-BL-KS01
OD-BL-KS02
Terminal cover
OD-BL-KS09
OD
BL KS09
OD-BL-KS04
G3
Modeion
BL1000S
SWITCHING UNITS
3P
Fixed design
Type
BL1000SE305
Product code
Iu [A]
Icu [kA]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
19381
1000
65
20
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page G6

- the method of power circuit connection must observe recommendations, see page H14 as well as deionization space, see
page H17
must be fitted with
- insulating barriers OD-BL-KS02

- mounting bolts set OD-BL-MS01 (4x M8x80)
- connecting sets for front connection - busbars connection
- overcurrent release SE-BL-J....-.... (circuit breaker)
or switch-disconnector unit SE-BL-J1000-V001 (switch-disconnector)
Withdrawable design
Type
BL1000SE320
Product code
Iu [A]
Icu [kA]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
19382
1000
65
23
- Switching unit must be fitted with: - overcurrent release SE-BL-J....-.... (circuit breaker)
or switch-disconnector unit SE-BL-J1000-V001 (switch-disconnector)
- withdrawable device ZV-BL-1600-300
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
Type
ZV-BL-1600-300
Product code
21010
Name
Withdrawable device
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
14
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page H30

- the method of power circuit connection must observe recommendations, see page H28 as well as deionization space,
see page H15
- Withdrawable device: must be fitted with - 2 connection sets CS-BL-A010 (front connection)
or CS-BL-A020 (rear connection)
we recommend fitting with - mounting bolts set OD-BL-MS02 (4 x M8x60)
G4
BL1000S
Modeion
3P

In [A]
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
315
SE-BL-J315-DTV3
Product code
22111
Description
0.5
630
SE-BL-J630-DTV3
22211
0.5
800
SE-BL-J800-DTV3
22311
0.5
1000
SE-BL-J1000-DTV3
19383
0.5

In [A]
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
315
SE-BL-J315-MTV8
Product code
22101
Description
0.5
630
SE-BL-J630-MTV8
22201
0.5
800
SE-BL-J800-MTV8
22301
0.5
1000
SE-BL-J1000-MTV8
19384
0.5
U001 - characteristic U - universal

protection of complicated loads or those not specified in advance
In [A]
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
315
SE-BL-J315-U001
Product code
20527
Description
0.5
630
SE-BL-J630-U001
20526
0.5
800
SE-BL-J800-U001
20525
0.5
1000
SE-BL-J1000-U001
20524
0.5
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION, see page 10
3P
Ie [A]
Type
1000
SE-BL-J1000-V001
Product code
19385
Name
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.4
SIGNALLING UNIT
3P
Type
SB-BL-0002
Product code
13765
Description
- for overcurrent releases
DTV3, MTV8 and U001
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.67

- for connecting of circuit breaker with signalling unit CS-BL-B*** block terminals cannot be used
G5
Modeion
BL1000S
3P
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Specifications
Type
Series
Weight
Standards
SWITCHDISCONNECTORS
BL1000S
SUPERIOR
210 x 350 x 135 + 63 mm
20 kg
EN 60 947-2
IEC 947-2
210 x 350 x 135 + 63 mm

20 kg
EN 60 947-3
IEC 947-3
3
315, 630, 800, 1000 A
1000 A
max. 690 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
8 kV
690 V
A, B
15 kA / 1 s
3
1000 A
1000 A
max. 690 V a.c.
max. 440 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
8 kV
690 V
AC-23B
AC-23B
DC-23B
15 kA / 1 s
Approval marks
Number of poles
Rated current
Circuit breaker
Switch-disconnector
Dimensions
Mounting
Load
Rated frequency
at Ie = 1000 A
Rated short-time withstand current at
Ue = 690 V a.c.
In
Iu
Ie
Ue
fn
Uimp
Ui
690 V a.c.
690 V a.c.
440 V d.c.
Icw / t
Icu / Ue

Ics / Ue
Icm / Ue
85 kA / 230 V a.c.
65 kA / 415 V a.c.
45 kA / 500 V a.c.
20 kA / 690 V a.c.
30 ms
45 kA / 230 V a.c.
36 kA / 415 V a.c.
30 kA / 500 V a.c.
20 kA / 690 V a.c.
140 kA / 415 V a.c.
30 kA / 415 V a.c.
30 kA / 440 V d.c.
100 W/139 W
10 000 cycles
4 000 cycles
120 cycles/hr
230 N
IP40
IP20

100 W/139 W
10 000 cycles
4 000 cycles
Switching frequency
120 cycles/hr
Control force
230 N
IP40
IP20
40 C
40 C
-40 +55 C
-40 +55 C
Working environment
Climatic resistance
EN 60068
EN 60068
Pollution degree
3
3
Max. sea level
2000 m
2000 m
Seismic resistance
3g ( 8 50 ) Hz
3g ( 8 50 ) Hz
z/z
z /z
Plug-in design
z
z
Withdrawable design
Accessories
z/z//
z/z//
z
z
Shunt trip
z/
z/
z/z
z /z
z/z
z /z
z/z
z /z
z
z
Lever with locking
z/
z/
z available, unavailable
1)
You can find other technical information in chapter BL1000S, BL1600S Technical information Circuit breakers, switch-disconnectors - diagram, connecting, mounting, deionization space, dimensions ...)
G6
BL1000S
Modeion
3P
Description
Type
DTV3
L
- for BL1000... switching unit

- signalling of meeting parameters I >80 % Ir and
I>110 % Ir
In [A]
Ir [A]
restart
125, 137
Ir
0.5
144, 160
172, 180
200, 220
SE-BL-J315-DTV3
315
Irm
231, 243
1.5
T(0)
T(t)
Ir
min
5000
max
60
10
305, 315
SE-BL-J....-DTV3
30
275, 290
Ir
2000
250, 260
Irm
1000
275, 290
500
305, 315
200
345, 360
0.8
1.5
2
5
2
1
SE-BL-J630-DTV3
100
630
400, 435
T(0)
T(t)
50
t [min]
In=
In=
In=
In=
5
2
4
8
500, 550
10
3
6
455, 480
20
t [s]
2
2.5
3
250, 260
10000
Irm [kA]
10
575, 630
315 A
630 A
800 A
1000 A
315, 345
1
0. 5
360, 400
0. 2
0. 1
1.0
0.5
1.5
2.0
2.5
435, 455
480, 500
0.02
SE-BL-J800-DTV3
Irm [kA]
800
550, 575
0.01
1.5 2.0
0.8
6.0 8.0 10
3.0 4.0
T(0)
T(t)
4
9
685, 720
12
0.05
760, 800
Irm [kA]
In= 630 A
3
6
610, 630
x In
0. 1
3.0 4.0 5.0
0.05
In= 315 A
1.5
0.02
0.01
x In
0. 1
1.0
1.5 2.0
3.0 4.0
6.0
400, 435
9.0 12
0.05
1.25
455, 480
Irm [kA]
In= 800 A
0.02
500, 550
0.01
0. 1
1.25
2.0
3.0
5.0
x In
7.0 9.0 12 14
575, 610
SE-BL-J1000-DTV3
0.05
1000
630, 685
Irm [kA]
In= 1000 A
0.02
720, 760
0.01
0. 1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
800, 866
3
T(0)
T(t)
5
7
9
12
14
909, 1000
Reduced current setting Ir, resp. rated current

according to the protected device
Switching ON/OFF of
the thermal memory
G7
Modeion
BL1000S

3P
Type
In [A]
Description
- delay setting at 7,2 x Ir
- signalling of meeting parameters I>80 % Ir andI>110 % Ir
SE-BL-J315-MTV8
SE-BL-J630-MTV8
Ir
tr [s] (7,2 x Ir)
restart
125, 137
1 (TV 1)
144, 160
3 (TV 3)
172, 180
10 (TV 10)
200, 220
30 (TV 30)
231, 243
3 (M 3)
250, 260
8 (M 8)
T(0)

protected device
Choice of characteristic type.

G8
1.5
2.5
0 ms
4
5
4
T(t)
2.5
275, 290
15 (M 15)
305, 315
25 (M 25)
250, 260
1 (TV 1)
275, 290
3 (TV 3)
305, 315
10 (TV 10)
345, 360
30 (TV 30)
10
400, 435
3 (M 3)
1.5
1.5
T(0)
50 ms
0.5
0.8
2
0 ms
8
10
455, 480
8 (M 8)
500, 550
15 (M 15)
375, 630
25 (M 25)
315, 345
1 (TV 1)
360, 400
3 (TV 3)
435, 455
10 (TV 10)
480, 500
30 (TV 30)
12
550, 575
3 (M 3)
610, 630
8 (M 8)
T(t)
2
0.8
Irm
SE-BL-J1000-MTV8
0.5
630
tr
SE-BL-J800-MTV8
Irm [kA]
315
MTV8
L
Ir [A]
1.5
1
1.5
T(0)
50 ms
0 ms
800
12
9
T(t)
685, 720
15 (M 15)
760, 800
25 (M 25)
400, 435
1 (TV 1)
455, 480
3 (TV 3)
500, 550
10 (TV 10)
575, 610
30 (TV 30)
14
630, 685
3 (M 3)
2
1
2
T(0)
50 ms
1.5
1.25
3
7
0 ms
12
1000
722, 760
8 (M 8)
800, 866
15 (M 15)
909, 1000
25 (M 25)
12
T(t)
7
3
1.25
12
9
5
2
50 ms
BL1000S
Modeion
3P
Tripping characteristic SE-BL-J....-MTV8

Characteristic "TV"
10000
Characteristic "M"
10000
Ir
min
5000
TV
max
60
30
tr
Ir
2000
Irm
30
1000
10
10
500
0ms 50ms
tr
Ir
2000
Irm
500
25
200
2
100
tr
30
50
t [min]
100
tr
50
t [min]
30
20
25
20
10
10
In=
In=
In=
In=
5
2
t [s]
max
5
200
min
1000
5
2
Ir
5000
60
0ms 50ms
315 A
630 A
800 A
1000 A
In=
In=
In=
In=
5
3
2
1
15
10
10
15
t [s]
0. 5
315 A
630 A
800 A
1000 A
1
0. 5
0. 2
0. 2
0. 1
0. 1
50
50
0.05
0.05
1.0
0.5
In= 315 A
0.02
1.5
2.0
2.5
Irm [kA]
3.0 4.0 5.0
0.01
1.5
2.0
2.5
Irm [kA]
3.0 4.0 5.0
0.01
x In
0. 1
1.0
0.5
In= 315 A
0.02
x In
0. 1
50
50
0.05
0.05
1.5 2.0
0.8
In= 630 A
0.02
3.0 4.0
Irm [kA]
6.0 8.0 10
1.5 2.0
0.8
In= 630 A
0.02
0.01
Irm [kA]
6.0 8.0 10
0.01
x In
0. 1
3.0 4.0
x In
0. 1
50
50
0.05
0.05
1.5 2.0
1.0
In= 800 A
0.02
3.0 4.0
6.0
Irm [kA]
9.0 12
0.01
Irm [kA]
9.0 12
x In
50
0.05
14
2.0
1.25
In= 1000 A
6.0
0. 1
50
0.05
0.02
3.0 4.0
0.01
x In
0. 1
1.5 2.0
1.0
In= 800 A
0.02
3.0
5.0
14
Irm [kA]
7.0 9.0 12
0.01
2.0
1.25
In= 1000 A
0.02
3.0
5.0
Irm [kA]
7.0 9.0 12
0.01
0. 1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
0. 1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
G9
Modeion
BL1000S
OVERCURRENT RELEASES U001 - UNIVERSAL
Protection of complicated loads or those not

specified in advance

- delay setting at 7.2 x Ir (possibility to set characteristic
with inclination I5t)
- setting of short-circuit release delay including the time of
the delay
current
- suitable for selective protection
L
Irmv [A] = (n x Ir)
Type
Description
3P
In [A]
SE-BL-J315-U001
tr
2
SE-BL-J630-U001
tv [ms]
125, 137
0,5
50, 100
144, 160
200, 300
400, 600
Irm
200, 220
231, 243
10
250, 260
15
G10
on
T(0)
1
1.5
800, 1000
2
2.5
50, 100
200, 300
3
off
T(t)
400, 600
305, 315
25
800, 1000
250, 260
0,5
50, 100
0.8
275, 290
200, 300
305, 315
400, 600
345, 360
400, 435
10
455, 480
15
on
T(0)
1.5
2
800, 1000
3
4
50, 100
200, 300
6
off
T(t)
500, 550
20
10
400, 600
575, 630
25
800, 1000
10
315, 345
0,5
50, 100
200, 300
400, 600
3
5
480, 500
550, 575
10
610, 630
15
on
T(0)
1.5
2
800, 1000
800
4
50, 100
200, 300
6
off
T(t)
685, 720
20
10
400, 600
760, 800
25
800, 1000
12
400, 435
0,5
50, 100
1.25
455, 480
200, 300
400, 600
575, 610
630, 685
10
722, 760
15
on
T(0)
2
3
800, 1000
1000
Delay setting at 7.2 Ir
0.5
10
500, 550
Reduced current setting Ir, resp. rated

current according to the protected device
Irm [kA]
20
435, 455
SE-BL-J1000-U001
restart
275, 290
360, 400
SE-BL-J800-U001
I2t
630
tv
I t OFF
315
I t ON
tr [s] (7.2 x Ir)
172, 180
Ir
Irmv
Ir
200, 300,
800, 866
20
10
400, 600
909, 1000
25
800, 1000
Setting of short-circuit release delay
50, 100
9
off
T(t)
12
14
Delayed short-circuit release setting
BL1000S
Modeion
3P
Tripping characteristic SE-BL-J....-U001

SE-BL-J....-U001
10000
min
SE-BL-J....-U001
10000
max
Ir
5000
60
2000
Irm
I rm v =(2..10) x I r min
50
10
5
2
1
0. 5
tr [s]
0. 1
1.0
0.5
1.5
1000
0. 5
0.5
(I 2t=OFF)
tv [ms]
0.5
0.05
t [s]
1000
0. 2
I n= 315 A
I n= 630 A
I n= 800 A
I n =1000 A
20
0.5
0. 2
1.0
0.5
0.05
In = 315 A
1.5
2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
50
In = 315 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
0.5
0. 1
2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
50
tr [s]
(I 2t=ON)
50
tv [ms]
10
Irm
I rm v =(2..10) x I r max
100
t [min]
I n= 315 A
I n= 630 A
I n= 800 A
I n =1000 A
20
tv
200
2
100
Irm v
500
tr
Ir
2000
1000
10
t [min]
t [s]
tv
500
200
Irm v
30
5
2
tr
Ir
1000
10
max
Ir
5000
60
30
min
I rm [kA]
0.02
x In
0. 1
1.5 2.0
0.8
0.05
x In
0. 1
6.0 8.0 10
3.0 4.0
1.5 2.0
0.8
0.05
50
In = 630 A
50
In = 630 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
6.0 8.0 10
3.0 4.0
I rm [kA]
0.02
x In
0. 1
1.0
0.05
1.5 2.0
3.0 4.0
6.0
x In
0. 1
9.0 12
1.0
1.5 2.0
3.0 4.0
0.05
50
In = 800 A
In = 800 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
6.0
9.0 12
50
I rm [kA]
0.02
0. 1
1.25
0.05
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.0 9.0 12
x In
14
0. 1
1.25
2.0
0.05
50
In = 1000 A
5.0
7.0 9.0 12
x In
14
50
In = 1000 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
3.0
I rm [kA]
0.02
0. 1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
0. 1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
G11
Modeion
BL1000S
3P
Tripping characteristic SE-BL-J....-U001

SE-BL-J....-U001
10000
min
SE-BL-J....-U001
10000
max
Ir
5000
60
tr
Ir
2000
Irm v
tv
Irm
30
1000
50
t [min]
10
5
100
50
t [min]
I n= 315 A
I n= 630 A
I n= 800 A
I n =1000 A
20
25
25
I n= 315 A
I n= 630 A
I n= 800 A
I n =1000 A
20
10
5
25
t [s]
1000
1000
0. 1
1.0
0.5
0.05
1.5
0. 2
(I 2t=ON)
0. 2
(I 2t=OFF)
0. 5
tv [ms]
0. 5
0. 1
2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
1.0
0.5
In = 315 A
2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
1.5
0.05
50
50
In = 315 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
I rm [kA]
0.02
x In
0. 1
1.5 2.0
0.8
0.05
x In
0. 1
6.0 8.0 10
3.0 4.0
1.5 2.0
0.8
50
In = 630 A
6.0 8.0 10
3.0 4.0
0.05
50
In = 630 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
I rm [kA]
0.02
x In
0. 1
1.0
0.05
1.5 2.0
3.0 4.0
6.0
x In
0. 1
9.0 12
1.0
1.5 2.0
3.0 4.0
0.05
50
In = 800 A
6.0
9.0 12
50
In = 800 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
I rm [kA]
0.02
0. 1
1.25
0.05
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.0 9.0 12
x In
14
0. 1
1.25
2.0
3.0
5.0
0.05
50
In = 1000 A
7.0 9.0 12
x In
14
50
In = 1000 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
I rm [kA]
0.02
0. 1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
0. 1
0.2
0.5
You can find other technical information in chapter BL1000S, BL1600S Technical information.
Signalling units
Connecting sets
Auxiliary switches
Shunt trips
Hand drives
Motor drives
G12
25
t [s]
Irm
tr [s]
100
tv
200
tr [s]
500
200
Irm v
1000
10
500
tr
Ir
2000
tv [ms]
10
max
Ir
5000
60
30
min
10
20
x In
50
Modeion
BL1600S
H1
Modeion
BL1600S
Switching units, withdrawable device .........................................................................................................................H4
Overcurrent releases................................................................................................................................................................H5
Signalling units ..........................................................................................................................................................................H5
Connecting sets ..........................................................................................................................................................................H6
Auxiliary switches .....................................................................................................................................................................H7
Shunt trips ....................................................................................................................................................................................H7
Undervoltage releases ...........................................................................................................................................................H7
Hand drives ...................................................................................................................................................................................H8
Mechanical interlocking ........................................................................................................................................................H8
Motor drives..................................................................................................................................................................................H8
Accessories.....................................................................................................................................................................................H9
- diagram ..............................................................................................................................................H11
- connecting, mounting ........................................................................................................................H12
- deionization spaces ............................................................................................................................H15
- dimensions .........................................................................................................................................H16
Withdrawable device
DTV3 - distribution
- description, specifications - tripping characteristic...........................................................................H30
MTV8 - motor
U001 - universal
Signalling units
Connecting sets
Auxiliary switches
Shunt trips
Hand drives
Motor drives
H2
3P
Modeion
BL1600S
3P
CONNECTING SETS
Clamp terminals
Clamp terminals
Block terminals
Block terminals
Block terminals
Rear connection
Front connection
Rear connection
CS-BL-W010
CS-BL-W011
CS-BL-B002
CS-BL-B003
CS-BL-B004
CS-BL-A021
CS-BL-A010
CS-BL-A020
HAND DRIVES
SWITCHING UNIT
BL1600SE305
RP-BL-CK10
RP-BL-CP
SWITCHING UNIT
- WITHDRAWABLE DESIGN
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
ZV-BL-1600-300
BL1600SE320
RP-BL-CH10
RP-BL-CN
RL-BL-CB10
Mechanical
blocking with
Bowden cable
MB-BL-....
MOTOR DRIVES
MP-BL-X
SO-BL-0010
SWITCHES PS-BL-
SHUNT TRIP
SIGNALLING UNITS
SV-BL-X
SP-BL-X
SE-BL-....-DTV3
SE-BL-....-MTV8
SE-BL-1600-V001
SB-BL-0002
SE-BL-....-U001
ACCESSORIES
Terminal cover
Lever with locking
Sealing insert
OD-BL-UP01
OD-BL-VP01
OD-BL-KA01
Insulating barriers
Insulating barriers
Insulating grommets
OD-BL-KS08
OD-BL-KS03
OD-BL-KS02
Extension cable
Terminal cover
OD
BL KS09
OD-BL-KS09
Mounting bolts
OD-BL-MS02
OD-BL-KS04
Terminal cover
OD-BL-KS01
H3
Modeion
BL1600S
SWITCHING UNITS
3P
Fixed design
Type
BL1600SE305
Product code
Iu [A]
Icu [kA]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
14410
1600
65
22

see page H15
must be fitted with
- insulating barriers OD-BL-KS02

- mounting bolts set OD-BL-MS01 (4x M8x80)
- connecting sets for front connection - busbars connection
- overcurrent release SE-BL-....-.... (circuit breaker)
or switch-disconnector unit SE-BL-1600-V001 (switch-disconnector)
Withdrawable design
Type
BL1600SE320
Product code
Iu [A]
Icu [kA]
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
21000
1600
65
23
- Switching unit must be fitted with: - overcurrent release SE-BL-....-.... (circuit breaker)
or switch-disconnector unit SE-BL-1600-V001 (switch-disconnector)
- withdrawable device ZV-BL-1600-300
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
3P
Type
ZV-BL-1600-300
Product code
21010
Name
Withdrawable device
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
14.3

see page H15
- Withdrawable device must be fitted with: - 2 connection sets CS-BL-A010 (front connection)
or CS-BL-A020 (rear connection)
we recommend fitting with - mounting bolts set OD-BL-MS02 (4x M8x60)
H4
BL1600S
Modeion
3P

In [A]
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
630
SE-BL-0630-DTV3
Product code
20070
0.5
1000
SE-BL-1000-DTV3
20080
0.5
1250
SE-BL-1250-DTV3
19388
0.5
20090
0.5
1600
SE-BL-1600-DTV3
Description

In [A]
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
630
SE-BL-0630-MTV8
20071
0.5
1000
SE-BL-1000-MTV8
20081
0.5
1250
SE-BL-1250-MTV8
19389
0.5
20091
0.5
1600
SE-BL-1600-MTV8
Product code
Description
U001 - characteristic U - universal

protection of complicated loads or those not specified in advance
In [A]
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
630
SE-BL-0630-U001
20523
0.59
1000
SE-BL-1000-U001
20364
0.59
1250
SE-BL-1250-U001
20521
0.59
20363
0.59
1600
SE-BL-1600-U001
Product code
Description
3P
Ie [A]
Type
1600
SE-BL-1600-V001
Product code
20400
Name
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.4
SIGNALLING UNITS
3P
Type
SB-BL-0002
Product code
13765
Description
- for overcurrent releases
DTV3, MTV8 and U001
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.67

- for connecting of circuit breaker with signalling unit CS-BL-B*** block terminals cannot be used
H5
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
CONNECTING SETS
3P
Type
CS-BL-W010
20710
CS-BL-W011
20930
S [mm2]
Weight [kg]
Package [set]1)
Clamp terminals
2 x 70 240
Cu/Al cables
1.47
1
- double
- for connection four 70 240 mm2 cables per pole, it is possible to use two CS-BL-W010 connecting sets, see page H19 (not for BL1000SE305
switching unit)
- conductor cross-section for potential terminal is 2.5 mm2
Clamp terminals
70 240
Cu/Al cables
0.663

- for connection three 70 240 mm2 cables per pole, it is possible to combine CS-BL-W011 connecting set with CS-BL-W010 connecting set,
see page H16, H19 (not for BL1000SE305 switching unit)
CS-BL-A022
20611
Rear connection - up to 1000 A

- for fixed design
Cu/Al busbars
1.43
Cu/Al busbars
2.76
Cu/Al busbars
2.73
Cu/Al busbars
3.42
CS-BL-A021
20610
Rear connection - up to 1600 A

- for fixed design
CS-BL-A010
21050
Front connection
- for withdrawable design
CS-BL-A020
21070
Rear connection
- for withdrawable design
CS-BL-B002
20116
Block terminal
150 300
Cu/Al cables
1.00
- for 2 cables
- conductor cross-section for potential terminal is 1.5 6 mm2
- it is necessary to use insulating barriers
- using the OD-BD-KS09 cover the degree of protection IP20 is fulfilled without the need to apply insulating barriers
CS-BL-B003
20117
Block terminal
150 300
Cu/Al cables
2.00
- for 3 cables
CS-BL-B004
20118
Block terminal
150 300
Cu/Al cables
1.80
- for 4 cables
1)
H6
- one set enables to connect one side of the circuit breaker (set includes three terminals with necessary coupling elements)
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
AUXILIARY SWITCHES
3P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
PS-BL-2200

20510
60 500 V a.c./60 240 V d.c.
Contacts
0.041
PS-BL-2200-Au
12808
5 60 V a.c./d.c.
0.041
SHUNT TRIPS
3P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
SV-BL-X024
16162
24 V a.c/d.c.
0.22
SV-BL-X048
16161
48 V a.c/d.c.
0.22
SV-BL-X110
16160
110 V a.c/d.c.
0.22
SV-BL-X230
16159
230 V a.c./220 V d.c.
0.22
SV-BL-X400
16158
400 V a.c.
0.22
SV-BL-X500
16157
500 V a.c.
0.22
3P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
SP-BL-X024

16168
24 V a.c/d.c.
0.22
SP-BL-X048
16167
48 V a.c/d.c.
0.22
SP-BL-X110
16166
110 V a.c/d.c.
0.22
SP-BL-X230
16165
230 V a.c./220 V d.c.
0.22
SP-BL-X400
16164
400 V a.c.
0.22
SP-BL-X500
16163
500 V a.c.
0.22
DELAY UNIT
Type
BZ-BX-X230-A
Product code
36696
Description
enables to delay the undervoltage release tripping of circuit breakers

Modeion
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.12
H7
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
HAND DRIVES
3P
Type
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
RP-BL-CK10
20850
Hand drive unit - with locking
0.23
RP-BL-CK52
20678
Hand drive unit, 2 pcs, with the same lock and key
0.23
RP-BL-CK53
20679
0.23
RP-BL-CK54
20680
0.23
RP-BL-CK55
20681
0.23

Hand drive unit must be fitted with: for control on the switching unit - black hand drive lever RP-BL-CP
for control through the switchboard door - extension shaft RP-BL-CH10
- hand drive bearing RP-BL-CN..
- hand drive lever RP-BL-CP..
Up to 5 hand drive units can be ordered with the same lock
RP-BL-CP10
20865
Hand drive lever - black - with locking
0.261
RP-BL-CP11
20867
Hand drive lever - red - with locking
0.261
1.1
1.1
0.352
RP-BL-CN10
20870
RP-BL-CN20
19103
RP-BL-CH10
20875
Extension shaft - length 365 mm
3P
For hand drive
Type
RP-BL-CB10

20880
For circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in fixed design
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.12

- both circuit breakers must be equipped with a hand drive (at least one with a hand drive unit and hand drive lever)
With Bowden cable

MB-BL-PP07
19807
For circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors in fixed design
0.4
MB-BL-PV08
20529
For one fixed and one withdrawable circuit breaker/switchdisconnector
0.4
MB-BL-VV06
20528
For circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors in withdrawable design
0.4
MOTOR DRIVES
3P
Type
MP-BL-X110
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
11601
Motor drive
110 V a.c./d.c.
4.35
230 V a.c./220 V d.c
MP-BL-X230
11600
Motor drive
4.35
MP-BL-X110-P
11604
Motor drive - with counter of cycles 110 V a.c./d.c.
4.4
MP-BL-X230-P
11605
Motor drive - with counter of cycles 230 V a.c./220 V d.c
4.4
H8
Operating voltage
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
ACCESSORIES
3P
Type
OD-BL-KS02

20910
Insulating barriers - for switching unit in the fixed design
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.264
0.142
- in case of reversed connection (supply to terminals 2, 4, 6) must be installed also on lower side
- included with each switching unit order in fixed design
OD-BL-KS08
20569
Insulating barriers - for withdrawable device
- must always be installed on withdrawable device when clamp or block type terminals are used for its connection
OD-BL-KS09
39893
Terminal cover degree of protection IP20
0.7
- increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20 when using CS-BL-B002, CS-BL-B003, CS-BL-B004 block type terminals
- it is intended for fixed design
OD-BL-KS01
20810
Terminal cover - for circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors

in fixed design with rear connection
0.287
- circuit breaker switching on and off by motor drive IP20
OD-BL-KS04
20940
Terminal cover - for withdrawable device with front

0.168
connection
- intended for withdrawable device with front connection
- we recommend its installation on both sides of withdrawable device for increasing safety in servicing electrical device
OD-BL-KS03
20920
0.1
0.041
0.003
Insulating grommets - for rear connection
- are intended for fixed design of switching unit and withdrawable device with rear connection
- insulate connecting sets of rear connection from switchboard structure
- we recommend installing on all connecting sets with rear connection
OD-BL-UP01
13621
Lever with locking
- enables to lock the lever of circuit breaker in switched off manually position (loaded)
- locking is possible using up to three padlocks with max. shank diameter 4 6 mm
OD-BL-VP01
enables sealing for:
13924
Bolt sealing insert
- cover of cavities
OD-BL-KA01
21030
Connecting cable - for connecting circuit breaker

accessories in withdrawable design - 15 wires
0.12
SO-BL-0010
21020
Signalling of position - signals circuit breaker/switchdisconnector position in withdrawable design
0.02
OD-BL-MS02
14855
Mounting bolts set - for withdrawable device
0.144
14643

be sealed
0.019
- bolts M8x60
OD-BL-KT01
H9
Modeion
BL1600S
3P
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Specifications
Type
Series
Weight
Standards
BL1600S
SUPERIOR
210 x 350 x 135 + 63 mm
22 kg
EN 60 947-2
IEC 947-2
SWITCHDISCONNECTORS
210 x 350 x 135 + 63 mm

22 kg
EN 60 947-3
IEC 947-3
Approval marks
Number of poles
Rated current
Circuit breaker
Rated frequency
Rated short-time withstand current at
Ue = 690 V a.c.
Switch-disconnector
Dimensions
Mounting
Load
H10
3
In
Iu
Ie
Ue
fn
Uimp
Ui
690 V a.c.
690 V a.c.
440 V d.c.
Icw / t
Icu / Ue

Ics / Ue
Icm / Ue
630, 1000, 1250, 1600 A
1600 A
max. 690 V a.c.2)
50/60 Hz
8 kV
690 V
A, B
20 kA/1 s
85 kA/ 230 V a.c.
65 kA/ 415 V a.c.
45 kA/ 500 V a.c.
20 kA/ 690 V a.c.
30 ms
45 kA/ 230 V a.c.
36 kA/ 415 V a.c.
30 kA/ 500 V a.c.
20 kA/ 690 V a.c.
140 kA/ 415 V a.c.
3
1600 A
1600 A
max. 690 V a.c.2)
max. 440 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
8 kV
690 V
AC-23B
DC-23B
20 kA/1 s
40 kA/ 415 V a.c.

40 kA/ 440 V d.c.
120 W/300 W
10 000 cycles
4 000 cycles
120 cycles/hr
230 N
IP40
IP20

120 W/300 W
10 000 cycles
4 000 cycles
Switching frequency
120 cycles/hr
Control force
230 N
IP40
IP20
40 C
40 C
-40 +55 C
-40 +55 C
Working environment
Climatic resistance
EN 60068
EN 60068
Pollution degree
3
3
Max. sea level
2000 m
2000 m
Seismic resistance
3g ( 8 50 ) Hz
3g ( 8 50 ) Hz
z/z
z/z
Plug-in design
z
z
Withdrawable design
Accessories
z/z//
z/z//
z
z
Shunt trip
z/
z/
z/z
z/z
Mechanical interlocking - with Bowden cable / for hand drive
z/z
z/z
z/z
z/z
z
z
Lever with locking
z/
z/
z available, unavailable
1)
2)
- in IT networks up to 500 V a.c.
10
A2
B2
dutina
.5
cavity
No.5
or
SO2
X1
1
dutinaNo.1
.1
cavity
ZV-BL
X1, X2
SO1, SO2
Spnae
Switches
7
6
8
9 10
Propojovac
kabel
Connecting cable
dutinaNo.2
.2
cavity
withdrawable device - ZV-BL-1600-300

connecting cable for withdrawable device - OD-BL-KA01
contacts signalling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
position in withdrawable device - SO-BL-0010
- for more detailed information see page H30
overcurrent release - SE-BL-J...-...., SE-BL-....-....

T3
SE-BL
TEST
T2
switching unit - BL1000SE305, BL1600SE305

main contacts
current transformers
trip-free mechanism
T1
J
Q
T1, T2, T3
V
ZV-BL
4 2
2
Vsuvn zazen
Withdrawable
device
TEST
SE-BL
pomocn
auxiliary
Propojovac
kabel
Connecting cable
7
8
9 10
12
13
relativn
relative
11
11
13
SP-BL-X...
SV-BL-X...
12
dutinuNo.3
.3
cavity
14
14
15
relativn
relative
15
shunt trip
dutinaNo.4
.4
cavity
ON
OFF
Q3

- it is not a part of motor drive
switch on button
switch off button
motor drive circuit breaker, see page H43
SP-BL-X...
motor drive - MP-BL-X...

motor
storage device
switch to indicate MANUAL (NO-C)/AUTO (NC-C) modes
N-
X3
NO
NC
SSI
B1
SV-BL-X...
MP
M
P
X3
SSI
MP
X3
A1
1.13
1.14
pomocn
auxiliary
1.21
1.22
PS-BL-2200
Hlavn
obvod
Main circuit
1.31
1.32
Pomocn
Auxiliary spout
releases
X2
1.43
1.44
ZV-BL
PS-BL-2200
Motorov
pohon
Motor drive
SO1
2.13
2.14
2.21
2.22
2.31
2.32
2.43
2.44
PS-BL-2200
3.13
3.14
3.21
3.22
3.31
3.32
3.43
3.44
Vsuvn zazendevice
PS-BL-2200
OFF
B
2 4
4.13
4.14
ON
4.21
4.22
Q3
4.31
4.32
L+
4.43
4.44
Control
circuit
of motor drive
Ovldac
obvod
motorovho
pohonu
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion

3P
Diagram
Circuit breaker with accessories
H11
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
3P
Specifications
Switched on
Switched off from switched on state: by the
releases or TEST push buttton
PS-BL-2200
3, 4
PS-BL-2200
State
of circuit breaker
1, 2
Cavity
Cavities in switching unit

BL1000SE...
BL1600SE...

Power circuit
connection sets are produced to provide more
connecting options, see page H6
generally, conductors from the supply are connected

to input terminals 1, 3, 5 and conductors from the load
to terminals 2, 4, 6; however, it is possible to reverse the
connection (exchanging input and output terminals
without limiting rated short-circuit ultimate breaking
capacity Icu)
in case of reversed connection, circuit breaker/

switch-disconnector must be fitted with ODBL-KS02
insulating barriers also on the side of terminals 2, 4,
6, for more detailed information see page H15

mechanically reinforced to avoid transferring of
electrodynamic force to the circuit breaker/switchdisconnector during short-circuit
the method of connecting the power circuit

must observe the deionization space of the circuit
breaker/ switch-disconnector, see page H15
Auxiliary circuits
switches, shunt trips or undervoltage releases are
connected using flexible Cu conductors with cross-section 0.5 1 mm2 directly to terminals on these devices
motor drive and auxiliary circuits of the plug-in or
withdrawable design are connected using a connector
H12
Recommended min. cross-section of cables and busbars (flexibars) for fixed and withdrawable design
Cables S [mm2]
Busbars W x H [mm]
In [A]
Cu
Al
250
120
150
400
185
240
500
2 x 150
2 x 185
630
2 x 185
2 x 240
800
2 x 240
1000
Cu
Al
3 x 240
50 x 10; 2 x 50 x 5
2 x 50 x 8
2 x 240
3 x 240
2 x 50 x 6
2 x 50 x 10
1300
3 x 240
4 x 240
2 x 50 x 10
1500 (1450) 1)
4 x 240
1600 (1450) 1)
2 x 50 x 101)
1)
- Withdrawable device connected by 2 x 50 x 10 mm Cu busbar can be loaded with max. 1450 A. For 1600 A loading, the withdrawable device must
be connected with 2 x 50 x 12 mm busbar.
Maximum circuit breaker/switch-disconnector loads

in accordance with ambient temperature
Mechanical reinforcement of conductors for

BL1000, BL1600
Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector BL1000S

- connection by Cu busbars 2 x 50 x 6 mm per pole
50 oC
55 oC
60 oC
65 oC
70 oC
1000 A
1000 A
1000 A
1000 A
980 A
Ik 25kA
Ik 65kA

50 oC
55 oC
60 oC
65 oC
70 oC
1400 A
1400 A
1340 A
1260 A
1200 A

50 oC
55 oC
60 oC
65 oC
70 oC
1600 A
1540 A
1460 A
1400 A
1320 A
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
3P

Type
Imax [A]
Type of cable
sector stranded
sector solid
round stranded
round solid
Busbars and cable
lugs
W x H [mm]
Dimensional
drawing
CS-BL-W010
800
2 x (70 240) Cu / Al
2 x (95 300) Cu / Al
2 x (50 185) Cu / Al
2 x (70 240) Cu / Al
page H17, H23
CS-BL-W011
500
70 240 Cu / Al
95 300 Cu / Al
50 185 Cu / Al
70 240 Cu / Al
page H17, H24
CS-BL-B002
1000
2 x 150 300 Cu / Al
2 x 150 300 Cu / Al
2 x 150 300 Cu / Al
2 x 150 300 Cu / Al
page H18, H24
CS-BL-B003
1500
3 x 150 300 Cu / Al
3 x 150 300 Cu / Al
3 x 150 300 Cu / Al
3 x 150 300 Cu / Al
page H18, H25
CS-BL-B004
1600
4 x 150 300 Cu / Al
4 x 150 300 Cu / Al
4 x 150 300 Cu / Al
4 x 150 300 Cu / Al
CS-BL-A022
1000
50 x ...
page H16
CS-BL-A021
1600
50 x ...
page H16
CS-BL-A010
1600
50 x ...
page H22
CS-BL-A020
1600
50 x ...
page H22
Front connection - busbars
page H19, H25
Rear connection
CS-BL-A021
OD-BL-KS03
OD-BL-KS01
10 Nm
CS-BL-A021
25 Nm
F
F
OD-BL-KS03
OD-BL-KS02
OD-BL-KS01
H13
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
3P

Front connection - 3 Cu/Al cables (not for BL1000SE305 switching unit)
CS-BL-W010
CS-BL-W011
CS-BL-W010
25 Nm
25 Nm
OD-BL-KS02
F
F
OD-BL-KS02
CS-BL-W010
F
CS-BL-W010
22 25 Nm
OD-BL-KS02
CS-BL-W011
Front connection - cables

2 Cu/Al cables - connecting sets CS-BL-B002
22 25 Nm
OD-BL-KS02
CS-BL-B00.
BL....SE305
nebo
OD-BL-KS02
OD-BL-KS09
CS-BL-B00.
25 Nm
OD-BL-KS09
nebo
H14
30 Nm
1,5 4 mm2 Cu..0,8 Nm
6 mm2 Cu..1,0 Nm
OD-BL-KS02
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
3P
Deionization spaces
A, B, C - minimum deionization space free of earthed metal parts
C=134,5
A=100
B=310
350
50
210
Applicable for operational voltage Ue 690 V a.c./d.c. (DC only for switch-disconnector)
FIXED DESIGN
- front connection
- rear connection
- terminals 1, 3, 5
(upper side)
- OD-BL-KS02 insulating barriers must always be installed on circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
- terminals 2, 4, 6
(lower side)
a) if circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected to the supply using terminals 2, 4, 6,

OD-BL-KS02 insulating barriers must always be installed on it
b) if circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected on lower side using clamp or block type
terminals, OD-BL-KS02 insulating barriers must always be installed on it
- terminals 1, 3, 5
(upper side)
- OD-BL-KS01 insulating cover or OD-BL-KS02 insulating barriers must always be installed on

circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
- we recommend installing OD-BL-KS03 insulating grommets with all sets for rear connection
- terminals 2, 4, 6
(lower side)
- if circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected to the supply using terminals 2, 4, 6,

OD-BL-KS01 insulation cover must always be installed on it
- we recommend installing OD-BL-KS03 insulating grommets with all sets for rear connection
- terminals 1, 3, 5
(upper side)
- withdrawable device is connected on upper side using clamp or block type terminals,
OD-BL-KS08 insulating barriers must always be installed
- in all other cases, we recommend installing OD-BL-KS04 insulating cover on upper side of the device
- terminals 2, 4, 6
(lower side)
- if withdrawable device is connected on lower side using clamp or block type terminals,
OD-BL-KS08 insulating barriers must always be installed
- in all other cases, we recommend installing OD-BL-KS04 insulating cover on lower side of
withdrawable device
WITHDRAWABLE DESIGN
- front connection
H15
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
3P
Dimensions
Drilling diagram
142,5
142.5
70
134,5
134.5
70
8 BL1000S
35,5
35.5
16 BL1600S
200
M8
314
350
100
56.5
148
21
51
240
300
72
15
494
148
80
72
18
35,5
35.5
50
70
16
70
134,5
134.5
210
157
12.5
50
25 0
+1
4 x 10.5
Connecting busbar modification
+1
25 0
Fixed design, rear connection (connecting sets CS-BL-A021, CS-BL-A022)

84,5
84.5
70
200
142,5
142.5
16
60
50
444
356
BL1600S
R4
436
510
BL1000S 8
60
70
Openings for insulation grommets
82
H16
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Fixed design, clamp terminals (connecting sets CS-BL-W010)
- combination of two sets arranged vertically can not be applied for switching unit BL1000SE305
250
3
350
627
750
200
134,5
134.5
138,5
138.5
Another possibility of connection
80
23
133
Fixed design, clamp terminals (connecting sets CS-BL-W010 and CS-BL-W011)

- combination of two sets arranged vertically can not be applied for switching unit BL1000SE305
250
3
350
138,5
138.5
627
750
200
134,5
134.5
80
136
H17
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S

Dimensions
Fixed design, block terminals (CS-BL-B002)
52.5
35.5
134.5
116
205
70
350
164
582
542
469
419
350
314
678
210
65
26
75.5
52.5
35.5
134.5
32
138
205
70
350
164
314
678
626
596
537
469
419
350
210
65
H18
26 26
107.5
3P
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
52.5
35.5
134.5
32
138
205
70
350
164
314
678
626
596
537
469
419
350
210
65
26 26
107.5
Hand drive lever - with locking (RP-BL-CP10, RP-BL-CP11)
46
RP-BL-CK10
28
60
148
R1
40
72
12
72
RP-BL-CP..
196
50
H19
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
3P
Dimensions
Fixed design, front hand drive, adjustable lever

46
BL...
RP-BL-CK10
RP-BL-CH10
RP-BL-CN..
min. 200
40
44x5.4
x 5,4
28 28
90
RP-BL-CP..
28 28
19.5
Zvs
dve rozvde
Switchboard
door hinge
SWITCHBOARD PANEL
198
90
50
min. 267
max. 500
Mechanical interlocking RP-BL-CB10
min. 200
260
88x5.4
x 5,4
28 28
314
2 x 40
28 28
50
H20
Switchboard
door hinge
Zvs
dve rozvde
70
190
70
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Fixed design, motor drive MP-BL-X...
Locking using three padlocks
R8
235
114
33
134.5
134,5
73
268.5
268,5
417
Fixed design, signalling unit SB-BL-0002
31
142.5
142,5
H21
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
3P
Dimensions
Withdrawable device ZV-BL-1600-300
Drilling diagram
292
314
100
MAX 140
180
18
125
508
350
140
75
35
70
210
174
248
Withdrawable device, front connection (connecting sets CS-BL-A010)

70
70
4 x M8
494
350
33.5
33,5
72
33,5
33.5
50
H22
27.5
27,5
16
70
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Withdrawable device, rear connection (connecting set CS-BL-A021)
Drilling diagram
100
125
50
230
MAX 140
16
106,5
106.5
140
35
Withdrawable device, clamp terminals (connecting set CS-BL-W010)
138.5
138,5
627
350
250
31
80
133
H23
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S

Dimensions
Withdrawable device, clamp terminals (connecting set CS-BL-W010 and CS-BL-W011)
138.5
138,5
627
350
250
128
80
Withdrawable device, block terminals (CS-BL-B002)
Working position
137
45
205
28
350
116
750
582
200
65
26
68
H24
3P
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
137
32
45
205
750
138
626
350
28
65
26
26
100

137
205
750
138
350
28
626
32
45
65
26
26
100
H25
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
3P
Dimensions
Withdrawable design
Working position
Inspection position
295
340
180
508
350
65
292
210
248
75
75
174
174
239
H26
45
284
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
3P
Dimensions
Working position
Inspection position
366
321
316
271
Withdrawable design, motor drive MP-BL-X230
Working position
Inspection position
343.5
343,5
282.5
282,5
33
388.5
388,5
33
327.5
327,5
H27
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
3P
Description
Withdrawable design of the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
is intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid
exchange of the circuit breaker, frequent checking and both
visual and conductive disconnection of the circuit are needed.
withdrawable device must be fitted with the connecting sets:
CS-BL-A010 2x - for front connection or CS-BL-A020 2x - for
rear connection
set of mounting bolts is used to fasten the withdrawable
device into the switchboard OD-BL-MS02, see page H9
Withdrawable device
ZV-BL-1600-300

remote signalling of circuit breaker`s inserted position (position of locking is not signalled)
inspection position
locking withdrawable device against inserting circuit
breaker, locking of circuit breaker in withdrawn (checking)
position locking by means of padlocks

3. removed
Power circuit
- connecting set CS-BL-A010 is used for connecting with
busbars or cable lugs (front connection) or CS-BL-A020
connecting set (rear connection)
- for connection using cables, it is necessary in addition to a
connection set CS-BL-A010 or CS-BL-A020 to use connecting sets, see page H6
- the method of power circuit connection must observe
recommendations, see page H12 as well as deionization
space, see page H15
Auxiliary circuits
These are connected using 15-wire OD-BL-KA01 cable.
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design
Auxiliary circuits
OD-BL-KA01

Signalling of position SO-BL-0010
Withdrawable device can be fitted with up to four switches
for signalling the position of the circuit breaker inserted see
the table.
SO-BL-0010
States of switches SO-BL-0010 in withdrawable device

Circuit breaker position
State of switch
1
Inserted (arrested and not arrested)

Other positions
0 1
1 0
Signalling of positionn
SO-BL-0010
Specifications SO-BL-0010
Type
Ue
Rated frequency
fn
Ie /Ue
S
SO-BL-0010
230 V a.c.
50/60 Hz
6 A /230 V a.c.
001
0.5 1 mm2
IP20
For wiring diagram of circuit breaker in withdrawable device with accessories see page H11
H28
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
WITHDRAWABLE DEVICE
3P
Recommended connection of circuit
breaker in withdrawable design with
motor drive
Inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker with motor drive

- each time before inserting or withdrawing the circuit breaker we recommend at
first to run the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the motor drive to the MANUAL position
- more operating information can be found in the operating instructions
- in case of infringement of this procedure or failing to follow the recommended
wiring could mean that the circuit breaker will not successfully switch on at the
first attempt
Ovldac
obvod
motorovho
pohonu
Control
circuit
of motor drive
Q3
L+
ON
MANUA
MANUAL
AU TO
OFF
B
Motorov
pohon
Motor drive
4.43
4.31
Wiring diagram description

Symbol Description
NC
PS-BL-2200
X3
4.21
4.13
Spnae
Switches
relativn
relative
NO
SSI
C
10
motor drive MP-BL-X...
motor
storage device
X3
SSI


ON
switch on button
OFF
switch off button
Q3

4.44
4.32
4.22
X3
4.14
MP
MP
cavity.4
No.4
dutina
N-
Changes in states of switches in cavities of switching unit when inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker
State of circuit breaker before insertion/withdrawal
State of switches before insertion withdrawn position
State of switches before withdrawal inserted position
3, 4
1, 2
3, 4
PS-BL-2200
1, 2
PS-BL-2200
Cavity
PS-BL-2200
PS-BL-2200
State of circuit breaker after insertion/

withdrawal
State of switches after insertion
- inserted position
State of switches after withdrawal
- withdrawn position
Switched on

Switched off from switched on state: by

the releases or TEST push buttton
H29
Modeion
BL1600S
3P
Description
Type
DTV3
L

- signalling of meeting parameters
I > 80 % Ir a I > 110 % Ir
In [A]
Ir [A]
restart
250, 260
Ir
0.8
275, 290
1.5
305, 315
345, 360
SE-BL-0630-DTV3
630
400, 435
Irm
2
T(0)
T(t)
min
Ir
max
60
30
Ir
2000
400, 435
Irm
1.25
455, 480
1000
10
10
575, 630
SE-BL-.....-DTV3
5000
500
500, 550
200
575, 610
2
3
5
2
1
SE-BL-1000-DTV3
100
1000
630, 685
T(0)
T(t)
50
t [min]
5
2
t [s]
630 A
1000 A
1250 A
1000 A
7
12
800, 870
10
5
9
720, 760
20
In=
In=
In=
In=
4.5
7.5
500, 550
2.5
6
455, 480
10000
Irm [kA]
15
910, 1000
3
500, 550
1.5
0. 5
577, 610
0. 2
630, 685
0. 1
0.05
1.5 2.0 2.5
0.8
In = 630 A
722, 760
4.5 6.0 7.5 10
SE-BL-1250-DTV3
Irm [kA]
1250
800, 866
0.02
0.01
0.05
1.25
In = 1000 A
2.0
5.0
3.0
9
15
1100, 1155
7.0 9.0 12 15
7
12
909, 1000
x In
0. 1
T(0)
T(t)
18
1200, 1250
Irm [kA]
0.02
0.01
x In
0. 1
630, 685
0.05
3.0
1.5
In = 1250 A
5.0
7.0 9.0 12 15
18
720, 800
Irm [kA]
0.02
870, 910
0.01
x In
0. 1
0.05
4.0
2.0
In = 1600 A
6.0 8.0
11 14
Irm [kA]
1000, 1100
SE-BL-1600-DTV3
20
1600
1155, 1200
17
0.02
1250, 1300
0.01
0. 1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
1375, 1445
1500, 1600
Reduced current setting Ir, resp. rated current

according to the protected device
Switching ON/OFF of
the thermal memory
H30
6
T(0)
T(t)
8
11
14
17
20
BL1600S
Modeion

3P
Type
In [A]
Description
- 4 in mode M (motors protection)
- undercurrent release - in case of failure of one or two
phases in mode M the switch off delay is 4 s
- signalling of meeting parameters I> 80 % Ir andI> 110 % Ir
SE-BL-0630-MTV8
SE-BL-1000-MTV8
tr [s] (7.2 x Ir)
250, 260
1 (TV 1)
275, 290
3 (TV 3)
305, 315
10 (TV 10)
345, 360
30 (TV 30)
400, 435
3 (M 3)
455, 480
8 (M 8)
630
MTV8
L
Ir [A]
500, 550
15 (M 15)
575, 630
25 (M 25)
400, 435
1 (TV 1)
455, 480
3 (TV 3)
500, 550
10 (TV 10)
575, 610
30 (TV 30)
630, 685
3 (M 3)
720, 760
8 (M 8)
1000
Ir
tr
800, 870
15 (M 15)
910, 1000
25 (M 25)
500, 550
1 (TV 1)
577, 610
3 (TV 3)
630, 685
10 (TV 10)
722, 760
30 (TV 30)
800, 866
3 (M 3)
restart
Irm [kA]
0.8
1.5
2.0
T(0)
T(t)
2.5
4.5
6
7.5
10
1.25
2
3
T(0)
T(t)
5
7
9
12
15
Irm
I
SE-BL-1250-MTV8
SE-BL-1600-MTV8

protected device
Choice of characteristic type.

1250
909, 1000
8 (M 8)
1100, 1155
15 (M 15)
1200, 1250
25 (M 25)
630, 685
1 (TV 1)
720, 800
3 (TV 3)
870, 910
10 (TV 10)
1000, 1100
30 (TV 30)
1155, 1200
3 (M 3)
1250, 1300
8 (M 8)
1375, 1445
15 (M 15)
1500, 1600
25 (25 M)
1600
1.5
3
5
T(0)
T(t)
7
9
12
15
18
2
4
6
T(0)
T(t)
8
11
14
17
20
H31
Modeion
BL1600S
3P
Tripping characteristic SE-BL-....-MTV8

Characteristic "TV"
10000
min
5000
Ir
Characteristic "M"
10000
TV
max
60
30
2000
Irm
30
1000
10
10
500
max
tr
Ir
2000
Irm
500
25
5
200
min
1000
5
2
Ir
5000
60
tr
Ir
200
2
100
tr
30
50
t [min]
20
25
20
10
10
In=
In=
In=
In=
5
2
630 A
1000 A
1250 A
1600 A
In=
In=
In=
In=
3
2
15
15
10
10
t [s]
0. 5
630 A
1000 A
1250 A
1600 A
1
0. 5
0. 2
0. 1
0. 1
0.05
1.5 2.0 2.5
0.8
In= 630 A
4.5 6.0 7.5 10
0. 2
0.05
Irm [kA]
0.02
In= 630 A
0.8
In=1000 A
1.25
In=1250 A
1.5
1.5 2.0 2.5
4.5 6.0 7.5 10
Irm [kA]
7.0 9.0 12 15
Irm [kA]
0.02
0.01
0.01
x In
0.05
1.25
In=1000 A
2.0
5.0
3.0
7.0 9.0 12 15
x In
0.05
Irm [kA]
0.02
2.0
5.0
3.0
0.02
0.01
0.01
x In
0.05
3.0
1.5
In=1250 A
5.0
7.0 9.0 12 15
18
x In
0.05
Irm [kA]
0.02
3.0
5.0
7.0 9.0 12 15
18
Irm [kA]
0.02
0.01
0.05
4.0
2.0
6.0 8.0
11 14
0.01
x In
17
In=1600 A
20
0.05
x In
17
Irm [kA]
4.0
2.0
In=1600 A
0.02
6.0 8.0
11 14
20
Irm [kA]
0.02
0.01
0.01
0. 1
H32
tr
50
t [min]
30
t [s]
100
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
0. 1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
BL1600S
Modeion
3P
Protection of complicated loads or those not Specifications - adjustable

specified in advance
Type
Description
- delay setting at 7.2 x Ir (possibility to set characteristic with
inclination I5t)
- setting of short-circuit release delay including the time of
the delay
- suitable for selective protection
In [A]
SE-BL-630-U001
tr
SE-BL-1000-U001
tv [ms]
250, 260,
0.5
50, 100
275, 290,
200, 300
400, 600
I t ON
Irm
345, 360,
400, 435,
10
455, 480,
15
on
T(0)
1.5
2
800, 1000
2.5
4.5
50, 100
200, 300
6
off
T(t)
7.5
400, 600
575, 630
25
800, 1000
10
400, 435,
0.5
50, 100
1.25
455, 480,
200, 300
500, 550,
400, 600
575, 610,
630, 685,
10
720, 760,
15
on
T(0)
2
3
800, 1000
5
7
50, 100
200, 300
9
off
T(t)
12
800, 870,
20
10
400, 600
910, 1000
25
800, 1000
15
500, 550,
0.5
50, 100
1.5
200, 300
400, 600
3
5
722, 760,
800, 866,
10
909, 1000,
15
on
T(0)
3
5
800, 1000
1250
9
50, 100
200, 300
12
off
T(t)
15
1100, 1155,
20
10
400, 600
1200, 1250
25
800, 1000
18
630, 685
0.5
50, 100
720, 800
200, 300
400, 600
1000, 1100,
1155, 1200,
10
1250, 1300,
15
on
T(0)
4
6
800, 1000
1600
11
50, 100
200, 300,
1375, 1445,
20
10
400, 600
1500, 1600
25
800, 1000
Switching ON/OFF of the thermal memory Setting of short-circuit release delay
Delay setting at 7.2 Ir
0.8
10
870, 910,
Reduced current setting Ir, resp. rated

current according to the protected device
Irm [kA]
20
630, 685,
SE-BL-1600-U001
restart
500, 550,
577, 610,
SE-BL-1250-U001
I2t
1000
tv
I t OFF
630
Ir
Irmv
tr [s] (7.2 x Ir)
305, 315,
Tripping characteristic setting of U001 releases

L
Irmv [A] = (n x Ir)
Ir
14
off
T(t)
17
20
Delayed short-circuit release setting
H33
Modeion
BL1600S
3P
Tripping characteristic SE-BL-....-U001

SE-BL-....-U001
10000
min
SE-BL-....-U001
10000
max
Ir
5000
60
2000
tv
Irm
50
10
5
t [s]
1
0. 5
tr [s]
I
1.5 2.0 2.5
0.8
0. 1
0.05
1000
tr [s]
0.5
0. 2
4.5 6.0 7.5 10
0.05
4.5 6.0 7.5 10

50
In = 630 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
0.5
I
1.5 2.0 2.5
0.8
0. 1
50
In = 630 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
1.25
0. 1
0.05
2.0
5.0
3.0
x In
7.0 9.0 12 15
1.25
0. 1
2.0
5.0
3.0
0.05
50
In = 1000 A
x In
7.0 9.0 12 15
50
In = 1000 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
I rm [kA]
0.02
3.0
1.5
0. 1
0.05
5.0
x In
7.0 9.0 12 15 18
3.0
1.5
0. 1
0.05
50
In = 1250 A
5.0
x In
7.0 9.0 12 15 18
50
In = 1250 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
I rm [kA]
0.02
4.0
2.0
0. 1
0.05
6.0 8.0
x In
11 14 17 20
4.0
2.0
0. 1
0.05
50
In = 1600 A
6.0 8.0
x In
11 14 17 20
50
In = 1600 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
I rm [kA]
0.02
0. 1
H34
1
0. 5
0.5
(I t=OFF)
tv [ms]
0.5
0. 2
t [s]
1000
I n= 630 A
I n =1000 A
I n =1250 A
I n =1600 A
20
(I t=ON)
10
50
t [min]
I n= 630 A
I n =1000 A
I n =1250 A
I n =1600 A
20
Irm
100
tv [ms]
t [min]
tv
200
2
100
Irm v
500
tr
Ir
2000
1000
10
500
200
Irm v
30
5
2
tr
Ir
1000
10
max
Ir
5000
60
30
min
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
0. 1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
BL1600S
Modeion
3P
Tripping characteristic SE-BL-....-U001

SE-BL-....-U001
10000
min
SE-BL-....-U001
10000
max
Ir
5000
60
tr
Ir
2000
Irm v
tv
Irm
30
1000
50
10
5
50
t [min]
I n= 630 A
I n =1000 A
I n =1250 A
I n =1600 A
20
100
25
25
I n= 630 A
I n =1000 A
I n =1250 A
I n =1600 A
20
10
5
25
25
tr [s]
100
t [min]
t [s]
1000
1000
0. 5
1.5 2.0 2.5
0.8
0. 1
0.05
0. 2
4.5 6.0 7.5 10
0. 2
(I t=OFF)
0. 5
tv [ms]
t [s]
(I t=ON)
Irm
200
2
tr [s]
tv
500
200
Irm v
1000
10
500
tr
Ir
2000
tv [ms]
10
max
Ir
5000
60
30
min
1.5 2.0 2.5
0.8
0. 1
4.5 6.0 7.5 10
0.05
50
In = 630 A
50
In = 630 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
I rm [kA]
0.02
1.25
0. 1
0.05
2.0
5.0
3.0
x In
7.0 9.0 12 15
1.25
0. 1
2.0
5.0
3.0
0.05
50
In = 1000 A
50
In = 1000 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
x In
7.0 9.0 12 15
I rm [kA]
0.02
3.0
1.5
0. 1
0.05
5.0
x In
7.0 9.0 12 15 18
3.0
1.5
0. 1
5.0
50
In = 1250 A
50
In = 1250 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
x In
7.0 9.0 12 15 18
0.05
I rm [kA]
0.02
4.0
2.0
0. 1
0.05
6.0 8.0
x In
11 14 17 20
4.0
2.0
0. 1
6.0 8.0
0.05
50
In = 1600 A
In = 1600 A
I rm [kA]
0.02
x In
11 14 17 20
50
I rm [kA]
0.02
0. 1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
0. 1
0.2
0.5
10
20
x In
50
H35
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
SIGNALLING UNITS
3P
Description
SB-BL-0002 signalling unit is a modular accessory for the
SB-BL-0002
BL1000S and BL1600S circuit breakers and collaborates with

the electronic releases SE-BL-.-DTV3, SE-BL-.-MTV8
and SE-BL-....-U001
it is intended for applications in automated-control systems
the unit signals reaching a certain current value in a circuit
and tripping of the circuit breaker by releases (dependent,
independent, undercurrent)
- user has an option to set up (by steps, using a rotary
switch) the value of current in the circuit he wants to
be advised on
- the options are 70; 80; 90; 100; 120; 140; 160 or 180 % Ir
(for more details see the table below)
local signalling of the state of the circuit breaker and the
protected circuitry is carried out by LED indicators on the
front panel of the unit
the information on the state of the circuit breaker is
transferred from the release to the signalling unit by means
of optical coupling
remote signalling of the state of the circuit breaker and the

protected circuitry is ensured by a relay, the make and break
contacts of which are pulled into the terminal strip on the unit:
- relays to indicate tripping of dependent or undercurrent and
independent releases have storage - they do not change
their state after disconnection from supply voltage
- after the storage relay is activated by tripping of the release,
it is necessary to reset the relay using the front panel RESET switch or by an external push button remotely - reset
is functional in case the supply voltage is connected to the
signalling block
the supply voltage values are given in the table
the main power supply and the reset circuit are not
concurrently conformable with conditions for safe
separation of the circuits
the external RESET push button must be connected using
a screened cable or a twisted wire with maximum resistence
of the loop 100 Ohm
The signalling unit will not work without power supply!
Specifications
Type
SB-BL-0002

Short-circuit protection
Rated frequency
Current draw (rms value) max. at Ue

(of relay contact)
Ue
tube fuse
fn
12 V a.c./d.c.
24 V a.c./d.c.
48 V a.c./d.c.
110 V a.c./d.c.
230 V a.c./220 V d.c.
Ie / Ue AC-1
Ie / Ue DC-1
S
12 230 V a.c. / d.c.

T1,6 A
50/60 Hz
370 mA
170 mA
100 mA
60 mA
50 mA
8 A / 230 V a.c.
0.25 A / 220 V d.c., 8 A / 30 V d.c.
0.5 1 mm2
DIMENSIONS see page H23

Power circuit status indication
Signalling
Reaching
Relay contacts
LED
< 70 % Ir
110 % Ir
70; 80; 90; 100; 120; 140; 160; 180
Settings
+
+
+
+
By dependent/Undercurrent
+/+
Independent
Tripping by release
Connection
1,2
6,7
9,10,11
12,13,14
15,16,17
18,19,20
H36
- supply
- external RESET push button
- relay contacts indicating preset Ir
- relay contacts indicating reaching 110 % Ir
- relay contacts indicating tripping by dependent or undercurrent releases
- relay contacts indicating tripping by independent release (instantaneous or delayed ones)
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
AUXILIARY SWITCHES
3P
Specifications
Type
Ue
Ui
Rated frequency
fn
Ie /Ue AC-15
Ie /Ue DC-13
Ith
Thermal current
PS-BL-2200
PS-BL-2200-Au1)
60 500 V a.c.
60 240 V d.c.
500 V
5 60 V a.c.
5 60 V d.c.
500 V
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
6 A/60 V 240 V, 3 A/400 V, 1.5 A/500 V

1 A/60 V, 0.7 A/110 V, 0.3 A/240 V
6A
AC-12, DC-12 0.004 0.5 A/5 V,

0.004 0.01/60 V
0.5 A
22
Connection cross-section S
0.5 1 mm2
IP20
IP20

(connected switch)
1)
22
0.5 1 mm2
- PS-BL-....- Au is not suitable to control electromagnetic loads
Contact types
22
break + switching
2+2
Names and functions of switches according to their location in cavities

Switch name
Switch function
Cavity 3, 4
Relative switch
to indicate tripping of the circuit breaker by releases, TEST push button or by motor
Cavity 1, 2
Auxiliary switch
to indicate the position of the main contacts
Spnae
Switches
cavity
dutinaNo.2
.2
4.21
4.31
4.43
4.32
4.44
4.13
3.43
cavity
dutinaNo.3
.3
4.14
PS-BL-2200
3.31
3.44
3.14
4.22
3.21
3.32
3.13
2.43
PS-BL-2200
2.31
2.44
2.14
relativn
relative
3.22
2.21
2.32
2.13
1.43
PS-BL-2200
1.31
1.44
1.14
2.22
1.21
1.32
cavity
dutinaNo.1
.1
relativn
relative
pomocn
auxiliary
PS-BL-2200
1.13
pomocn
auxiliary
1.22

BL1000SE305
BL1600SE305
Position of switch
cavity
dutinaNo.4
.4
H37
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
SHUNT TRIPS
3P
Specifications
Type
SV-BL-X
Ue
Rated frequency
fn
24, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V a.c.

24, 48, 110, 220 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
< 2.5 VA
<2W
Characteristic
20 ms
Loading time
0.5 1 mm2
IP20

Main contacts
2
4
6
1
3
5
20
1
0
Auxiliary switch
1
1.32
14
1.22
2.22
2.32
1.31
13
1.21
2.21
2.31
3.44
3.14
4.14
4.44
3.43
3.13
4.13
4.43
3.32
3.22
4.22
4.32
3.31
3.21
4.21
4.31
30
0
Auxiliary switch
30
0
Relative switch
30
0
Relative switch
30
10
10 3
50
00
10 2
50
0
1 5
B1
SV-BL-X...
L+
1.43
3.3
1.13
2.13
2.43
10
50

BL1000SE305
BL1600SE305
1.44
3.4
1.14
2.14
2.44
t [ms]

Reaction time of the shunt trip

B2

SV
Switched on
0
>50
N-
OK
t (ms)
Cooperation of motor drive and shunt trip

circuit breaker is done by motor drive and shunt trip at once.
The following time delays have to be kept between the
disconnection of voltage from the shunt trip and the control
HK
1
0
70
SV
SP
0
>50
20 1500
1
0
IMP ON
t (ms)
H38

Symbol
Description
HK
Main contacts
OK
IMP ON
SV
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
3P
Specifications
Type
SP-BL-X
Ue
Rated frequency
fn
24, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V a.c.

24, 48, 110, 220 V d.c.
50/60 Hz
< 2.5 VA
<2W
U 0.85 Ue it is possible to switch on the circuit breaker
Characteristic1)
20 ms
Loading time
0.5 1 mm2
IP20

5
1)
- tripping of the undervoltage release can be delayed using the delay unit BZ-BX-X230-A, see page P2
Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector switching off by undervoltage release

Main contacts
2
4
6
1
3
5
20
1
0
Auxiliary switch
1
1.32
14
1.22
2.22
2.32
1.31
13
1.21
2.21
2.31
3.44
3.14
4.14
4.44
3.43
3.13
4.13
4.43
3.32
3.22
4.22
4.32
3.31
3.21
4.21
4.31
30
0
Auxiliary switch
30
0
Relative switch
30
0
Relative switch
30
10
1 5
10 3
50
00
10 2
50
0
SP-BL-X...
A1
L+
1.43
3.3
1.13
2.13
2.43
10
50

BL1000SE305
BL1600SE305
1.44
3.4
1.14
2.14
2.44
t [ms]
Reaction time of the undervoltage release

A2

SP
Switched on
N-

>50
1
OK
OK
t (ms)
Cooperation of motor drive and undervoltage release

circuit breaker is done by motor drive and undervoltage
release at once. The following time delays have to be kept
between bringing the voltage to the undervoltage release and
the control impulse for switch on of the motor drive:
HK

Symbol
Description
HK
Main contacts
OK
IMP ON
SP
1
0
70
SP
1
0
>50
1
0
20 1500
IMP ON
t (ms)
H39
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
HAND DRIVES
3P
Description
The hand drive is the accessory of the circuit breaker/switchdisconnector which enable circuit breakers BL1000S and
BL1600S to be controlled locally by applying rotary movement
on the lever, e.g. for switching electrical equipment on and off.
Modular conception of the drives enables simple mounting on
the circuit breaker after the circuit breaker cover of cavities is
removed. The drive and its accessories are ordered separately
according to your choice, see page H8.
Fig. 1 - DIMENSIONS see page H19

The hand drive enables to control the circuit breaker
through the front panel or through the switchboard door, the
outlet for the operating shaft has the IP44 or IP66 degree of
protection for bearings.
Hand drive control lever can be fitted with an extension
shaft which makes possible to control the circuit breaker also
in deeper switchboards.
In order to enhance safety for the operator of the electrical
equipment, the mechanism of the drive is furnished with
locking system preventing the switchboard door from
opening when the circuit breaker is in closed position.
When the circuit breaker is in position for manual open, the
drive handle can be locked up using the built-in cylinder type
lock (FAB) and by up to three padlocks with shank diameter
up to 6+8 mm.
When the drive lever is in position manual open, it is
possible to remove the handle.
The circuit breaker with hand drives can be fitted with
mechanical interlocking system, see page H41.
Fig. 2 - DIMENSIONS see page H20
Specifications
Type
Description
Colour
Locking while the circuit breaker

is in OFF state
Degree of
protection

circuit breaker state switched on or off by release
Length [mm]
RP-BL-CK10
Hand drive unit
yes
RP-BL-CP10
Hand drive lever
black
yes
RP-BL-CP11
Hand drive lever
red
yes
RP-BL-CN10
Hand drive bearing
IP44
yes
RP-BL-CN20
Hand drive bearing
IP66
yes
RP-BL-CH10
Extension shaft
365
H40
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
3P
RP-BL-CB10 Mechanical interlocking
Both circuit breakers must be equipped with a hand drive (at
least one with a hand drive unit and hand drive lever), see
page H40. In order to use the interlocking, it is absolutely
Fig. 1 and 2.
314
Enables mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers so

that they cannot both be tripped simultaneously, but only one
of them at a time.
Interlocking can be used between two BL1000S or BL1600S
circuit breakers or between a BL1000S and BL1600S circuit breaker.
70
50
Fig. 1
190
70
Fig. 2
MB-BL-PP07 Mechanical blocking with Bowden cable

Enables mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers so
that they cannot both be tripped simultaneously but only one
of them at a time.
Interlocking can be used between two BL1000S or BL1600S
circuit breakers or between a BL1000S and BL1600S circuit breaker.
Type of mechanical interlocking
Combination of circuit breaker/

switch-disconnecter designs
MB-BL-PP07
fixed - fixed
MB-BL-PV08
fixed - withdrawable
MB-BL-VV06
withdrawable withdrawable
For interlocking, circuit breakers can be equipped with a hand

or motor drive. In order to use the interlocking, it is absolutely
necessary to comply with the dimensions that are shown on page
H42. Mechanical interlocking allows the first circuit breaker to be
switched on and the second one to be in loaded position.
Fig. 3 - Mechanical blocking with Bowden cable between fixed and withdrawable BL circuit breakers
H41
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
3P
Mechanical interlocking - option for locating the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
47
130
Rmin=75
,3
Rmin=75
125,9
140
31
72,5
Combination of circuit breakers designs
Distance between the circuit breakers X [mm] 1)
fixed - fixed
or
100 1450
fixed - withdrawable
or
50 1400
withdrawable - withdrawable
or
50 1350
1)
- TECHNICAL INFORMATION see Instruction for use
H42
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
MOTOR DRIVES
3P
Description
ON/OFF).
Usage in industrial applications e.g. switching of stand by
units, synchronization of two sources or wherever the automated
and unmanned operation of electric devices is needed.
can be used.
- AUTO mode remote control. The circuit breaker is
controlled by buttons for electric switch off/on. The
circuit breaker can be switched off by TEST button on the
overcurrent release.
the green button on the motor drive front panel and
switched off using the red button on the overcurrent
release. Electric switch on is blocked. Electric switch off
is functional. The accumulation of energy can be done by
- possibility of remote signalling of the state of the switch
AUTO/MANUAL.
The presence of control voltage Ue is signalled by green LED.

If the circuit breaker is not stored by motor drive untill 30
s., e.g. due to undervoltage, extremely low temperature,

mechanical or electrical failure, the LED diod on the front
panel signals red. During the signalling of the red LED, the
drive is disconnected electronically, and cannot be remotely
controlled. In order to restore remote control it is necessary
to disconnect the drive for 30 s. At tripping of the circuit
breaker by the overcurrent release, by auxiliary releases, or
by TEST push button (in drive mode AUTO), the motor drive
automatically accumulates energy (circuit breaker loading),
motor drive is then ready to switch on the circuit breakers.
Drive can be locked in off position by lamellar lock (it is
part of the drive with two keys) or by up to three padlocks
(shank diameter max. 4 7 mm).
Drive can by furnished with the counter of cycles.
Switch on button can be covered and sealed (OD-BL-KT01).
The transparent part of front panel enables to determine
the state of circuit breaker according to the lever position.
Drive can be connected by terminal block with screws or
by means of multi-pole connector with cavities (in order to
connect cables special tongs have to be used).
Specifications
Type
Operating voltage
Rated frequency
Control impulse length for switching off
Time to storage (loading) of motor drive at
DIMENSIONS see page H23
Time to switch-off of circuit breaker

Frequency of cycles instant successive ON/OFF
Input power
Protection
of the change-over switch AUTO/MANUAL
1)
Ue
fn
Ue 230 V a.c.
220 V d.c.
Ue 230 V a.c.
220 V d.c.
AC
DC
110 V a.c., 230 V a.c.
110 V d.c., 220 V d.c.
Ie / Ue
MP-BL-X, MP-BL-X-P
110, 230 V a.c.
110, 220 V d.c.
50 / 60 Hz
>20 1500 ms1)
>20 ms 1)
<70 ms
14 s
18 s
10 s
12 s
2 cycles/min
8 cycles
10 000 cycles
200 VA
200 W
LPN-4C-1, LPN-2C-1
LPN-DC-4C-1, LPN-DC-2C-1
6 A/250 V a.c.
- for sequence of control impulses see page H46
Cover of switch on button OD-BL-KT01
H43
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
MOTOR DRIVES
3P
Specifications
Main contacts
2
4
6
1
3
5
Main contacts
70
2
4
6
1
3
5
Auxiliary switch
1.44
3.4
1.14
2.14
2.44
1.43
3.3
1.13
2.13
2.43
1.32
14
1.22
2.22
2.32
1.31
13
1.21
2.21
2.31
3.44
3.14
4.14
4.44
3.43
3.13
4.13
4.43
3.32
3.22
4.22
4.32
3.31
3.21
4.21
4.31
10000 12000
1
Auxiliary switch
60
1.44
3.4
1.14
2.14
2.44
1.43
3.3
1.13
2.13
2.43
1.31
13
1.21
2.21
2.31
Relative switch
1.32
14
1.22
2.22
2.32
3.43
3.13
4.13
4.43
Relative switch
3.44
3.14
4.14
4.44
3.32
3.22
4.22
4.32
3.31
3.21
4.21
4.31
0
Auxiliary switch
60
10000 12000
0
Auxiliary switch
10000 12000
0
Relative switch
0
Relative switch
t [ms]
t [ms]
Diagram
- electrically by ON and OFF push button

Ovldac
obvod
motorovho
pohonu
Control
circuit
of motor drive
Lever position of circuit breaker/switchdisconnector
Q3
Switched on
L+
Switched off by releases or

by TEST push button
ON

OFF
B
Wiring diagram description

Motorov
Motor drivepohon
Spnae
Switches
NC
4.43
4.31
4.21
PS-BL-2200
X3
4.13
relativn
relative
NO
SSI
C
4.44
10
4.32
4.22
6
X3
4.14
MP
dutinaNo.4
.4
cavity
N-
H44
Symbol
Description
MP
motor
storage device
X3
SSI
recommended wiring of the control circuits - it is not a part of motor drive
ON
switch on button
OFF
switch off button
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker - see page H43
BL1000S, BL1600S
Modeion
MOTOR DRIVES
3P
Specifications
Switching off of the circuit breaker with motor drive
by shunt trip or undervoltage release

Lever position of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
Main contacts
2
4
6
1
3
5
Switched on
20
1
0
Switched off by releases or by TEST push button
Auxiliary switch
1.44
3.4
1.14
2.14
2.44
1.43
3.3
1.13
2.13
2.43
1.32
14
1.22
2.22
2.32
1.31
13
1.21
2.21
2.31
30

0
Auxiliary switch
Description diagram
30
0
Relative switch
3.44
3.14
4.14
4.44
3.43
3.13
4.13
4.43
3.32
3.22
4.22
4.32
3.31
3.21
4.21
4.31
30
8000
0
Relative switch
8000
30
0
t [ms]
Symbol
Description
MP
motor
storage device
X3
SSI
recommended wiring of the control circuits - not included in motor drive order
ON
switch on button
OFF
switch off button
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker - see page H43
Diagram
Circuit breaker switching on by motor drive (elektrically by ON push button)

and tripping by undervoltage release
Control
circuit of
motor drive
Ovldac
obvod
Control
circuit of
motor drive
Ovldac
obvod
Q3
Q3
L+
L+
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Pom.
spout
Auxiliary
releases
Motorov
Motor drivepohon
Spnae
Switches
or
NO
SSI
C
A1
B1
or
cavity
dutinaNo.4
.4
N-
6
X3
N-
10
4.44
B2
cavity
dutinaNo.5
.5
4.32
A2
4.22
4.14
10
4.44
4.32
6
X3
4.22
MP
4.14
MP
4.21
SV -BL-X...
NC
SV -BL-X...
NO
SP-BL-X...
X3
SSI
B1
4.13
A1
PS-BL-2200
4.43
4.31
SP-BL-X...
NC
4.21
Pom. spout
Auxiliary
releases
relativn
relative
PS-BL-2200
X3
4.13
relativn
relative
4.43
Spnae
Switches
4.31
Motorov
Motor drivepohon
A2
N-
B2
cavity .5
No.5
dutina
cavity
dutinaNo.4
.4
N-
H45
Modeion
BL1000S, BL1600S
MOTOR DRIVES
3P
Specifications
10000 12000
HK
Circuit breaker switching off by overcurrent release, shunt trip or

undervoltage release and switching on by motor drive
70
70
HK
10000 12000
PS
RS
> 20000
>100
20
IMP OFF
> 20000
20 1500
IMP ON

Switched on
Switched off by releases or by TEST push button
Lever position of circuit breaker/switch-disconnector
20 1500
IMP ON
1
0
t [ms ]
H46
1
0
> 12000
8000
> 10000
1
0
R OFF
Symbol
Description
HK
main contacts
PS
auxiliary switch
RS
relative switch
R OFF
IMP ON
IMP OFF
t [ms ]
Modeion
OTHER ACCESSORIES OF MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Other accessories
of moulded case circuit breakers
Modeion
DELAY UNIT
Type
Product code
BZ-BX-X230-A
36696
Description
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
0.12
enables to delay the undervoltage release tripping of circuit breakers

1
Circuit breaker
BC160
BD250, BH630
BL1000, BL1600
1. level
1.0
0.6
0.5
Delay [s]
2. level
2.0
1.2
1.0
3. level
3.2
1.9
1.5
Ue
Ue [AC] Ue [DC]
2
1
U<
Ue
A2
2
1
6
5
STOP
2
1
4
3
U<
A2
Ue [AC] Ue [DC]
U<
A2
A1
U<
A2
86
45
STOP
A1
A2
65.5
U<
Ue
STOP
A1
Ue [AC] Ue [DC]
Ue
A1
Ue [AC] Ue [DC]
88
Ue [AC] Ue [DC]
STOP
U<
A1
A2
5.3
STOP
A1
52.5
Ue
Ue [AC] Ue [DC]
STOP
BZ-BX-X230-A
Ue
24
44
62
AUTOMATIC STANDBY UNIT MODI

Type
Description
MODI ZA...
- enables two power supplies to be connected safely to one loading

exclusive of parallel run of the power supplies
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
10
- for circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors Modeion and Arion WL
For more detailed information and documentation contact our technical support No.: +420 465 672 191 or visit our websites www.oez.com
P2
Other accessories
Modeion
TESTER OF OVERCURRENT RELEASES OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Type
Product code
ZES4
17273
Description
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
Tester of overcurrent releases of circuit breakers BD250.., BH630..,

3.75
1
BL1000S and BL1600S
- service device for checking the functionality of electronic overcurrent releases and switching units for Modeion circuit breakers
- tests:
- overcurrent releases
- functionality of switching unit tripping mechanism
- current transformers
- tests overcurrent releases: L001, DTV3, MTV8, MTV9, U001
- tests switching units for circuit breakers: BD250N, BD250S, BH630N, BH630S, BL1000S, BL1600S
Tester must be connected to an external power supply.
Power supply voltage of tester is 230 V a.c.
For more detailed information and documentation contact our technical support No.: +420 465 672 191 or visit our websites www.oez.com.
CONTROL RELAYS FOR BD250 AND BH630

Type
Product code Specification
Weight [kg]
Package [pc]
OD-BHD-RX01
37425
24 V a.c./d.c.
0,06
OD-BHD-RX02
37426
48 V a.c./d.c.
0,06
OD-BHD-RA03
37427
110 230 V a.c.
0,06
OD-BHD-RD04
37428
110 V d.c.
0,06
- control relay is suitable for control of the circuit breaker with motor drive in withdrawable/plug-in device or in combination with
mechanical interlocking by bowden, see page E72, E73, F70, F71
Specifications
Type
OD-BHD-R
Standards
Approval marks
EN 61812-1
Control circuit
Ue
Rated frequency
Consumption at Un
at 24 230 V a.c.
at 24 220 v d.c.
Connection
Torque
Control impulse
Min. excitation time
Max. excitation time
Other data
Mounting on U rail according to EN 60715 - type
Degree of protection
Ambient temperature
Working position
Seismic resistance
24 V a.c./d.c., 48 V a.c./d.c.,
110 230 V a.c./d.c., 110 V d.c.
50 Hz
1.2 VA 2.6 VA
1.4 W 1.7 W
30 000 cycles
30 000 cycles
0.2 2.5 mm2
0.5 Nm
15 ms
unlimited
TH 35
IP20
-20 +50 C
arbitrary
3g / 8 50 Hz
17.5
~4.5
86
45
65.5
~88
OD-BHD-R...
24
44
62
P3
Other accessories
Modeion
SPARE PARTS OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS MODEION

Spare parts for BC160N
Type
OD-BC-SP01
OD-BC-DV01
OD-BC-MS01
CS-BC-T411
CS-BC-T412
OD-BC-KS01
OD-BC-KS41
OD-BC-KON2
Product code
34456
20606
20607
33656
33657
20624
33659
37798
Name - description
Control lever
Conductor holder
Set of screws M3x30, 2 pcs
Connecting terminal
Connecting terminal
Terminal cover, upper or lower terminals, 3-pole, 1 pc
Connector and sockets for MP-BC-X...-B
Weight
0.002
0.001
0.005
0.094
0.095
0.01
0.015
0.02
Package
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Weight
0.007
0.002
0.018
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.001
0.004
0.017
Package
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Weight
0.012
0.002
0.03
0.15
0.2
0.2
0.001
0.004
0.017
Package
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Weight
0.03
0.144
0.004
0.017
Package
1
1
1
1
Spare parts for BD250N, BD250S

Type
Product code
OD-BD-SP01
34457
OD-BD-DV01
15329
OD-BD-MS01
14419
OD-BD-KS01
24720
OD-BD-KS44
35896
OD-BD-KS45
35897
OD-BHD-JUMP
34460
OD-BHD-KON2
34461
OD-BX-KON1
34462
Name - description
Control lever
Conductor holder
Terminal cover, lower terminals, 4-pole, 1 pc
Terminal cover, upper terminals, 4-pole, 1 pc
Jumper for auxiliary releases
Connector and sockets for MP-BD, BH
Connector and sockets for OD-xx-KA0
Spare parts for BH630N, BH630S

Type
Product code
OD-BH-SP01
34458
OD-BH-DV01
15331
OD-BH-MS01
14420
OD-BH-KS01
24730
OD-BH-KS44
35894
OD-BH-KS45
35895
OD-BHD-JUMP
34460
OD-BHD-KON2
34461
OD-BX-KON1
34462
Name - description
Control lever
Conductor holder
Terminal cover, lower terminals, 4-pole, 1 pc
Terminal cover, upper terminals, 4-pole, 1 pc
Jumper for auxiliary releases
Connector and sockets for MP-BD,BH
Spare parts for BL1000S, BL1600S

Type
OD-BL-SP01
OD-BL-MS01
OD-BL-KON2
OD-BX-KON1
P4
Product code
34459
14854
34463
34462
Name - description
Control lever
Connector and sockets for MP-BL-X
Modeion
THE USAGE OF SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS AT GIVEN OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

Particular designs of Modeion switch-disconnectors can be
used together with the assigned device (circuit breaker, fuselink) at the spot of electrical circuit where the value of initial
peak short-circuit current IK is lower or max equal to the

related value from the table:
Type of switch-disconnector Modeion

Back-up protective device
IK [kA]/400 V a.c.
BC
BD
BH
BL1000
BC160 (all overcurrent releases types)
25
25
25
25
25
BD250 (all overcurrent releases types)
18
18
361), 652)
361), 652)
361), 652)
BH630 (all overcurrent releases types)
361), 652)
361), 652)
361), 652)
BL1000 (all overcurrent releases types)
50
50
BL1600 (all overcurrent releases types)
50
3)
PN, PLN, PHN gG max. In = 125 A
3)
PN, PLN, PHN gG max. In = 224 A
100
3)
65
3)
3)
BL1600
3)
z3)
3)
z3)
3)
z
z
3)
65
z3)
3)
65
65
PN, PHN gG max. In = 500 A

PN, PHN gG max. In = 630 A
Notes:
1)
Additional values in table 1) are related to the back-up circuit breaker of design N.
2)
Additional values in table 2) are related to the back-up circuit breaker of design S.
3)
Max value of initial peak short-circuit current that enables the usage of switch-disconnector with back-up fuse-links of lower rated
currents (see 3)) is determined on the basis of equality of their limited current io.
- In rated current of back-up fuse-link has to be min by one degree lower than Ie rated current of the switch-disconnector.
- Given values are valid for voltage 400 V a.c.
Modeion
NOTE
R2
Modeion
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Note: Precise wording of definitions and texts relating to a given term are detailed in the respective standards (see Name).
Name
Symbol
Explanation

EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.1
Ue
Voltage fixed by the manufacturer. Several pertinent tests relate to its determination, as may also the utilization category. Along with the rated (operating) current, it determines the devices utilization. The highest
value of rated operating voltage may in no case be greater than the value of the rated insulation voltage Ui.

EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.2
Ui
Voltage measure to which are related tests of dielectric strength and creepage distance.
Rated current
EN 60947-2; 4.3.2.3
In
Current value of particular circuit breaker that can be handled uninterruptedly. The highest current
valued tripping the circuit breaker in conformity with a specifically stated tripping characteristic.
Reduced rated current
Ir
Specifically established, reduced value of In current for a regulated time-dependent (thermal) release
and that the circuit breaker can handle continuously. Maximum setting is at value equal to In. Changing
Ir shifts the releases tripping characteristic along the current axis. (Ir = k x In holds where k 1)
Tripping time at a given Ir multiple
tr
Time after which circuit breaker will trip, if a current flows through it that is equal to the given multiple
of Ir. Changing tr shifts the tripping characteristic along the time axis.
Actuating current of (selective) releases timeindependent delay
Irmv
Minimum current value causing the releases time-independent delay to actuate.
Delay of time-independent delayed release
tv
If a current flows through the circuit breaker equal to at least Irmv but not reaching Irm the circuit breaker
will trip with time delay tv. Total shut-off time is influenced by the tripping of the circuit breaker itself
and is about 10 20 ms longer.
Actuating current of time-independent

instantaneous (short-circuit) release
Irm
Minimum current value causing the time-independent instantaneous release to actuate.

EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.3
Ie
Rated operating current of device (switch-disconnector) is fixed by the manufacturer with consideration for the rated operating voltage, rated frequency, rated operation, utilization category and type of
protective cover, if that comes into consideration.

EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.4
Iu
Current value set by the manufacturer and which the device can handle in continuous operation, i.e.
during a period longer than 8 hours (weeks, months, or longer).
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity

EN 60947-2; 2.15.1; 4.3.5.2.1
Icu
Ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity value expressed as the rms value of the alternating component
of the assumed short-circuit current that the circuit breaker must be able to manage in the mode: 1x
switching off of the short circuit and a following 1x make-break sequence. After testing, the circuit
breaker need not be able to conduct the rated current uninterruptedly. Icu is set for the rated operating
voltage at the rated frequency and at the established power factor for alternating current or at the time
constant for direct current. Must fulfil the condition: Icu Ik
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity

EN 60947-2; 2.15.2; 4.3.5.2.2
Ics
Value of the operating short-circuit breaking capacity expressed as the rms value of the alternating
component of the assumed short-circuit current that the circuit breaker must be able to manage in
the mode: 1x switching off of the short circuit and a following 2x make-break sequence. May also
be expressed as a percentage of Icu. After testing, the circuit breaker must be able uninterruptedly to
conduct the rated current and to switch off the overcurrent. Temperature increase of the main terminals
may be greater. Ics is set for the rated operating voltage at the rated frequency and at the established
power factor for alternating current or at the time constant for direct current. Permitted: Ics Ik

EN 60947-1; 4.3.6.1
EN 60947-2; 4.3.5.4
EN 60947-3; 4.3.6.1
Icw
Value of short-time withstand current specified by the manufacturer that the device is able to handle
without damage during a designated time period (short-time delay). In case of alternating current, it
is the rms value of the alternating component of the assumed short-circuit current Ip.
Modeion
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Note: Precise wording of definitions and texts relating to a given term are detailed in the respective standards (see Name).
Name
Symbol
Explanation

EN 60947-1; 4.3.6.2
EN 60947-2; 4.3.5.1
EN 60947-3; 4.3.6.2
Icm
Value of short-circuit making capacity specified by the manufacturer for the rated operating voltage
at the rated frequency and at the established power factor for alternating current or at the time
constant for direct current. It is expressed as the maximum assumed peak current. Must fulfil the
condition: Icm ip
Initial peak short-circuit current

EN 60909-0; 1.3.5
Ik
Short-circuit current value at the moment of its arising at a given point in the electrical distribution
expressed as the rms value of the alternating symmetrical component of the assumed short-circuit current.
Surge short-circuit current

EN 60909-0; 1.3.8
ip
Maximum possible momentary value of the assumed short-circuit current. (Corresponds to the
moment the short arises, as a result of which there occurs the peak value of the short-circuit current.)
Prospective short-circuit current

EN 60947-1; 2.5.5
EN 60909-0; 1.3.3
Ip
Short-circuit current value, which would flow through the circuit if the protection device were replaced
and a short circuit were experienced by conductors with negligible impedance. (In a three-phase
distribution, it is assumed that the short circuit is simultaneous in all phases.)
Rated pulse withstand voltage

EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.3
Uimp
Peak value of the voltage impulse of the prescribed form and polarity which the device is able to
withstand without failure at the established conditions and pertinent to which is the value of the
separating air distance. Uimp of the device must be equal to or higher than the value established for
momentary overvoltage at the point in the circuit (overvoltage category) where the device is used.
Overvoltage category
EN 60947-1; 2.5.60
Rated frequency
EN 60947-1; 4.3.3
Numerically defined level of momentary overvoltage, i.e. overvoltage having its origin in atmospheric
or switching. Standard EN 60664-1 establishes for electrical equipment the overvoltage categories:
Overvoltage category IV
- service entrance, outside lead
Overvoltage category III
- fixed wiring
Overvoltage category II
- appliances
Overvoltage category I
- light-current appliances
fn
Frequency of the supply network for which the device is proposed and that corresponds to its other
characteristics values.
Utilization category
(circuit breakers - time selectivity)
EN 60947-2; 4.4
Utilization category of circuit breaker establishes whether or not the circuit breaker specifically is
intended for providing selectivity by means of intentional time delay (time selectivity) with other
protective devices connected in series on the load side in short-circuiting conditions.
Utilization category:
A - circuit breakers are not specifically intended for providing time selectivity
B - circuit breakers are specifically intended for providing time selectivity
Utilization category
(switch-disconnectors - switching mode)
EN 60947-3; 4.4
Utilization category defines the assumed use of switch devices (switch-disconnectors). Characterised
by values of current and voltage, expressed as multiples of rated operating current and rated operating
voltage, and further by power factors or time constants of the circuit.
Utilization category:
AC-21B (DC-21B) - infrequent switching of resistive loads, including moderate overloading
AC-22B (DC-21B) - infrequent switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, including moderate overloading
AC-23B (DC-23B) - infrequent switching of motor loads or other highly inductive loads.
Pollution degree
EN 60947-1; 2.5.58; 6.1.3.2
Pollution degree relates to the conditions of the surrounding environment for which the device is intended.
Pollution degree:
1 - No contamination will occur, or only dry, non-conducting contamination.
2 - Normally occurs only non-conducting contamination, but sometimes there may occur temporary
conductibility due to condensation.
3 - There occurs conductive contamination or dry non-conducting contamination that with the effect of
condensation will become conductive.
4 - Contamination generates continuous conductibility, by means of, for example, conductive dust, rain or snow.
S2
Modeion
NOTE
Modeion
NOTE
OEZ s.r.o.
edivsk 339
561 51 Letohrad
Czech Republic
tel.: +420 465 672 111
+420 465 672 101
fax: +420 465 672 398
+420 465 672 151
e-mail: oeztrade.cz@oez.com
www.oez.com
www.oez.com
Modeion
J1-2011-A
www.oez.com
Modeion
Any changes reserved

Diagramas Interruptores OEZ PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Diagramas Interruptores OEZ PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Modeion

Moulded case circuit breakers

Any changes reserved

Moulded case circuit breakers

Moulded case circuit breakers

BD250N, BD250S ...........................................................................................................................................E

BH630N, BH630S ...........................................................................................................................................F

DELAY UNIT ......................................................................................................................................................P

Moulded case circuit breakers

Moulded case circuit breakers

RP-BHD-CN61 ...................E11, F11

Moulded case circuit breakers

Moulded case circuit breakers

SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS SELECTION

105 x 225 x 105 mm

210 x 350 x 135 mm

210 x 350 x 135 mm

available, unavailable, + being prepared

SPECIFICATIONS FOR SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS SELECTION

2.8 kA / 415 V a.c.

available, unavailable, + being prepared

Moulded case circuit breakers

SPECIFICATIONS FOR OVERCURRENT RELEASES SELECTION

MOTORS, GENERATORS, TRANSFORMERS, LINES

Moulded case circuit breakers

SUMMARY OF OVERCURRENT RELEASES

They have one type of characteristic and fixed In andIrm settings.

They have one type of characteristic with adjustable Ir andIrm.

They have more types of characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr andIrm.

They have more types of characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr,

They have more types of characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr,

1. Dependent release (thermal) L

MTV9 and U001 - The delayed independent release has the

Tripping characteristic setting

3. Independent instantaneous release (short-circuit trip)

U001 - The independent release can be disabled by setting

Moulded case circuit breakers

SUMMARY OF OVERCURRENT RELEASES

Graph of tripping time shortening under load

Overcurrent releases are set by the manufacturer

Thermal standstill time of the characteristics

Moulded case circuit breakers

PURCHASE ORDER EXAMPLE

Your purchase order:

and outgoing lines of the circuit breaker will be formed by

- auxiliary switch (2x make contact)

- undervoltage release (230 V a.c., 400, 500 V/220 V d.c.)

CUSTOM ASSEMBLY OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS MODEION

Your order should include the following specification:

Moulded case circuit breakers

REPLACEMENT OF BA511 CIRCUIT BREAKER

modifying the switchboard

Moulded case circuit breakers

REPLACEMENT OF BA511 CIRCUIT BREAKER

New circuit breaker

Replacement of original BA511*33 circuit breaker

Replacement of BA511*37 circuit breaker

New circuit breaker

Replacement of original BA511*37 circuit breaker

Moulded case circuit breakers

REPLACEMENT OF BA511 CIRCUIT BREAKER

New circuit breaker